Supplies data to an analysis effect.
This interface can be implemented by either an
Supplies the analysis data to an analysis transform.
The data that the transform will analyze.
The size of the analysis data.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The output of the transform will be copied to CPU-accessible memory by the imaging effects system before being passed to the implementation.
If this call fails, the corresponding
Represents a bitmap that has been bound to an
Returns the size, in device-independent pixels (DIPs), of the bitmap.
A DIP is 1/96?of an inch. To retrieve the size in device pixels, use the
Returns the size, in device-dependent units (pixels), of the bitmap.
Retrieves the pixel format and alpha mode of the bitmap.
Returns the size, in device-independent pixels (DIPs), of the bitmap.
The size, in DIPs, of the bitmap.
A DIP is 1/96?of an inch. To retrieve the size in device pixels, use the
Returns the size, in device-dependent units (pixels), of the bitmap.
The size, in pixels, of the bitmap.
Retrieves the pixel format and alpha mode of the bitmap.
The pixel format and alpha mode of the bitmap.
Return the dots per inch (DPI) of the bitmap.
The horizontal DPI of the image. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
The vertical DPI of the image. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Copies the specified region from the specified bitmap into the current bitmap.
In the current bitmap, the upper-left corner of the area to which the region specified by srcRect is copied.
The bitmap to copy from.
The area of bitmap to copy.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method does not update the size of the current bitmap. If the contents of the source bitmap do not fit in the current bitmap, this method fails. Also, note that this method does not perform format conversion, and will fail if the bitmap formats do not match.
Calling this method may cause the current batch to flush if the bitmap is active in the batch. If the batch that was flushed does not complete successfully, this method fails. However, this method does not clear the error state of the render target on which the batch was flushed. The failing
Starting with Windows?8.1, this method supports block compressed bitmaps. If you are using a block compressed format, the end coordinates of the srcRect parameter must be multiples of 4 or the method returns E_INVALIDARG.
Copies the specified region from the specified render target into the current bitmap.
In the current bitmap, the upper-left corner of the area to which the region specified by srcRect is copied.
The render target that contains the region to copy.
The area of renderTarget to copy.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method does not update the size of the current bitmap. If the contents of the source bitmap do not fit in the current bitmap, this method fails. Also, note that this method does not perform format conversion, and will fail if the bitmap formats do not match.
Calling this method may cause the current batch to flush if the bitmap is active in the batch. If the batch that was flushed does not complete successfully, this method fails. However, this method does not clear the error state of the render target on which the batch was flushed. The failing
All clips and layers must be popped off of the render target before calling this method. The method returns
Copies the specified region from memory into the current bitmap.
In the current bitmap, the upper-left corner of the area to which the region specified by srcRect is copied.
The data to copy.
The stride, or pitch, of the source bitmap stored in srcData. The stride is the byte count of a scanline (one row of pixels in memory). The stride can be computed from the following formula: pixel width * bytes per pixel + memory padding.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method does not update the size of the current bitmap. If the contents of the source bitmap do not fit in the current bitmap, this method fails. Also, note that this method does not perform format conversion; the two bitmap formats should match.
If this method is passed invalid input (such as an invalid destination rectangle), can produce unpredictable results, such as a distorted image or device failure.
Calling this method may cause the current batch to flush if the bitmap is active in the batch. If the batch that was flushed does not complete successfully, this method fails. However, this method does not clear the error state of the render target on which the batch was flushed. The failing
Starting with Windows?8.1, this method supports block compressed bitmaps. If you are using a block compressed format, the end coordinates of the srcRect parameter must be multiples of 4 or the method returns E_INVALIDARG.
Represents a bitmap that can be used as a surface for an
Gets the color context information associated with the bitmap.
If the bitmap was created without specifying a color context, the returned context is
Gets the options used in creating the bitmap.
Gets either the surface that was specified when the bitmap was created, or the default surface created when the bitmap was created.
The bitmap used must have been created from a DXGI surface render target, a derived render target, or a device context created from an
The returned surface can be used with Microsoft Direct3D or any other API that interoperates with shared surfaces. The application must transitively ensure that the surface is usable on the Direct3D device that is used in this context. For example, if using the surface with Direct2D then the Direct2D render target must have been created through
Gets the color context information associated with the bitmap.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the color context interface associated with the bitmap.
If the bitmap was created without specifying a color context, the returned context is
Gets the options used in creating the bitmap.
This method returns the options used.
Gets either the surface that was specified when the bitmap was created, or the default surface created when the bitmap was created.
The underlying DXGI surface for the bitmap.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
Cannot draw with a bitmap that is currently bound as the target bitmap. |
?
The bitmap used must have been created from a DXGI surface render target, a derived render target, or a device context created from an
The returned surface can be used with Microsoft Direct3D or any other API that interoperates with shared surfaces. The application must transitively ensure that the surface is usable on the Direct3D device that is used in this context. For example, if using the surface with Direct2D then the Direct2D render target must have been created through
Maps the given bitmap into memory.
The options used in mapping the bitmap into memory.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the rectangle that is mapped into memory.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_INVALIDARG | One or more arguments are not valid |
D3DERR_DEVICELOST | The device has been lost but cannot be reset at this time. |
?
The bitmap must have been created with the
Unmaps the bitmap from memory.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_INVALIDARG | One or more arguments are not valid. |
E_POINTER | Pointer is not valid. |
?
Any memory returned from the Map call is now invalid and may be reclaimed by the operating system or used for other purposes.
The bitmap must have been previously mapped.
Paints an area with a bitmap.
A bitmap brush is used to fill a geometry with a bitmap. Like all brushes, it defines an infinite plane of content. Because bitmaps are finite, the brush relies on an "extend mode" to determine how the plane is filled horizontally and vertically.
Gets or sets the method by which the brush horizontally tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
Like all brushes,
Gets or sets the method by which the brush vertically tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
Like all brushes,
Gets or sets the interpolation method used when the brush bitmap is scaled or rotated.
This method gets the interpolation mode of a bitmap, which is specified by the
The interpolation mode of a bitmap also affects subpixel translations. In a subpixel translation, linear interpolation positions the bitmap more precisely to the application request, but blurs the bitmap in the process.
Gets or sets the bitmap source that this brush uses to paint.
Specifies how the brush horizontally tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
A value that specifies how the brush horizontally tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
Sometimes, the bitmap for a bitmap brush doesn't completely fill the area being painted. When this happens, Direct2D uses the brush's horizontal (SetExtendModeX) and vertical (SetExtendModeY) extend mode settings to determine how to fill the remaining area.
The following illustration shows the results from every possible combination of the extend modes for an
Specifies how the brush vertically tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
A value that specifies how the brush vertically tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
Sometimes, the bitmap for a bitmap brush doesn't completely fill the area being painted. When this happens, Direct2D uses the brush's horizontal (SetExtendModeX) and vertical (SetExtendModeY) extend mode settings to determine how to fill the remaining area.
The following illustration shows the results from every possible combination of the extend modes for an
Specifies the interpolation mode used when the brush bitmap is scaled or rotated.
The interpolation mode used when the brush bitmap is scaled or rotated.
This method sets the interpolation mode for a bitmap, which is an enum value that is specified in the
The interpolation mode of a bitmap also affects subpixel translations. In a subpixel translation, bilinear interpolation positions the bitmap more precisely to the application requests, but blurs the bitmap in the process.
Specifies the bitmap source that this brush uses to paint.
The bitmap source used by the brush.
This method specifies the bitmap source that this brush uses to paint. The bitmap is not resized or rescaled automatically to fit the geometry that it fills. The bitmap stays at its native size. To resize or translate the bitmap, use the SetTransform method to apply a transform to the brush.
The native size of a bitmap is the width and height in bitmap pixels, divided by the bitmap DPI. This native size forms the base tile of the brush. To tile a subregion of the bitmap, you must generate a new bitmap containing this subregion and use SetBitmap to apply it to the brush.
Gets the method by which the brush horizontally tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
A value that specifies how the brush horizontally tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
Like all brushes,
Gets the method by which the brush vertically tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
A value that specifies how the brush vertically tiles those areas that extend past its bitmap.
Like all brushes,
Gets the interpolation method used when the brush bitmap is scaled or rotated.
The interpolation method used when the brush bitmap is scaled or rotated.
This method gets the interpolation mode of a bitmap, which is specified by the
The interpolation mode of a bitmap also affects subpixel translations. In a subpixel translation, linear interpolation positions the bitmap more precisely to the application request, but blurs the bitmap in the process.
Gets the bitmap source that this brush uses to paint.
When this method returns, contains the address to a reference to the bitmap with which this brush paints.
Paints an area with a bitmap.
Returns or sets the current interpolation mode of the brush.
Sets the interpolation mode for the brush.
The mode to use.
Returns the current interpolation mode of the brush.
The current interpolation mode.
Describes the pixel format and dpi of a bitmap.
The bitmap's pixel format and alpha mode.
The horizontal dpi of the bitmap.
The vertical dpi of the bitmap.
This structure allows a
If both dpiX and dpiY are 0, the dpi of the bitmap will be set to the desktop dpi if the device context is a windowed context, or 96 dpi for any other device context.
Renders to an intermediate texture created by the CreateCompatibleRenderTarget method.
An
To write directly to a WIC bitmap instead, use the
Retrieves the bitmap for this render target. The returned bitmap can be used for drawing operations.
The DPI for the
Retrieves the bitmap for this render target. The returned bitmap can be used for drawing operations.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the bitmap for this render target. This bitmap can be used for drawing operations.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The DPI for the
Provides methods to allow a blend operation to be inserted into a transform graph.
The image output of the blend transform is the same as rendering an image effect graph with these steps:
Gets or sets the blend description of the corresponding blend transform object.
Changes the blend description of the corresponding blend transform object.
The new blend description specified for the blend transform.
Gets the blend description of the corresponding blend transform object.
When this method returns, contains the blend description specified for the blend transform.
Extends the input rectangle to infinity using the specified extend modes.
Gets or sets the extend mode in the x direction.
Gets or sets the extend mode in the y direction.
Sets the extend mode in the x direction.
The extend mode in the x direction.
If the extend mode enumeration is invalid, this operation is ignored.
Sets the extend mode in the y direction.
The extend mode in the y direction.
If the extend mode enumeration is invalid, this operation is ignored.
Gets the extend mode in the x direction.
This method returns the extend mode in the x direction.
Gets the extend mode in the y direction.
This method returns the extend mode in the y direction.
A support transform for effects to modify the output rectangle of the previous effect or bitmap.
The support transform can be used for two different reasons.
To indicate that a region of its input image is already transparent black. The expanded area will be treated as transparent black.
This can increase efficiency for rendering bitmaps.
To increase the size of the input image.
?
?
This sets the output bounds for the support transform.
The output bounds.
Returns the output rectangle of the support transform.
The output bounds.
Represents a color context that can be used with an
Gets the color space of the color context.
Gets the size of the color profile associated with the bitmap.
This can be used to allocate a buffer to receive the color profile bytes associated with the context.
Gets the color space of the color context.
This method returns the color space of the contained ICC profile.
Gets the size of the color profile associated with the bitmap.
This method returns the size of the profile in bytes.
This can be used to allocate a buffer to receive the color profile bytes associated with the context.
Gets the color profile bytes for an
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
The supplied buffer was too small to accomodate the data. |
?
If profileSize is insufficient to store the entire profile, profile is zero-initialized before this method fails.
This interface performs all the same functions as the
Represents a color context to be used with the Color Management Effect.
Represents a color context to be used with the Color Management Effect.
Represents a sequence of commands that can be recorded and played back.
The command list does not include static copies of resources with the recorded set of commands. All bitmaps, effects, and geometries are stored as references to the actual resource and all the brushes are stored by value. All the resource creation and destruction happens outside of the command list. The following table lists resources and how they are treated inside of a command list.
Resource | How it is treated by the command list |
---|---|
Solid-color brush | Passed by value. |
Bitmap brush | The brush is passed by value but the bitmap that is used to create the brush is in fact referenced. |
Gradient brushes ? both linear and radial gradient | The brush is passed by value but the gradient stop collection itself is referenced. The gradient stop collection object is immutable. |
Bitmaps | Passed by reference. |
Drawing state block | The actual state on the device context is converted into set functions like set transform and is passed by value. |
Geometry | Immutable object passed by value. |
Stroke style | Immutable object passed by value. |
Mesh | Immutable object passed by value. |
?
Streams the contents of the command list to the specified command sink.
The sink into which the command list will be streamed.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The return value indicates any failures the command sink implementation returns through its EndDraw method.
The command sink can be implemented by any caller of the API.
If the caller makes any design-time failure calls while a command list is selected as a target, the command list is placed in an error state. The stream call fails without making any calls to the passed in sink.
Sample use:
Class MyCommandSink : public{ public: // All of the methods implemented here. }; StreamToMyCommandSink( __in *pCommandList ) { hr = ; MyCommandSink *pCommandSink = new MyCommandSink(); hr = pCommandSink ? : E_OUTOFMEMORY; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { // Receive the contents of the command sink streamed to the sink. hr = pCommandList->Stream(pCommandSink); } SafeRelease(&pCommandSink); return hr; }
Instructs the command list to stop accepting commands so that you can use it as an input to an effect or in a call to
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
Close has already been called on the command list. |
?
Note??If the device context associated with the command list has an error, the command list returns the same error.?
This method returns
If the Close method returns an error, any future use of the command list results in the same error.
The command sink is implemented by you for an application when you want to receive a playback of the commands recorded in a command list. A typical usage will be for transforming the command list into another format such as XPS when some degree of conversion between the Direct2D primitives and the target format is required.
The command sink interface doesn't have any resource creation methods on it. The resources are still logically bound to the Direct2D device on which the command list was created and will be passed in to the command sink implementation.
The
The
Not all methods implemented by
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Enables access to the new primitive blend modes, MIN and ADD.
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Enables access to the new primitive blend modes, MIN and ADD.
Sets a new primitive blend mode.
The primitive blend that will apply to subsequent primitives.
If the method succeeds, it returns
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Renders the given ink object using the given brush and ink style.
The ink object to be rendered.
The brush with which to render the ink object.
The ink style to use when rendering the ink object.
This method does not return a value.
Renders a given gradient mesh to the target.
The gradient mesh to be rendered.
This method does not return a value.
Draws a metafile to the command sink using the given source and destination rectangles.
The metafile to draw.
The rectangle in the target where the metafile will be drawn, relative to the upper left corner (defined in DIPs). If
The rectangle of the source metafile that will be drawn, relative to the upper left corner (defined in DIPs). If
This method does not return a value.
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Renders part or all of the given sprite batch to the device context using the specified drawing options.
The sprite batch to draw.
The index of the first sprite in the sprite batch to draw.
The number of sprites to draw.
The bitmap from which the sprites are to be sourced. Each sprite?s source rectangle refers to a portion of this bitmap.
The interpolation mode to use when drawing this sprite batch. This determines how Direct2D interpolates pixels within the drawn sprites if scaling is performed.
The additional drawing options, if any, to be used for this sprite batch.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Renders part or all of the given sprite batch to the device context using the specified drawing options.
The sprite batch to draw.
The index of the first sprite in the sprite batch to draw.
The number of sprites to draw.
The bitmap from which the sprites are to be sourced. Each sprite?s source rectangle refers to a portion of this bitmap.
The interpolation mode to use when drawing this sprite batch. This determines how Direct2D interpolates pixels within the drawn sprites if scaling is performed.
The additional drawing options, if any, to be used for this sprite batch.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Renders part or all of the given sprite batch to the device context using the specified drawing options.
The sprite batch to draw.
The index of the first sprite in the sprite batch to draw.
The number of sprites to draw.
The bitmap from which the sprites are to be sourced. Each sprite?s source rectangle refers to a portion of this bitmap.
The interpolation mode to use when drawing this sprite batch. This determines how Direct2D interpolates pixels within the drawn sprites if scaling is performed.
The additional drawing options, if any, to be used for this sprite batch.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Sets a new primitive blend mode. Allows access to the MAX primitive blend mode.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Sets a new primitive blend mode. Allows access to the MAX primitive blend mode.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The command sink is implemented by you for an application when you want to receive a playback of the commands recorded in a command list. A typical usage will be for transforming the command list into another format such as XPS when some degree of conversion between the Direct2D primitives and the target format is required.
The command sink interface doesn't have any resource creation methods on it. The resources are still logically bound to the Direct2D device on which the command list was created and will be passed in to the command sink implementation.
The
The
Not all methods implemented by
Notifies the implementation of the command sink that drawing is about to commence.
This method always returns
Indicates when
If the method/function succeeds, it returns
The
It allows the calling function or method to indicate a failure back to the stream implementation.
Sets the antialiasing mode that will be used to render any subsequent geometry.
The antialiasing mode selected for the command list.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Sets the tags that correspond to the tags in the command sink.
The first tag to associate with the primitive.
The second tag to associate with the primitive.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Indicates the new default antialiasing mode for text.
The antialiasing mode for the text.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Indicates more detailed text rendering parameters.
The parameters to use for text rendering.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Sets a new transform.
The transform to be set.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The transform will be applied to the corresponding device context.
Sets a new primitive blend mode.
The primitive blend that will apply to subsequent primitives.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The unit mode changes the meaning of subsequent units from device-independent pixels (DIPs) to pixels or the other way. The command sink does not record a DPI, this is implied by the playback context or other playback interface such as
If the method succeeds, it returns
The unit mode changes the interpretation of units from DIPs to pixels or vice versa.
Clears the drawing area to the specified color.
The color to which the command sink should be cleared.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The clear color is restricted by the currently selected clip and layer bounds.
If no color is specified, the color should be interpreted by context. Examples include but are not limited to:
Indicates the glyphs to be drawn.
The upper left corner of the baseline.
The glyphs to render.
Additional non-rendering information about the glyphs.
The brush used to fill the glyphs.
The measuring mode to apply to the glyphs.
If the method succeeds, it returns
DrawText and DrawTextLayout are broken down into glyph runs and rectangles by the time the command sink is processed. So, these methods aren't available on the command sink. Since the application may require additional callback processing when calling DrawTextLayout, this semantic can't be easily preserved in the command list.
Draws a line drawn between two points.
The start point of the line.
The end point of the line.
The brush used to fill the line.
The width of the stroke to fill the line.
The style of the stroke. If not specified, the stroke is solid.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Indicates the geometry to be drawn to the command sink.
The geometry to be stroked.
The brush that will be used to fill the stroked geometry.
The width of the stroke.
The style of the stroke.
An
Ellipses and rounded rectangles are converted to the corresponding ellipse and rounded rectangle geometries before calling into the DrawGeometry method.
Draws a rectangle.
The rectangle to be drawn to the command sink.
The brush used to stroke the geometry.
The width of the stroke.
The style of the stroke.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Draws a bitmap to the render target.
The bitmap to draw.
The destination rectangle. The default is the size of the bitmap and the location is the upper left corner of the render target.
The opacity of the bitmap.
The interpolation mode to use.
An optional source rectangle.
An optional perspective transform.
This method does not return a value.
The destinationRectangle parameter defines the rectangle in the target where the bitmap will appear (in device-independent pixels (DIPs)). This is affected by the currently set transform and the perspective transform, if set. If you specify
The sourceRectangle defines the sub-rectangle of the source bitmap (in DIPs). DrawBitmap clips this rectangle to the size of the source bitmap, so it's impossible to sample outside of the bitmap. If you specify
The perspectiveTransform is specified in addition to the transform on device context.
Draws the provided image to the command sink.
The image to be drawn to the command sink.
This defines the offset in the destination space that the image will be rendered to. The entire logical extent of the image will be rendered to the corresponding destination. If not specified, the destination origin will be (0, 0). The top-left corner of the image will be mapped to the target offset. This will not necessarily be the origin.
The corresponding rectangle in the image space will be mapped to the provided origins when processing the image.
The interpolation mode to use to scale the image if necessary.
If specified, the composite mode that will be applied to the limits of the currently selected clip.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Because the image can itself be a command list or contain an effect graph that in turn contains a command list, this method can result in recursive processing.
Draw a metafile to the device context.
The metafile to draw.
The offset from the upper left corner of the render target.
This method does not return a value.
The targetOffset defines the offset in the destination space that the image will be rendered to. The entire logical extent of the image is rendered to the corresponding destination. If you don't specify the offset, the destination origin will be (0, 0). The top, left corner of the image will be mapped to the target offset. This will not necessarily be the origin.
Indicates a mesh to be filled by the command sink.
The mesh object to be filled.
The brush with which to fill the mesh.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Fills an opacity mask on the command sink.
The bitmap whose alpha channel will be sampled to define the opacity mask.
The brush with which to fill the mask.
The destination rectangle in which to fill the mask. If not specified, this is the origin.
The source rectangle within the opacity mask. If not specified, this is the entire mask.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The opacity mask bitmap must be considered to be clamped on each axis.
Indicates to the command sink a geometry to be filled.
The geometry that should be filled.
The primary brush used to fill the geometry.
A brush whose alpha channel is used to modify the opacity of the primary fill brush.
If the method succeeds, it returns
If the opacity brush is specified, the primary brush will be a bitmap brush fixed on both the x-axis and the y-axis.
Ellipses and rounded rectangles are converted to the corresponding geometry before being passed to FillGeometry.
Indicates to the command sink a rectangle to be filled.
The rectangle to fill.
The brush with which to fill the rectangle.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Pushes a clipping rectangle onto the clip and layer stack.
The rectangle that defines the clip.
The antialias mode for the clip.
If the method succeeds, it returns
If the current world transform is not preserving the axis, clipRectangle is transformed and the bounds of the transformed rectangle are used instead.
Pushes a layer onto the clip and layer stack.
The parameters that define the layer.
The layer resource that receives subsequent drawing operations.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Removes an axis-aligned clip from the layer and clip stack.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Removes a layer from the layer and clip stack.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Enables specification of information for a compute-shader rendering pass.
The transform changes the state on this render information to specify the compute shader and its dependent resources.
Establishes or changes the constant buffer data for this transform.
The data applied to the constant buffer.
The number of bytes of data in the constant buffer.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the compute shader to the given shader resource. The resource must be loaded before this call is made.
The
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Sets the resource texture corresponding to the given shader texture index to the given texture resource. The texture resource must already have been loaded with
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
This method allows a compute-shader?based transform to select the number of thread groups to execute based on the number of output pixels it needs to fill.
If this call fails, the corresponding
This method allows a compute-shader?based transform to select the number of thread groups to execute based on the number of output pixels it needs to fill.
If this call fails, the corresponding
Sets the render information used to specify the compute shader pass.
The render information object to set.
If the method succeeds, it returns
If this method fails,
This method allows a compute-shader?based transform to select the number of thread groups to execute based on the number of output pixels it needs to fill.
The output rectangle that will be filled by the compute transform.
The number of threads in the x dimension.
The number of threads in the y dimension.
The number of threads in the z dimension.
If the method succeeds, it returns
If this call fails, the corresponding
Allows a custom effect's interface and behavior to be specified by the effect author.
This interface is created by the effect author from a static factory registered through the ID2D1Factory::RegisterEffect method.
Allows a custom effect's interface and behavior to be specified by the effect author.
This interface is created by the effect author from a static factory registered through the ID2D1Factory::RegisterEffect method.
The effect can use this method to do one time initialization tasks. If this method is not needed, the method can just return
An internal context interface that creates and returns effect author?centric types.
The effect can populate the transform graph with a topology and can update it later.
If the method succeeds, it returns
This moves resource creation cost to the CreateEffect call, rather than during rendering.
If the implementation fails this call, the corresponding
The following example shows an effect implementing an initialize method.
Prepares an effect for the rendering process.
Indicates the type of change the effect should expect.
If the method succeeds, it returns
This method is called by the renderer when the effect is within an effect graph that is drawn.
The method will be called:
The method will not otherwise be called. The transforms created by the effect will be called to handle their input and output rectangles for every draw call.
Most effects defer creating any resources or specifying a topology until this call is made. They store their properties and map them to a concrete set of rendering techniques when first drawn.
The renderer calls this method to provide the effect implementation with a way to specify its transform graph and transform graph changes.
The renderer calls this method when:
The graph to which the effect describes its transform topology through the SetDescription call.
An error that prevents the effect from being initialized if called as part of the CreateEffect call. If the effect fails a subsequent SetGraph call:
Defines a vertex shader and the input element description to define the input layout. The combination is used to allow a custom vertex effect to create a custom vertex shader and pass it a custom layout.
The vertex shader will be loaded by the CreateVertexBuffer call that accepts the vertex buffer properties.
This structure does not need to be specified if one of the standard vertex shaders is used.
The unique ID of the vertex shader.
An array of input assembler stage data types.
An array of input assembler stage data types.
The number of input elements in the vertex shader.
The vertex stride.
Creates a factory object that can be used to create Direct2D resources.
The threading model of the factory and the resources it creates.
A reference to the IID of
The level of detail provided to the debugging layer.
When this method returns, contains the address to a reference to the new factory.
If this function succeeds, it returns
The
Creates a rotation transformation that rotates by the specified angle about the specified point.
The clockwise rotation angle, in degrees.
The point about which to rotate.
When this method returns, contains the new rotation transformation. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Rotation occurs in the plane of the 2-D surface.
Creates a skew transformation that has the specified x-axis angle, y-axis angle, and center point.
The x-axis skew angle, which is measured in degrees counterclockwise from the y-axis.
The y-axis skew angle, which is measured in degrees counterclockwise from the x-axis.
The center point of the skew operation.
When this method returns, contains the rotation transformation. You must allocate storate for this parameter.
Indicates whether the specified matrix is invertible.
The matrix to test.
true if the matrix was inverted; otherwise, false.
Tries to invert the specified matrix.
The matrix to invert.
true if the matrix was inverted; otherwise, false.
Creates a new Direct2D device associated with the provided DXGI device.
The DXGI device the Direct2D device is associated with.
The properties to apply to the Direct2D device.
When this function returns, contains the address of a reference to a Direct2D device.
The function returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
This function will also create a new
If the creation properties are not specified, then d2dDevice will inherit its threading mode from dxgiDevice and debug tracing will not be enabled.
Creates a new Direct2D device context associated with a DXGI surface.
The DXGI surface the Direct2D device context is associated with.
The properties to apply to the Direct2D device context.
When this function returns, contains the address of a reference to a Direct2D device context.
The function returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
This function will also create a new
This function will also create a new
The DXGI device will be specified implicitly through dxgiSurface.
If creationProperties are not specified, the Direct2D device will inherit its threading mode from the DXGI device implied by dxgiSurface and debug tracing will not be enabled.
Converts the given color from one colorspace to another.
The source color space.
The destination color space.
The source color.
The converted color.
Returns the sine and cosine of an angle.
The angle to calculate.
The sine of the angle.
The cosine of the angle.
Returns the tangent of an angle.
The angle to calculate the tangent for.
The tangent of the angle.
Returns the length of a 3 dimensional vector.
The x value of the vector.
The y value of the vector.
The z value of the vector.
The length of the vector.
Computes the maximum factor by which a given transform can stretch any vector.
The input transform matrix.
The scale factor.
Formally, if M is the input matrix, this method will return the maximum value of |V * M| / |V| for all vectors V, where |.| denotes length.
Note??Since this describes how M affects vectors (rather than points), the translation components (_31 and _32) of M are ignored.?Returns the interior points for a gradient mesh patch based on the points defining a Coons patch.
Note??This function is called by the GradientMeshPatchFromCoonsPatch function and is not intended to be used directly.
?This function is called by the GradientMeshPatchFromCoonsPatch function and is not intended to be used directly.
Represents a resource domain whose objects and device contexts can be used together.
Sets the maximum amount of texture memory Direct2D accumulates before it purges the image caches and cached texture allocations.
Creates a new device context from a Direct2D device.
The options to be applied to the created device context.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the new device context.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The new device context will not have a selected target bitmap. The caller must create and select a bitmap as the target surface of the context.
Creates an
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_FAIL | Generic failure code. |
The print format is not supported by the document target. |
?
Sets the maximum amount of texture memory Direct2D accumulates before it purges the image caches and cached texture allocations.
The new maximum texture memory in bytes.
Sets the maximum amount of texture memory Direct2D accumulates before it purges the image caches and cached texture allocations.
The maximum amount of texture memory in bytes.
Clears all of the rendering resources used by Direct2D.
Discards only resources that haven't been used for greater than the specified time in milliseconds. The default is 0 milliseconds.
Represents a resource domain whose objects and device contexts can be used together. This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Retrieves or sets the current rendering priority of the device.
Retrieves the current rendering priority of the device.
The current rendering priority of the device.
Sets the priority of Direct2D rendering operations performed on any device context associated with the device.
The desired rendering priority for the device and associated contexts.
Calling this method affects the rendering priority of all device contexts associated with the device. This method can be called at any time, but is not guaranteed to take effect until the beginning of the next frame. The recommended usage is to call this method outside of BeginDraw and EndDraw blocks. Cycling this property frequently within drawing blocks will effectively reduce the benefits of any throttling that is applied.
Represents a resource domain whose objects and device contexts can be used together. This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Represents a resource domain whose objects and device contexts can be used together. This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Returns the DXGI device associated with this Direct2D device.
Creates a new
If this method succeeds, it returns
Flush all device contexts that reference a given bitmap.
The bitmap, created on this device, for which all referencing device contexts will be flushed.
Returns the DXGI device associated with this Direct2D device.
The DXGI device associated with this Direct2D device.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a resource domain whose objects and device contexts can be used together. This interface performs all the same functions as the
Creates a new
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a resource domain whose objects and device contexts can be used together. This interface performs all the same functions as the
Gets or sets the maximum capacity of the color glyph cache.
Creates a new device context from a Direct2D device.
The options to be applied to the created device context.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the new device context.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The new device context will not have a selected target bitmap. The caller must create and select a bitmap as the target surface of the context.
Sets the maximum capacity of the color glyph cache.
The maximum capacity of the color glyph cache.
The color glyph cache is used to store color bitmap glyphs and SVG glyphs, enabling faster performance if the same glyphs are needed again. The capacity determines the amount of memory that D2D may use to store glyphs that the application does not already reference. If the application references a glyph using GetColorBitmapGlyphImage or GetSvgGlyphImage, after it has been evicted, this glyph does not count toward the cache capacity.
Gets the maximum capacity of the color glyph cache.
Returns the maximum capacity of the color glyph cache in bytes.
Represents a resource domain whose objects and device contexts can be used together.
Represents a set of state and command buffers that are used to render to a target.
The device context can render to a target bitmap or a command list.
Any resource created from a device context can be shared with any other resource created from a device context when both contexts are created on the same device.
Gets the device associated with a device context.
The application can retrieve the device even if it is created from an earlier render target code-path. The application must use an
Gets or sets the target currently associated with the device context.
If a target is not associated with the device context, target will contain
If the currently selected target is a bitmap rather than a command list, the application can gain access to the initial bitmaps created by using one of the following methods:
It is not possible for an application to destroy these bitmaps. All of these bitmaps are bindable as bitmap targets. However not all of these bitmaps can be used as bitmap sources for
CreateDxgiSurfaceRenderTarget will create a bitmap that is usable as a bitmap source if the DXGI surface is bindable as a shader resource view.
CreateCompatibleRenderTarget will always create bitmaps that are usable as a bitmap source.
Direct2D will only lock bitmaps that are not currently locked.
Calling QueryInterface for
Although the target can be a command list, it cannot be any other type of image. It cannot be the output image of an effect.
Gets or sets the rendering controls that have been applied to the context.
Returns or sets the currently set primitive blend used by the device context.
Gets or sets the mode that is being used to interpret values by the device context.
Creates a bitmap that can be used as a target surface, for reading back to the CPU, or as a source for the DrawBitmap and
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
D3DERR_OUTOFVIDEOMEMORY | Direct3D does not have enough display memory to perform the operation. |
?
The new bitmap can be used as a target for SetTarget if it is created with
Creates a Direct2D bitmap by copying a WIC bitmap.
The WIC bitmap source to copy from.
A bitmap properties structure that specifies bitmap creation options.
The address of the newly created bitmap object.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Starting with Windows?8.1, the bitmapProperties parameter is optional. When it is not specified, the created bitmap inherits the pixel format and alpha mode from wicBitmapSource. For a list of supported pixel formats and alpha modes, see Supported Pixel Formats and Alpha Modes.
When the bitmapProperties parameter is specified, the value in bitmapProperties->pixelFormat must either be
When bitmapProperties->pixelFormat.alphaMode is set to
Creates a color context.
The space of color context to create.
A buffer containing the ICC profile bytes used to initialize the color context when space is
The size in bytes of Profile.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a new color context object.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
The new color context can be used in
When space is
Creates a color context by loading it from the specified filename. The profile bytes are the contents of the file specified by Filename.
The path to the file containing the profile bytes to initialize the color context with.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a new color context.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
The new color context can be used in
Creates a color context from an
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
The new color context can be used in
Creates a bitmap from a DXGI surface that can be set as a target surface or have additional color context information specified.
The DXGI surface from which the bitmap can be created.
Note??The DXGI surface must have been created from the same Direct3D device that the Direct2D device context is associated with. ?The bitmap properties specified in addition to the surface.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a new bitmap object.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
D3DERR_OUTOFVIDEOMEMORY | Direct3D does not have enough display memory to perform the operation. |
?
If the bitmap properties are not specified, the following information is assumed:
If the bitmap properties are specified, the bitmap properties will be used as follows:
Creates an effect for the specified class ID.
The class ID of the effect to create. See Built-in Effects for a list of effect IDs.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a new effect.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
D3DERR_OUTOFVIDEOMEMORY | Direct3D does not have enough display memory to perform the operation. |
The specified effect is not registered by the system. | |
The effect requires capabilities not supported by the D2D device. |
?
If the created effect is a custom effect that is implemented in a DLL, this doesn't increment the reference count for that DLL. If the application deletes an effect while that effect is loaded, the resulting behavior is unpredictable.
Creates a gradient stop collection, enabling the gradient to contain color channels with values outside of [0,1] and also enabling rendering to a high-color render target with interpolation in sRGB space.
An array of color values and offsets.
The number of elements in the gradientStops array.
Specifies both the input color space and the space in which the color interpolation occurs.
The color space that colors will be converted to after interpolation occurs.
The precision of the texture used to hold interpolated values.
Note??This method will fail if the underlying Direct3D device does not support the requested buffer precision. UseDefines how colors outside of the range defined by the stop collection are determined.
Defines how colors are interpolated.
The new gradient stop collection.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
This method linearly interpolates between the color stops. An optional color space conversion is applied post-interpolation. Whether and how this gamma conversion is applied is determined by the pre- and post-interpolation. This method will fail if the device context does not support the requested buffer precision.
In order to get the desired result, you need to ensure that the inputs are specified in the correct color space.
You must always specify colors in straight alpha, regardless of interpolation mode being premultiplied or straight. The interpolation mode only affects the interpolated values. Likewise, the stops returned by
If you specify
Starting with Windows?8, the interpolation behavior of this method has changed.
The table here shows the behavior in Windows?7 and earlier.
Gamma | Before Interpolation Behavior | After Interpolation Behavior | GetColorInteroplationGamma (output color space) |
---|---|---|---|
1.0 | Clamps the inputs and then converts from sRGB to scRGB. | Converts from scRGB to sRGB post-interpolation. | 1.0 |
2.2 | Clamps the inputs. | No Operation | 2.2 |
?
The table here shows the behavior in Windows?8 and later.
Gamma | Before Interpolation Behavior | After Interpolation Behavior | GetColorInteroplationGamma (output color space) |
---|---|---|---|
sRGB to scRGB | No Operation | Clamps the outputs and then converts from sRGB to scRGB. | 1.0 |
scRGB to sRGB | No Operation | Clamps the outputs and then converts from sRGB to scRGB. | 2.2 |
sRGB to sRGB | No Operation | No Operation | 2.2 |
scRGB to scRGB | No Operation | No Operation | 1.0 |
?
Creates an image brush. The input image can be any type of image, including a bitmap, effect, or a command list.
The image to be used as a source for the image brush.
The properties specific to an image brush.
Properties common to all brushes.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the input rectangles.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
The image brush can be used to fill an arbitrary geometry, an opacity mask or text.
This sample illustrates drawing a rectangle with an image brush.
CreatePatternBrush( __in *pDeviceContext, __deref_out **ppImageBrush ) { hr = ; *pOldTarget = null ; pDeviceContext->GetTarget(&pOldTarget);*pCommandList = null ; hr = pDeviceContext->CreateCommandList(&pCommandList); if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { pDeviceContext->SetTarget(pCommandList); hr = RenderPatternToCommandList(pDeviceContext); } pDeviceContext->SetTarget(pOldTarget);*pImageBrush = null ; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pDeviceContext->CreateImageBrush( pCommandList, D2D1::ImageBrushProperties( D2D1::RectF(198, 298, 370, 470),, , ), &pImageBrush ); } // Fill a rectangle with the image brush. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { pDeviceContext->FillRectangle( D2D1::RectF(0, 0, 100, 100), pImageBrush); } SafeRelease(&pImageBrush); SafeRelease(&pCommandList); SafeRelease(&pOldTarget); return hr; }
Creates a bitmap brush, the input image is a Direct2D bitmap object.
The bitmap to use as the brush.
A bitmap brush properties structure.
A brush properties structure.
The address of the newly created bitmap brush object.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Creates a
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
?
A
Indicates whether the format is supported by the device context. The formats supported are usually determined by the underlying hardware.
The DXGI format to check.
Returns TRUE if the format is supported. Returns
You can use supported formats in the
Indicates whether the buffer precision is supported by the underlying Direct3D device.
Returns TRUE if the buffer precision is supported. Returns
Gets the bounds of an image without the world transform of the context applied.
The image whose bounds will be calculated.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the bounds of the image in device independent pixels (DIPs) and in local space.
The image bounds don't include multiplication by the world transform. They do reflect the current DPI, unit mode, and interpolation mode of the context. To get the bounds that include the world transform, use
The returned bounds reflect which pixels would be impacted by calling DrawImage with a target offset of (0,0) and an identity world transform matrix. They do not reflect the current clip rectangle set on the device context or the extent of the context's current target image.
Gets the bounds of an image with the world transform of the context applied.
The image whose bounds will be calculated.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the bounds of the image in device independent pixels (DIPs).
The image bounds reflect the current DPI, unit mode, and world transform of the context. To get bounds which don't include the world transform, use
The returned bounds reflect which pixels would be impacted by calling DrawImage with the same image and a target offset of (0,0). They do not reflect the current clip rectangle set on the device context or the extent of the context?s current target image.
Gets the world-space bounds in DIPs of the glyph run using the device context DPI.
The origin of the baseline for the glyph run.
The glyph run to render.
The DirectWrite measuring mode that indicates how glyph metrics are used to measure text when it is formatted.
The bounds of the glyph run in DIPs and in world space.
The image bounds reflect the current DPI, unit mode, and world transform of the context.
Gets the device associated with a device context.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a Direct2D device associated with this device context.
The application can retrieve the device even if it is created from an earlier render target code-path. The application must use an
The bitmap or command list to which the Direct2D device context will now render.
The target can be changed at any time, including while the context is drawing.
The target can be either a bitmap created with the
You cannot use SetTarget to render to a bitmap/command list from multiple device contexts simultaneously. An image is considered ?being rendered to? if it has ever been set on a device context within a BeginDraw/EndDraw timespan. If an attempt is made to render to an image through multiple device contexts, all subsequent device contexts after the first will enter an error state.
Callers wishing to attach an image to a second device context should first call EndDraw on the first device context.
Here is an example of the correct calling order.
pDC1->BeginDraw(); pDC1->SetTarget(pImage); // ? pDC1->EndDraw(); pDC2->BeginDraw(); pDC2->SetTarget(pImage); // ? pDC2->EndDraw();
Here is an example of the incorrect calling order.
pDC1->BeginDraw(); pDC2->BeginDraw(); pDC1->SetTarget(pImage); // ... pDC1->SetTarget(Note??Changing the target does not change the bitmap that annull ); pDC2->SetTarget(pImage); // This call is invalid, even though pImage is no longer set on pDC1. // ... pDC1->EndDraw(); // This EndDraw SUCCEEDs. pDC2->EndDraw(); // This EndDraw FAILs
This API makes it easy for an application to use a bitmap as a source (like in DrawBitmap) and as a destination at the same time. Attempting to use a bitmap as a source on the same device context to which it is bound as a target will put the device context into the
It is acceptable to have a bitmap bound as a target bitmap on multiple render targets at once. Applications that do this must properly synchronize rendering with Flush or EndDraw.
You can change the target at any time, including while the context is drawing.
You can set the target to
If the device context has an outstanding
If the bitmap and the device context are not in the same resource domain, the context will enter \ error state. The target will not be changed.
Gets the target currently associated with the device context.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the target currently associated with the device context.
If a target is not associated with the device context, target will contain
If the currently selected target is a bitmap rather than a command list, the application can gain access to the initial bitmaps created by using one of the following methods:
It is not possible for an application to destroy these bitmaps. All of these bitmaps are bindable as bitmap targets. However not all of these bitmaps can be used as bitmap sources for
CreateDxgiSurfaceRenderTarget will create a bitmap that is usable as a bitmap source if the DXGI surface is bindable as a shader resource view.
CreateCompatibleRenderTarget will always create bitmaps that are usable as a bitmap source.
Direct2D will only lock bitmaps that are not currently locked.
Calling QueryInterface for
Although the target can be a command list, it cannot be any other type of image. It cannot be the output image of an effect.
Sets the rendering controls for the given device context.
The rendering controls to be applied.
The rendering controls allow the application to tune the precision, performance, and resource usage of rendering operations.
Gets the rendering controls that have been applied to the context.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the rendering controls for this context.
Changes the primitive blend mode that is used for all rendering operations in the device context.
The primitive blend to use.
The primitive blend will apply to all of the primitive drawn on the context, unless this is overridden with the compositeMode parameter on the DrawImage API.
The primitive blend applies to the interior of any primitives drawn on the context. In the case of DrawImage, this will be implied by the image rectangle, offset and world transform.
If the primitive blend is anything other than
Returns the currently set primitive blend used by the device context.
The current primitive blend. The default value is
Sets what units will be used to interpret values passed into the device context.
An enumeration defining how passed-in units will be interpreted by the device context.
This method will affect all properties and parameters affected by SetDpi and GetDpi. This affects all coordinates, lengths, and other properties that are not explicitly defined as being in another unit. For example:
Gets the mode that is being used to interpret values by the device context.
The unit mode.
Draws a series of glyphs to the device context.
Origin of first glyph in the series.
The glyphs to render.
Supplementary glyph series information.
The brush that defines the text color.
The measuring mode of the glyph series, used to determine the advances and offsets. The default value is
The glyphRunDescription is ignored when rendering, but can be useful for printing and serialization of rendering commands, such as to an XPS or SVG file. This extends
A command list cannot reference effects which are part of effect graphs that consume the command list.
Draw a metafile to the device context.
The metafile to draw.
The offset from the upper left corner of the render target.
Draws a bitmap to the render target.
The bitmap to draw.
The destination rectangle. The default is the size of the bitmap and the location is the upper left corner of the render target.
The opacity of the bitmap.
The interpolation mode to use.
An optional source rectangle.
An optional perspective transform.
The destinationRectangle parameter defines the rectangle in the target where the bitmap will appear (in device-independent pixels (DIPs)). This is affected by the currently set transform and the perspective transform, if set. If
The sourceRectangle parameter defines the sub-rectangle of the source bitmap (in DIPs). DrawBitmap will clip this rectangle to the size of the source bitmap, thus making it impossible to sample outside of the bitmap. If
If you specify perspectiveTransform it is applied to the rect in addition to the transform set on the render target.
Push a layer onto the clip and layer stack of the device context.
The parameters that defines the layer.
The layer resource to push on the device context that receives subsequent drawing operations.
Note??If a layer is not specified, Direct2D manages the layer resource automatically. ?This indicates that a portion of an effect's input is invalid. This method can be called many times.
You can use this method to propagate invalid rectangles through an effect graph. You can query Direct2D using the GetEffectInvalidRectangles method.
Note??Direct2D does not automatically use these invalid rectangles to reduce the region of an effect that is rendered.?You can also use this method to invalidate caches that have accumulated while rendering effects that have the
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Gets the number of invalid output rectangles that have accumulated on the effect.
The effect to count the invalid rectangles on.
The returned rectangle count.
Gets the invalid rectangles that have accumulated since the last time the effect was drawn and EndDraw was then called on the device context.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Note??Direct2D does not automatically use these invalid rectangles to reduce the region of an effect that is rendered.?
You can use the InvalidateEffectInputRectangle method to specify invalidated rectangles for Direct2D to propagate through an effect graph.
If multiple invalid rectangles are requested, the rectangles that this method returns may overlap. When this is the case, the rectangle count might be lower than the count that GetEffectInvalidRectangleCount.
Returns the input rectangles that are required to be supplied by the caller to produce the given output rectangle.
The image whose output is being rendered.
The portion of the output image whose inputs are being inspected.
A list of the inputs whos rectangles are being queried.
The input rectangles returned to the caller.
The number of inputs.
A failure code, this will typically only be because an effect in the chain returned some error.
The caller should be very careful not to place a reliance on the required input rectangles returned. Small changes for correctness to an effect's behavior can result in different rectangles being returned. In addition, different kinds of optimization applied inside the render can also influence the result.
Fill using the alpha channel of the supplied opacity mask bitmap. The brush opacity will be modulated by the mask. The render target antialiasing mode must be set to aliased.
The bitmap that acts as the opacity mask
The brush to use for filling the primitive.
The destination rectangle to output to in the render target
The source rectangle from the opacity mask bitmap.
Enables creation and drawing of geometry realization objects.
Creates a device-dependent representation of the fill of the geometry that can be subsequently rendered.
The geometry to realize.
The flattening tolerance to use when converting Beziers to line segments. This parameter shares the same units as the coordinates of the geometry.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a new geometry realization object.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
This method is used in conjunction with
If the provided stroke style specifies a stroke transform type other than
Creates a device-dependent representation of the stroke of a geometry that can be subsequently rendered.
The geometry to realize.
The flattening tolerance to use when converting Beziers to line segments. This parameter shares the same units as the coordinates of the geometry.
The width of the stroke. This parameter shares the same units as the coordinates of the geometry.
The stroke style (optional).
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a new geometry realization object.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
This method is used in conjunction with
If the provided stroke style specifies a stroke transform type other than
Renders a given geometry realization to the target with the specified brush.
The geometry realization to be rendered.
The brush to render the realization with.
This method respects all currently set state (transform, DPI, unit mode, target image, clips, layers); however, artifacts such as faceting may appear when rendering the realizations with a large effective scale (either via the transform or the DPI). Callers should create their realizations with an appropriate flattening tolerance using either D2D1_DEFAULT_FLATTENING_TOLERANCE or ComputeFlatteningTolerance to compensate for this.
Additionally, callers should be aware of the safe render bounds when creating geometry realizations. If a geometry extends outside of [-524,287, 524,287] DIPs in either the X- or the Y- direction in its original (pre-transform) coordinate space, then it may be clipped to those bounds when it is realized. This clipping will be visible even if the realization is subsequently transformed to fit within the safe render bounds.
This interface performs all the same functions as the
Creates a new
Creates a new
Creates a new
Creates an image source object from a WIC bitmap source, while populating all pixel memory within the image source. The image is loaded and stored while using a minimal amount of memory.
The WIC bitmap source to create the image source from.
Options for creating the image source. Default options are used if
Receives the new image source instance.
Receives the new image source instance.
This method creates an image source which can be used to draw the image.
This method supports images that exceed the maximum texture size. Large images are internally stored within a sparse tile cache.
This API supports the same set of pixel formats and alpha modes supported by CreateBitmapFromWicBitmap. If the GPU does not support a given pixel format, this method will return
This method automatically selects an appropriate storage format to minimize GPU memory usage., such as using separate luminance and chrominance textures for JPEG images.
If the loadingOptions argument is
Creates a 3D lookup table for mapping a 3-channel input to a 3-channel output. The table data must be provided in 4-channel format.
Precision of the input lookup table data.
Number of lookup table elements per dimension (X, Y, Z).
Buffer holding the lookup table data.
Size of the lookup table data buffer.
An array containing two values. The first value is the size in bytes from one row (X dimension) of LUT data to the next. The second value is the size in bytes from one LUT data plane (X and Y dimensions) to the next.
Receives the new lookup table instance.
Creates an image source from a set of DXGI surface(s). The YCbCr surface(s) are converted to RGBA automatically during subsequent drawing.
The DXGI surfaces to create the image source from.
The number of surfaces provided; must be between one and three.
The color space of the input.
Options controlling color space conversions.
Receives the new image source instance.
This method creates an image source which can be used to draw the image. This method supports surfaces that use a limited set of DXGI formats and DXGI color space types. Only the below set of combinations of color space types, surface formats, and surface counts are supported:
Color Space Type | Surface Count(s) | Surface Format(s) |
---|---|---|
1 | Standard D2D-supported pixel formats: | |
1, 2, 3 | When Surface count is 1: When Surface Count is 2:
When Surface Count is 3:
| |
| 1,2,3 | When Surface count is 1: When Surface Count is 2:
When Surface Count is 3:
|
?
The GPU must also have sufficient support for a pixel format to be supported by D2D. To determine whether D2D supports a format, call IsDxgiFormatSupported.
This API converts YCbCr formats to sRGB using the provided color space type and options. RGBA data is assumed to be in the desired space, and D2D does not apply any conversion.
If multiple surfaces are provided, this method infers whether chroma planes are subsampled (by 2x) from the relative sizes of each corresponding source rectangle (or if the source rectangles parameter is
If provided, the source rectangles must be within the bounds of the corresponding surface. The source rectangles may have different origins. In this case, this method shifts the data from each plane to align with one another.
Creates an image source from a set of DXGI surface(s). The YCbCr surface(s) are converted to RGBA automatically during subsequent drawing.
The DXGI surfaces to create the image source from.
The number of surfaces provided; must be between one and three.
The color space of the input.
Options controlling color space conversions.
Receives the new image source instance.
This method creates an image source which can be used to draw the image. This method supports surfaces that use a limited set of DXGI formats and DXGI color space types. Only the below set of combinations of color space types, surface formats, and surface counts are supported:
Color Space Type | Surface Count(s) | Surface Format(s) |
---|---|---|
1 | Standard D2D-supported pixel formats: | |
1, 2, 3 | When Surface count is 1: When Surface Count is 2:
When Surface Count is 3:
| |
| 1,2,3 | When Surface count is 1: When Surface Count is 2:
When Surface Count is 3:
|
?
The GPU must also have sufficient support for a pixel format to be supported by D2D. To determine whether D2D supports a format, call IsDxgiFormatSupported.
This API converts YCbCr formats to sRGB using the provided color space type and options. RGBA data is assumed to be in the desired space, and D2D does not apply any conversion.
If multiple surfaces are provided, this method infers whether chroma planes are subsampled (by 2x) from the relative sizes of each corresponding source rectangle (or if the source rectangles parameter is
If provided, the source rectangles must be within the bounds of the corresponding surface. The source rectangles may have different origins. In this case, this method shifts the data from each plane to align with one another.
Creates an image source from a set of DXGI surface(s). The YCbCr surface(s) are converted to RGBA automatically during subsequent drawing.
The DXGI surfaces to create the image source from.
The number of surfaces provided; must be between one and three.
The color space of the input.
Options controlling color space conversions.
Receives the new image source instance.
This method creates an image source which can be used to draw the image. This method supports surfaces that use a limited set of DXGI formats and DXGI color space types. Only the below set of combinations of color space types, surface formats, and surface counts are supported:
Color Space Type | Surface Count(s) | Surface Format(s) |
---|---|---|
1 | Standard D2D-supported pixel formats: | |
1, 2, 3 | When Surface count is 1: When Surface Count is 2:
When Surface Count is 3:
| |
| 1,2,3 | When Surface count is 1: When Surface Count is 2:
When Surface Count is 3:
|
?
The GPU must also have sufficient support for a pixel format to be supported by D2D. To determine whether D2D supports a format, call IsDxgiFormatSupported.
This API converts YCbCr formats to sRGB using the provided color space type and options. RGBA data is assumed to be in the desired space, and D2D does not apply any conversion.
If multiple surfaces are provided, this method infers whether chroma planes are subsampled (by 2x) from the relative sizes of each corresponding source rectangle (or if the source rectangles parameter is
If provided, the source rectangles must be within the bounds of the corresponding surface. The source rectangles may have different origins. In this case, this method shifts the data from each plane to align with one another.
Returns the world bounds of a given gradient mesh.
The gradient mesh whose world bounds will be calculated.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the bounds of the gradient mesh, in device independent pixels (DIPs).
The world bounds reflect the current DPI, unit mode, and world transform of the context. They indicate which pixels would be impacted by calling DrawGradientMesh with the given gradient mesh. They do not reflect the current clip rectangle set on the device context or the extent of the context?s current target.
Renders the given ink object using the given brush and ink style.
The ink object to be rendered.
The brush with which to render the ink object.
The ink style to use when rendering the ink object.
Renders a given gradient mesh to the target.
The gradient mesh to be rendered.
Draws a metafile to the device context using the given source and destination rectangles.
The metafile to draw.
The rectangle in the target where the metafile will be drawn, relative to the upper left corner (defined in DIPs) of the render target. If
The rectangle of the source metafile that will be drawn, relative to the upper left corner (defined in DIPs) of the metafile. If
Creates an image source which shares resources with an original.
The original image.
Properties for the source image.
Receives the new image source.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This interface performs all the same functions as the
Creates a new, empty sprite batch. After creating a sprite batch, use
If this method succeeds, it returns
Renders all sprites in the given sprite batch to the device context using the specified drawing options.
The sprite batch to draw.
The bitmap from which the sprites are to be sourced. Each sprite?s source rectangle refers to a portion of this bitmap.
The interpolation mode to use when drawing this sprite batch. This determines how Direct2D interpolates pixels within the drawn sprites if scaling is performed.
The bitmap from which the sprites are to be sourced. Each sprite?s source rectangle refers to a portion of this bitmap.
The interpolation mode to use when drawing this sprite batch. This determines how Direct2D interpolates pixels within the drawn sprites if scaling is performed.
The additional drawing options, if any, to be used for this sprite batch.
This interface performs all the same functions as the
Creates an SVG glyph style object.
On completion points to the created
This method returns an
Represents a set of state and command buffers that are used to render to a target.
The device context can render to a target bitmap or a command list.
Any resource created from a device context can be shared with any other resource created from a device context when both contexts are created on the same device.
Draws a text layout object. If the layout is not subsequently changed, this can be more efficient than DrawText when drawing the same layout repeatedly.
The point, described in device-independent pixels, at which the upper-left corner of the text described by textLayout is drawn.
The formatted text to draw. Any drawing effects that do not inherit from
The brush used to paint the text.
The values for context-fill, context-stroke, and context-value that are used when rendering SVG glyphs.
The index used to select a color palette within a color font.
A value that indicates whether the text should be snapped to pixel boundaries and whether the text should be clipped to the layout rectangle. The default value is
Draws a color bitmap glyph run using one of the bitmap formats.
Specifies the format of the glyph image. Supported formats are
Only one format can be specified at a time, combinations of flags are not valid input.
The origin of the baseline for the glyph run.
The glyphs to render.
Indicates the measuring method.
Specifies the pixel snapping policy when rendering color bitmap glyphs.
Draws a color glyph run that has the format of
The origin of the baseline for the glyph run.
The glyphs to render.
The brush used to paint the specified glyphs.
Values for context-fill, context-stroke, and context-value that are used when rendering SVG glyphs.
The index used to select a color palette within a color font. Note that this not the same as the paletteIndex in the
Indicates the measuring method used for text layout.
Retrieves an image of the color bitmap glyph from the color glyph cache. If the cache does not already contain the requested resource, it will be created. This method may be used to extend the lifetime of a glyph image even after it is evicted from the color glyph cache.
The format for the glyph image. If there is no image data in the requested format for the requested glyph, this method will return an error.
The origin for the glyph.
Reference to a font face which contains font face type, appropriate file references, face identification data and various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines.
The specified font size affects the choice of which bitmap to use from the font. It also affects the output glyphTransform, causing it to properly scale the glyph.
Index of the glyph.
If true, specifies that glyphs are rotated 90 degrees to the left and vertical metrics are used. Vertical writing is achieved by specifying isSideways as true and rotating the entire run 90 degrees to the right via a rotate transform.
The transform to apply to the image. This input transform affects the choice of which bitmap to use from the font. It is also factored into the output glyphTransform.
Dots per inch along the x-axis.
Dots per inch along the y-axis.
Output transform, which transforms from the glyph's space to the same output space as the worldTransform. This includes the input glyphOrigin, the glyph's offset from the glyphOrigin, and any other required transformations.
On completion contains the retrieved glyph image.
This method returns an
Retrieves an image of the SVG glyph from the color glyph cache. If the cache does not already contain the requested resource, it will be created. This method may be used to extend the lifetime of a glyph image even after it is evicted from the color glyph cache.
Origin of the glyph.
Reference to a font face which contains font face type, appropriate file references, face identification data and various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines.
The specified font size affects the output glyphTransform, causing it to properly scale the glyph.
Index of the glyph to retrieve.
If true, specifies that glyphs are rotated 90 degrees to the left and vertical metrics are used. Vertical writing is achieved by specifying isSideways as true and rotating the entire run 90 degrees to the right via a rotate transform.
The transform to apply to the image.
Describes how the area is painted.
The values for context-fill, context-stroke, and context-value that are used when rendering SVG glyphs.
The index used to select a color palette within a color font. Note that this not the same as the paletteIndex in the
Output transform, which transforms from the glyph's space to the same output space as the worldTransform. This includes the input glyphOrigin, the glyph's offset from the glyphOrigin, and any other required transformations.
On completion, contains the retrieved glyph image.
This method returns an
Represents a set of state and command buffers that are used to render to a target.
The device context can render to a target bitmap or a command list.
Any resource created from a device context can be shared with any other resource created from a device context when both contexts are created on the same device.
Creates a color context from a DXGI color space type. It is only valid to use this with the Color Management Effect in 'Best' mode.
The color space to create the color context from.
The created color context.
This method returns an
Issues drawing commands to a GDI device context.
Binds the render target to the device context to which it issues drawing commands.
The device context to which the render target issues drawing commands.
The dimensions of the handle to a device context (
If this method succeeds, it returns
Before you can render with the DC render target, you must use its BindDC method to associate it with a GDI DC. You do this each time you use a different DC, or the size of the area you want to draw to changes.
This interface is used to describe a GPU rendering pass on a vertex or pixel shader. It is passed to
Sets the constant buffer for this transform's pixel shader.
The data applied to the constant buffer.
The number of bytes of data in the constant buffer
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the resource texture corresponding to the given shader texture index.
The index of the texture to be bound to the pixel shader.
The created resource texture.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Sets the constant buffer for this transform's vertex shader.
The data applied to the constant buffer
The number of bytes of data in the constant buffer.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Set the shader instructions for this transform.
The resource id for the shader.
Additional information provided to the renderer to indicate the operations the pixel shader does.
If the method succeeds, it returns
If this call fails, the corresponding
Specifying pixelOptions other than
Sets a vertex buffer, a corresponding vertex shader, and options to control how the vertices are to be handled by the Direct2D context.
The vertex buffer, if this is cleared, the default vertex shader and mapping to the transform rectangles will be used.
Options that influence how the renderer will interact with the vertex shader.
How the vertices will be blended with the output texture.
The set of vertices to use from the buffer.
The
If the method succeeds, it returns
The vertex shaders associated with the vertex buffer through the vertex shader
If you pass the vertex option
blendDesc = { , , , , , , { 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f } };
If this call fails, the corresponding
If blendDescription is
Represents the drawing state of a render target: the antialiasing mode, transform, tags, and text-rendering options.
Retrieves or sets the antialiasing mode, transform, and tags portion of the drawing state.
Retrieves or sets the text-rendering configuration of the drawing state.
Retrieves the antialiasing mode, transform, and tags portion of the drawing state.
When this method returns, contains the antialiasing mode, transform, and tags portion of the drawing state. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Specifies the antialiasing mode, transform, and tags portion of the drawing state.
The antialiasing mode, transform, and tags portion of the drawing state.
Specifies the text-rendering configuration of the drawing state.
The text-rendering configuration of the drawing state, or
Retrieves the text-rendering configuration of the drawing state.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to an
Implementation of a drawing state block that adds the functionality of primitive blend in addition to already existing antialias mode, transform, tags and text rendering mode.
Note??You can get anGets or sets the antialiasing mode, transform, tags, primitive blend, and unit mode portion of the drawing state.
Gets the antialiasing mode, transform, tags, primitive blend, and unit mode portion of the drawing state.
When this method returns, contains the antialiasing mode, transform, tags, primitive blend, and unit mode portion of the drawing state. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Sets the
A specialized implementation of the Shantzis calculations to a transform implemented on the GPU. These calculations are described in the paper A model for efficient and flexible image computing.
The information required to specify a ?Pass? in the rendering algorithm on a Pixel Shader is passed to the implementation through the SetDrawInfo method.
A specialized implementation of the Shantzis calculations to a transform implemented on the GPU. These calculations are described in the paper A model for efficient and flexible image computing.
The information required to specify a ?Pass? in the rendering algorithm on a Pixel Shader is passed to the implementation through the SetDrawInfo method.
Provides the GPU render info interface to the transform implementation.
The interface supplied back to the calling method to allow it to specify the GPU based transform pass.
Any
The transform can maintain a reference to this interface for its lifetime. If any properties change on the transform, it can apply these changes to the corresponding drawInfo interface.
This is also used to determine that the corresponding nodes in the graph are dirty.
Represents a basic image-processing construct in Direct2D.
An effect takes zero or more input images, and has an output image. The images that are input into and output from an effect are lazily evaluated. This definition is sufficient to allow an arbitrary graph of effects to be created from the application by feeding output images into the input image of the next effect in the chain.
Gets or sets the number of inputs to the effect.
Gets the output image from the effect.
The output image can be set as an input to another effect, or can be directly passed into the
It is also possible to use QueryInterface to retrieve the same output image.
Sets the given input image by index.
The index of the image to set.
The input image to set.
Whether to invalidate the graph at the location of the effect input
If the input index is out of range, the input image is ignored.
Allows the application to change the number of inputs to an effect.
The number of inputs to the effect.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_INVALIDARG | One or more arguments are invalid. |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Failed to allocate necessary memory. |
?
Most effects do not support a variable number of inputs. Use
If the input count is less than the minimum or more than the maximum supported inputs, the call will fail.
If the input count is unchanged, the call will succeed with
Any inputs currently selected on the effect will be unaltered by this call unless the number of inputs is made smaller. If the number of inputs is made smaller, inputs beyond the selected range will be released.
If the method fails, the existing input and input count will remain unchanged.
Represents a basic image-processing construct in Direct2D.
An effect takes zero or more input images, and has an output image. The images that are input into and output from an effect are lazily evaluated. This definition is sufficient to allow an arbitrary graph of effects to be created from the application by feeding output images into the input image of the next effect in the chain.
Gets the number of inputs to the effect.
This method returns the number of inputs to the effect.
Gets the output image from the effect.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the output image for the effect.
The output image can be set as an input to another effect, or can be directly passed into the
It is also possible to use QueryInterface to retrieve the same output image.
Provides factory methods and other state management for effect and transform authors.
This interface is passed to an effect implementation through the
Each call to ID2D1Effect::Initialize will be provided a different
Gets the unit mapping that an effect will use for properties that could be in either dots per inch (dpi) or pixels.
The dpi on the x-axis.
The dpi on the y-axis.
If the
Creates a Direct2D effect for the specified class ID. This is the same as
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
D3DERR_OUTOFVIDEOMEMORY | Direct3D does not have enough display memory to perform the operation. |
The specified effect is not registered by the system. |
?
The created effect does not reference count the DLL from which the effect was created. If the caller unregisters an effect while this effect is loaded, the resulting behavior is unpredictable.
This indicates the maximum feature level from the provided list which is supported by the device. If none of the provided levels are supported, then this API fails with
The feature levels provided by the application.
The count of feature levels provided by the application
The maximum feature level from the featureLevels list which is supported by the D2D device.
Wraps an effect graph into a single transform node and then inserted into a transform graph. This allows an effect to aggregate other effects. This will typically be done in order to allow the effect properties to be re-expressed with a different contract, or to allow different components to integrate each-other?s effects.
The effect to be wrapped in a transform node.
The returned transform node that encapsulates the effect graph.
This creates a blend transform that can be inserted into a transform graph.
The number of inputs to the blend transform.
Describes the blend transform that is to be created.
The returned blend transform.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Creates a transform that extends its input infinitely in every direction based on the passed in extend mode.
The extend mode in the X-axis direction.
The extend mode in the Y-axis direction.
The returned transform.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Creates and returns an offset transform.
The offset amount.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to an offset transform object.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
An offset transform is used to offset an input bitmap without having to insert a rendering pass. An offset transform is automatically inserted by an Affine transform if the transform evaluates to a pixel-aligned transform.
Creates and returns a bounds adjustment transform.
The initial output rectangle for the bounds adjustment transform.
The returned bounds adjustment transform.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
A support transform can be used for two different reasons.
Loads the given shader by its unique ID. Loading the shader multiple times is ignored. When the shader is loaded it is also handed to the driver to JIT, if it hasn?t been already.
The unique id that identifies the shader.
The buffer that contains the shader to register.
The size of the shader buffer in bytes.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
The shader you specify must be compiled, not in raw HLSL code.
Loads the given shader by its unique ID. Loading the shader multiple times is ignored. When the shader is loaded it is also handed to the driver to JIT, if it hasn?t been already.
The unique id that identifies the shader.
The buffer that contains the shader to register.
The size of the shader buffer in bytes.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
The shader you specify must be compiled, not in raw HLSL code.
Loads the given shader by its unique ID. Loading the shader multiple times is ignored. When the shader is loaded it is also handed to the driver to JIT, if it hasn?t been already.
The unique id that identifies the shader.
The buffer that contains the shader to register.
The size of the shader buffer in bytes.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
The shader you specify must be compiled, not in raw HLSL code.
This tests to see if the given shader is loaded.
The unique id that identifies the shader.
Whether the shader is loaded.
Creates or finds the given resource texture, depending on whether a resource id is specified. It also optionally initializes the texture with the specified data.
An optional reference to the unique id that identifies the lookup table.
The properties used to create the resource texture.
The optional data to be loaded into the resource texture.
An optional reference to the stride to advance through the resource texture, according to dimension.
The size, in bytes, of the data.
The returned texture that can be used as a resource in a Direct2D effect.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Finds the given resource texture if it has already been created with
Creates a vertex buffer or finds a standard vertex buffer and optionally initializes it with vertices. The returned buffer can be specified in the render info to specify both a vertex shader and or to pass custom vertices to the standard vertex shader used by Direct2D.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
This finds the given vertex buffer if it has already been created with
Creates a color context from a color space.
If the color space is Custom, the context is initialized from the profile and profileSize parameters.
If the color space is not Custom, the context is initialized with the profile bytes associated with the color space. The profile and profileSize parameters are ignored.
The space of color context to create.
A buffer containing the ICC profile bytes used to initialize the color context when space is
The size in bytes of Profile.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a new color context object.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
Creates a color context by loading it from the specified filename. The profile bytes are the contents of the file specified by filename.
The path to the file containing the profile bytes to initialize the color context with.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a new color context.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
Creates a color context from an
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
The new color context can be used in
This indicates whether an optional capability is supported by the D3D device.
The feature to query support for.
A structure indicating information about how or if the feature is supported.
The size of the featureSupportData parameter.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Indicates whether the buffer precision is supported by the underlying Direct2D device.
Returns TRUE if the buffer precision is supported. Returns
Describes features of an effect.
The effect whose input connection is being specified.
The input index of the effect that is being considered.
The amount of data that would be available on the input. This can be used to query this information when the data is not yet available.
Contains the center point, x-radius, and y-radius of an ellipse.
The center point of the ellipse.
The X-radius of the ellipse.
The Y-radius of the ellipse.
Represents an ellipse.
Gets the
Gets the
Creates Direct2D resources.
The
A factory defines a set of CreateResource methods that can produce the following drawing resources:
To create an
Forces the factory to refresh any system defaults that it might have changed since factory creation.
If this method succeeds, it returns
You should call this method before calling the GetDesktopDpi method, to ensure that the system DPI is current.
Retrieves the current desktop dots per inch (DPI). To refresh this value, call ReloadSystemMetrics.
Use this method to obtain the system DPI when setting physical pixel values, such as when you specify the size of a window.
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Geometry groups are a convenient way to group several geometries simultaneously so all figures of several distinct geometries are concatenated into one. To create a
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Geometry groups are a convenient way to group several geometries simultaneously so all figures of several distinct geometries are concatenated into one. To create a
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Geometry groups are a convenient way to group several geometries simultaneously so all figures of several distinct geometries are concatenated into one. To create a
Transforms the specified geometry and stores the result as an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Like other resources, a transformed geometry inherits the resource space and threading policy of the factory that created it. This object is immutable.
When stroking a transformed geometry with the DrawGeometry method, the stroke width is not affected by the transform applied to the geometry. The stroke width is only affected by the world transform.
Creates an empty
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a render target that renders to a Microsoft Windows Imaging Component (WIC) bitmap.
The bitmap that receives the rendering output of the render target.
The rendering mode, pixel format, remoting options, DPI information, and the minimum DirectX support required for hardware rendering. For information about supported pixel formats, see Supported Pixel Formats and Alpha Modes.
When this method returns, contains the address of the reference to the
If this method succeeds, it returns
You must use
Your application should create render targets once and hold onto them for the life of the application or until the
Note?? This method isn't supported on Windows Phone and will fail when called on a device with error code 0x8899000b (?There is no hardware rendering device available for this operation?). Because the Windows Phone Emulator supports WARP rendering, this method will fail when called on the emulator with a different error code, 0x88982f80 (wincodec_err_unsupportedpixelformat).
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
When you create a render target and hardware acceleration is available, you allocate resources on the computer's GPU. By creating a render target once and retaining it as long as possible, you gain performance benefits. Your application should create render targets once and hold onto them for the life of the application or until the
Creates a render target that draws to a DirectX Graphics Infrastructure (DXGI) surface.
The
The rendering mode, pixel format, remoting options, DPI information, and the minimum DirectX support required for hardware rendering. For information about supported pixel formats, see Supported Pixel Formats and Alpha Modes.
When this method returns, contains the address of the reference to the
If this method succeeds, it returns
To write to a Direct3D surface, you obtain an
A DXGI surface render target is a type of
The DXGI surface render target and the DXGI surface must use the same DXGI format. If you specify the DXGI_FORMAT_UNKOWN format when you create the render target, it will automatically use the surface's format.
The DXGI surface render target does not perform DXGI surface synchronization.
For more information about creating and using DXGI surface render targets, see the Direct2D and Direct3D Interoperability Overview.
To work with Direct2D, the Direct3D device that provides the
When you create a render target and hardware acceleration is available, you allocate resources on the computer's GPU. By creating a render target once and retaining it as long as possible, you gain performance benefits. Your application should create render targets once and hold onto them for the life of the application or until the render target's EndDraw method returns the
Creates a render target that draws to a Windows Graphics Device Interface (GDI) device context.
The rendering mode, pixel format, remoting options, DPI information, and the minimum DirectX support required for hardware rendering. To enable the device context (DC) render target to work with GDI, set the DXGI format to
When this method returns, dcRenderTarget contains the address of the reference to the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Before you can render with a DC render target, you must use the render target's BindDC method to associate it with a GDI DC. Do this for each different DC and whenever there is a change in the size of the area you want to draw to.
To enable the DC render target to work with GDI, set the render target's DXGI format to
Your application should create render targets once and hold on to them for the life of the application or until the render target's EndDraw method returns the
Creates Direct2D resources.
The
Creates a
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
D3DERR_OUTOFVIDEOMEMORY | Direct3D does not have enough display memory to perform the operation. |
?
The Direct2D device defines a resource domain in which a set of Direct2D objects and Direct2D device contexts can be used together. Each call to CreateDevice returns a unique
Creates a
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
It is valid to specify a dash array only if
Creates an
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
?
Creates a new drawing state block, this can be used in subsequent SaveDrawingState and RestoreDrawingState operations on the render target.
The drawing state description structure.
The address of the newly created drawing state block.
The address of the newly created drawing state block.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
Creates a new
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
Registers an effect within the factory instance with the property XML specified as a stream.
The identifier of the effect to be registered.
A list of the effect properties, types, and metadata.
An array of properties and methods.
This binds a property by name to a particular method implemented by the effect author to handle the property. The name must be found in the corresponding propertyXml.
The number of bindings in the binding array.
The static factory that is used to create the corresponding effect.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Direct2D effects must define their properties at registration time via registration XML. An effect declares several required system properties, and can also declare custom properties. See Custom effects for more information about formatting the propertyXml parameter.
RegisterEffect is both atomic and reference counted. To unregister an effect, call UnregisterEffect with the classId of the effect.
Important??RegisterEffect does not hold a reference to the DLL or executable file in which the effect is contained. The application must independently make sure that the lifetime of the DLL or executable file completely contains all instances of each registered and created effect.?Aside from the built-in effects that are globally registered, this API registers effects only for this factory, derived device, and device context interfaces.
Registers an effect within the factory instance with the property XML specified as a string.
The identifier of the effect to be registered.
A list of the effect properties, types, and metadata.
An array of properties and methods.
This binds a property by name to a particular method implemented by the effect author to handle the property. The name must be found in the corresponding propertyXml.
The number of bindings in the binding array.
The static factory that is used to create the corresponding effect.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
Direct2D effects must define their properties at registration time via registration XML. An effect declares several required system properties, and can also declare custom properties. See Custom effects for more information about formatting the propertyXml parameter.
RegisterEffect is both atomic and reference counted. To unregister an effect, call UnregisterEffect with the classId of the effect.
Important??RegisterEffect does not hold a reference to the DLL or executable file in which the effect is contained. The application must independently make sure that the lifetime of the DLL or executable file completely contains all instances of each registered and created effect.?Aside from the built-in effects that are globally registered, this API registers effects only for this factory and derived device and device context interfaces.
Unregisters an effect within the factory instance that corresponds to the classId provided.
The identifier of the effect to be unregistered.
In order for the effect to be fully unloaded, you must call UnregisterEffect the same number of times that you have registered the effect.
The UnregisterEffect method unregisters only those effects that are registered on the same factory. It cannot be used to unregister a built-in effect.
Returns the class IDs of the currently registered effects and global effects on this factory.
When this method returns, contains an array of effects.
The capacity of the effects array.
When this method returns, contains the number of effects copied into effects.
When this method returns, contains the number of effects currently registered in the system.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
HRESULT_FROM_WIN32( | effectsRegistered is larger than effectCount. |
?
The set of class IDs will be atomically returned by the API. The set will not be interrupted by other threads registering or unregistering effects.
If effectsRegistered is larger than effectCount, the supplied array will still be filled to capacity with the current set of registered effects. This method returns the CLSIDs for all global effects and all effects registered to this factory.
Retrieves the properties of an effect.
The ID of the effect to retrieve properties from.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the property interface that can be used to query the metadata of the effect.
The returned effect properties will have all the mutable properties for the effect set to a default of
This method cannot be used to return the properties for any effect not visible to
Creates Direct2D resources.
This interface also enables the creation of
Creates an
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
D3DERR_OUTOFVIDEOMEMORY | Direct3D does not have enough display memory to perform the operation. |
?
The Direct2D device defines a resource domain in which a set of Direct2D objects and Direct2D device contexts can be used together. Each call to CreateDevice returns a unique
Provides access to an device context that can accept GDI drawing commands.
You don't create an
Not all render targets support the
Note that the QueryInterface method always succeeds; if the render target doesn't support the
To test whether a given render target supports the
Retrieves the device context associated with this render target.
A value that specifies whether the device context should be cleared.
When this method returns, contains the device context associated with this render target. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Calling this method flushes the render target.
This command can be called only after BeginDraw and before EndDraw.
Note??In Windows?7 and earlier, you should not call GetDC between PushAxisAlignedClip/PopAxisAlignedClip commands or between PushLayer/PopLayer. However, this restriction does not apply to Windows?8 and later.?ReleaseDC must be called once for each call to GetDC.
Indicates that drawing with the device context retrieved using the GetDC method is finished.
If this method succeeds, it returns
ReleaseDC must be called once for each call to GetDC.
The interpolation mode to be used with the 2D affine transform effect to scale the image. There are 6 scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Samples the nearest single point and uses that. This mode uses less processing time, but outputs the lowest quality image.
Uses a four point sample and linear interpolation. This mode uses more processing time than the nearest neighbor mode, but outputs a higher quality image.
Uses a 16 sample cubic kernel for interpolation. This mode uses the most processing time, but outputs a higher quality image.
Uses 4 linear samples within a single pixel for good edge anti-aliasing. This mode is good for scaling down by small amounts on images with few pixels.
Uses anisotropic filtering to sample a pattern according to the transformed shape of the bitmap.
Uses a variable size high quality cubic kernel to perform a pre-downscale the image if downscaling is involved in the transform matrix. Then uses the cubic interpolation mode for the final output.
Identifiers for properties of the 2D affine transform effect.
Specifies how the alpha value of a bitmap or render target should be treated.
The
The alpha value might not be meaningful.
The alpha value has been premultiplied. Each color is first scaled by the alpha value. The alpha value itself is the same in both straight and premultiplied alpha. Typically, no color channel value is greater than the alpha channel value. If a color channel value in a premultiplied format is greater than the alpha channel, the standard source-over blending math results in an additive blend.
The alpha value has not been premultiplied. The alpha channel indicates the transparency of the color.
The alpha value is ignored.
Specifies how the edges of nontext primitives are rendered.
Edges are antialiased using the Direct2D per-primitive method of high-quality antialiasing.
Objects are aliased in most cases. Objects are antialiased only when they are drawn to a render target created by the CreateDxgiSurfaceRenderTarget method and Direct3D multisampling has been enabled on the backing DirectX Graphics Infrastructure (DXGI) surface.
Specifies whether an arc should be greater than 180 degrees.
An arc's sweep should be 180 degrees or less.
An arc's sweep should be 180 degrees or greater.
Identifiers for the properties of the Arithmetic composite effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Atlas effect.
Specifies the algorithm that is used when images are scaled or rotated.
Note??Starting in Windows?8, more interpolations modes are available. See To stretch an image, each pixel in the original image must be mapped to a group of pixels in the larger image. To shrink an image, groups of pixels in the original image must be mapped to single pixels in the smaller image. The effectiveness of the algorithms that perform these mappings determines the quality of a scaled image. Algorithms that produce higher-quality scaled images tend to require more processing time.
Specifies how a bitmap can be used.
The bitmap is created with default properties.
The bitmap can be used as a device context target.
The bitmap cannot be used as an input.
The bitmap can be read from the CPU.
The bitmap works with
Specifies the alpha mode of the output of the Bitmap source effect.
The interpolation mode used to scale the image in the Bitmap source effect. If the mode disables the mipmap, then BitmapSouce will cache the image at the resolution determined by the Scale and EnableDPICorrection properties.
Speficies whether a flip and/or rotation operation should be performed by the Bitmap source effect
Identifiers for properties of the Bitmap source effect.
Specifies how one of the color sources is to be derived and optionally specifies a preblend operation on the color source.
This enumeration has the same numeric values as D3D10_BLEND.
The data source is black (0, 0, 0, 0). There is no preblend operation.
The data source is white (1, 1, 1, 1). There is no preblend operation.
The data source is color data (RGB) from the second input of the blend transform. There is not a preblend operation.
The data source is color data (RGB) from second input of the blend transform. The preblend operation inverts the data, generating 1 - RGB.
The data source is alpha data (A) from second input of the blend transform. There is no preblend operation.
The data source is alpha data (A) from the second input of the blend transform. The preblend operation inverts the data, generating 1 - A.
The data source is alpha data (A) from the first input of the blend transform. There is no preblend operation.
The data source is alpha data (A) from the first input of the blend transform. The preblend operation inverts the data, generating 1 - A.
The data source is color data from the first input of the blend transform. There is no preblend operation.
The data source is color data from the first input of the blend transform. The preblend operation inverts the data, generating 1 - RGB.
The data source is alpha data from the second input of the blend transform. The preblend operation clamps the data to 1 or less.
The data source is the blend factor. There is no preblend operation.
The data source is the blend factor. The preblend operation inverts the blend factor, generating 1 - blend_factor.
The blend mode used for the Blend effect.
Specifies the blend operation on two color sources.
This enumeration has the same numeric values as D3D10_BLEND_OP.
Add source 1 and source 2.
Subtract source 1 from source 2.
Subtract source 2 from source 1.
Find the minimum of source 1 and source 2.
Find the maximum of source 1 and source 2.
Identifiers for properties of the Blend effect.
The edge mode for the Border effect.
Specifies how the Crop effect handles the crop rectangle falling on fractional pixel coordinates.
Identifiers for properties of the Border effect.
Identifiers for the properties of the Brightness effect.
Represents the bit depth of the imaging pipeline in Direct2D.
The buffer precision is not specified.
Use 8-bit normalized integer per channel.
Use 8-bit normalized integer standard RGB data per channel.
Use 16-bit normalized integer per channel.
Use 16-bit floats per channel.
Use 32-bit floats per channel.
Describes the shape at the end of a line or segment.
The following illustration shows the available cap styles for lines or segments. The red portion of the line shows the extra area added by the line cap setting.
A cap that does not extend past the last point of the line. Comparable to cap used for objects other than lines.
Half of a square that has a length equal to the line thickness.
A semicircle that has a diameter equal to the line thickness.
An isosceles right triangle whose hypotenuse is equal in length to the thickness of the line.
Describes flags that influence how the renderer interacts with a custom vertex shader.
There were no changes.
The properties of the effect changed.
The context state changed.
The effect?s transform graph has changed. This happens only when an effect supports a variable input count.
Allows a caller to control the channel depth of a stage in the rendering pipeline.
The channel depth is the default. It is inherited from the inputs.
The channel depth is 1.
The channel depth is 4.
Specifies the color channel the Displacement map effect extracts the intensity from and uses it to spatially displace the image in the X or Y direction.
Identifiers for properties of the Chroma-key effect.
Specifies the pixel snapping policy when rendering color bitmap glyphs.
Color bitmap glyph positions are snapped to the nearest pixel if the bitmap resolution matches that of the device context.
Color bitmap glyph positions are not snapped.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
The render target uses hardware rendering only.
Defines how to interpolate between colors.
Colors are interpolated with straight alpha.
Colors are interpolated with premultiplied alpha.
Indicates how the Color management effect should interpret alpha data that is contained in the input image.
Identifiers for the properties of the Color management effect.
The quality level of the transform for the Color management effect.
Specifies which ICC rendering intent the Color management effect should use.
The alpha mode of the output of the Color matrix effect.
Identifiers for the properties of the Color matrix effect.
Defines options that should be applied to the color space.
The color space is otherwise described, such as with a color profile.
The color space is sRGB.
The color space is scRGB.
Specifies the different methods by which two geometries can be combined.
The following illustration shows the different geometry combine modes.
The two regions are combined by taking the union of both. Given two geometries, A and B, the resulting geometry is geometry A + geometry B.
The two regions are combined by taking their intersection. The new area consists of the overlapping region between the two geometries.
The two regions are combined by taking the area that exists in the first region but not the second and the area that exists in the second region but not the first. Given two geometries, A and B, the new region consists of (A-B) + (B-A).
The second region is excluded from the first. Given two geometries, A and B, the area of geometry B is removed from the area of geometry A, producing a region that is A-B.
Specifies additional features supportable by a compatible render target when it is created. This enumeration allows a bitwise combination of its member values.
Use this enumeration when creating a compatible render target with the CreateCompatibleRenderTarget method. For more information about compatible render targets, see the Render Targets Overview.
The
The render target supports no additional features.
The render target supports interoperability with the Windows Graphics Device Interface (GDI).
Used to specify the blend mode for all of the Direct2D blending operations.
The figure here shows an example of each of the modes with images that have an opacity of 1.0 or 0.5.
There can be slightly different interpretations of these enumeration values depending on where the value is used.
With a composite effect:
D2D1_COMPOSITE_MODE_DESTINATION_COPY is equivalent to As a parameter to
The standard source-over-destination blend mode.
The destination is rendered over the source.
Performs a logical clip of the source pixels against the destination pixels.
The inverse of the
This is the logical inverse to
The is the logical inverse to
Writes the source pixels over the destination where there are destination pixels.
The logical inverse of
The source is inverted with the destination.
The channel components are summed.
The source is copied to the destination; the destination pixels are ignored.
Equivalent to
Destination colors are inverted according to a source mask.
Identifiers for properties of the Composite effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Contrast effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Convolve matrix effect.
The interpolation mode the Convolve matrix effect uses to scale the image to the corresponding kernel unit length. There are six scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Identifiers for properties of the Crop effect.
This effect combines two images by adding weighted pixels from input images. It has two inputs, named Destination and Source.
The cross fade formula is output = weight * Destination + (1 - weight) * Source.
The CLSID for this effect is
Describes the sequence of dashes and gaps in a stroke.
The following illustration shows several available dash styles.
A solid line with no breaks.
A dash followed by a gap of equal length. The dash and the gap are each twice as long as the stroke thickness.
The equivalent dash array for
A dot followed by a longer gap.
The equivalent dash array for
A dash, followed by a gap, followed by a dot, followed by another gap.
The equivalent dash array for
A dash, followed by a gap, followed by a dot, followed by another gap, followed by another dot, followed by another gap.
The equivalent dash array for
The dash pattern is specified by an array of floating-point values.
Indicates the type of information provided by the Direct2D Debug Layer.
To receive debugging messages, you must install the Direct2D Debug Layer.
Specifies how a device context is initialized for GDI rendering when it is retrieved from the render target.
Use this enumeration with the
The current contents of the render target are copied to the device context when it is initialized.
The device context is cleared to transparent black when it is initialized.
This specifies options that apply to the device context for its lifetime.
The device context is created with default options.
Distribute rendering work across multiple threads. Refer to Improving the performance of Direct2D apps for additional notes on the use of this flag.
Specifies the optimization mode for the Directional blur effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Directional blur effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Discrete transfer effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Displacement map effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Distant-diffuse lighting effect.
The interpolation mode the effect uses to scale the image to the corresponding kernel unit length. There are six scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Samples the nearest single point and uses that. This mode uses less processing time, but outputs the lowest quality image.
Uses a four point sample and linear interpolation. This mode outputs a higher quality image than nearest neighbor.
Uses a 16 sample cubic kernel for interpolation. This mode uses the most processing time, but outputs a higher quality image.
Uses 4 linear samples within a single pixel for good edge anti-aliasing. This mode is good for scaling down by small amounts on images with few pixels.
Uses anisotropic filtering to sample a pattern according to the transformed shape of the bitmap.
Uses a variable size high quality cubic kernel to perform a pre-downscale the image if downscaling is involved in the transform matrix. Then uses the cubic interpolation mode for the final output.
Identifiers for properties of the Distant-specular lighting effect.
The interpolation mode the Distant-specular lighting effect uses to scale the image to the corresponding kernel unit length. There are six scale modes that range in quality and speed.
The interpolation mode the DPI compensation effect uses to scale the image.
Identifiers for properties of the DPI compensation effect.
Specifies whether text snapping is suppressed or clipping to the layout rectangle is enabled. This enumeration allows a bitwise combination of its member values.
Text is not vertically snapped to pixel boundaries. This setting is recommended for text that is being animated.
Text is clipped to the layout rectangle.
In Windows?8.1 and later, text is rendered using color versions of glyphs, if defined by the font.
Bitmap origins of color glyph bitmaps are not snapped.
Text is vertically snapped to pixel boundaries and is not clipped to the layout rectangle.
Values for the
Identifiers for properties of the Edge Detection effect.
The
The
The
The
The
Identifiers for properties of the Emboss effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Exposure effect.
Specifies how a brush paints areas outside of its normal content area.
For an
Repeat the edge pixels of the brush's content for all regions outside the normal content area.
Repeat the brush's content.
The same as
Specifies whether Direct2D provides synchronization for an
When you create a factory, you can specify whether it is multithreaded or singlethreaded. A singlethreaded factory provides no serialization against any other single threaded instance within Direct2D, so this mechanism provides a very large degree of scaling on the CPU.
You can also create a multithreaded factory instance. In this case, the factory and all derived objects can be used from any thread, and each render target can be rendered to independently. Direct2D serializes calls to these objects, so a single multithreaded Direct2D instance won't scale as well on the CPU as many single threaded instances. However, the resources can be shared within the multithreaded instance.
Note the qualifier "On the CPU": GPUs generally take advantage of fine-grained parallelism more so than CPUs. For example, multithreaded calls from the CPU might still end up being serialized when being sent to the GPU; however, a whole bank of pixel and vertex shaders will run in parallel to perform the rendering.
Defines capabilities of the underlying Direct3D device which may be queried using
Describes the minimum DirectX support required for hardware rendering by a render target.
Direct2D determines whether the video card provides adequate hardware rendering support.
The video card must support DirectX 9.
The video card must support DirectX 10.
Indicates whether a specific
Indicates whether a specific
Specifies how the intersecting areas of geometries or figures are combined to form the area of the composite geometry.
Use the
Direct2D fills the interior of a path by using one of the two fill modes specified by this enumeration:
To see the difference between the winding and alternate fill modes, assume that you have four circles with the same center and a different radius, as shown in the following illustration. The first one has the radius of 25, the second 50, the third 75, and the fourth 100.
The following illustration shows the shape filled by using the alternate fill mode. Notice that the center and third ring are not filled. This is because a ray drawn from any point in either of those two rings passes through an even number of segments.
The following illustration explains this process.
The following illustration shows how the same shape is filled when the winding fill mode is specified.
Notice that all the rings are filled. This is because all the segments run in the same direction, so a ray drawn from any point will cross one or more segments, and the sum of the crossings will not equal zero.
The following illustration explains this process. The red arrows represent the direction in which the segments are drawn and the black arrow represents an arbitrary ray that runs from a point in the innermost ring. Starting with a value of zero, for each segment that the ray crosses, a value of one is added for every clockwise intersection. All points lie in the fill region in this illustration, because the count does not equal zero.
Determines whether a point is in the fill region by drawing a ray from that point to infinity in any direction, and then counting the number of path segments within the given shape that the ray crosses. If this number is odd, the point is in the fill region; if even, the point is outside the fill region.
Determines whether a point is in the fill region of the path by drawing a ray from that point to infinity in any direction, and then examining the places where a segment of the shape crosses the ray. Starting with a count of zero, add one each time a segment crosses the ray from left to right and subtract one each time a path segment crosses the ray from right to left, as long as left and right are seen from the perspective of the ray. After counting the crossings, if the result is zero, then the point is outside the path. Otherwise, it is inside the path.
Represents filtering modes that a transform may select to use on input textures.
This enumeration has the same numeric values as
Use point sampling for minification, magnification, and mip-level sampling.
Use point sampling for minification and magnification; use linear interpolation for mip-level sampling.
Use point sampling for minification; use linear interpolation for magnification; use point sampling for mip-level sampling.
Use point sampling for minification; use linear interpolation for magnification and mip-level sampling.
Use linear interpolation for minification; use point sampling for magnification and mip-level sampling.
Use linear interpolation for minification; use point sampling for magnification; use linear interpolation for mip-level sampling.
Use linear interpolation for minification and magnification; use point sampling for mip-level sampling.
Use linear interpolation for minification, magnification, and mip-level sampling.
Use anisotropic interpolation for minification, magnification, and mip-level sampling.
Identifiers for properties of the Flood effect.
Specifies which gamma is used for interpolation.
Interpolating in a linear gamma space (
The first gradient is interpolated linearly in the space of the render target (sRGB in this case), and one can see the dark bands between each color. The second gradient uses a gamma-correct linear interpolation, and thus does not exhibit the same variations in brightness.
Interpolation is performed in the standard RGB (sRGB) gamma.
Interpolation is performed in the linear-gamma color space.
Specifies which gamma is used for interpolation.
Interpolating in a linear gamma space (
The first gradient is interpolated linearly in the space of the render target (sRGB in this case), and one can see the dark bands between each color. The second gradient uses a gamma-correct linear interpolation, and thus does not exhibit the same variations in brightness.
Interpolation is performed in the standard RGB (sRGB) gamma.
Interpolation is performed in the linear-gamma color space.
Identifiers for properties of the Gamma transfer effect.
The optimization mode for the Gaussian blur effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Gaussian blur effect.
Describes how one geometry object is spatially related to another geometry object.
The relationship between the two geometries cannot be determined. This value is never returned by any D2D method.
The two geometries do not intersect at all.
The instance geometry is entirely contained by the passed-in geometry.
The instance geometry entirely contains the passed-in geometry.
The two geometries overlap but neither completely contains the other.
Specifies how a geometry is simplified to an
Specifies which formats are supported in the font, either at a font-wide level or per glyph.
Indicates no data is available for this glyph.
The glyph has TrueType outlines.
The glyph has CFF outlines.
The glyph has multilayered COLR data.
The glyph has SVG outlines as standard XML. Fonts may store the content gzip'd rather than plain text, indicated by the first two bytes as gzip header {0x1F 0x8B}.
The glyph has PNG image data, with standard PNG IHDR.
The glyph has JPEG image data, with standard JIFF SOI header.
The glyph has TIFF image data.
The glyph has raw 32-bit premultiplied BGRA data.
Values for the
Identifiers for properties of the Highlights and Shadows effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Histogram effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Hue rotate effect.
Values for the
Identifiers for properties of the Hue to RGB effect.
Option flags controlling primary conversion performed by CreateImageSourceFromDxgi, if any.
Controls option flags for a new
?
D2D1_IMAGE_SOURCE_CREATION_OPTIONS_RELEASE_SOURCE causes the image source to not retain a reference to the source object used to create it. It can decrease the quality and efficiency of printing.
No options are used.
Indicates the image source should release its reference to the WIC bitmap source after it has initialized. By default, the image source retains a reference to the WIC bitmap source for the lifetime of the object to enable quality and speed optimizations for printing. This option disables that optimization.
Indicates the image source should only populate subregions of the image cache on-demand. You can control this behavior using the EnsureCached and TrimCache methods. This options provides the ability to improve memory usage by only keeping needed portions of the image in memory. This option requires that the image source has a reference to the WIC bitmap source, and is incompatible with
Specifies the appearance of the ink nib (pen tip) as part of an
This is used to specify the quality of image scaling with
Specifies options that can be applied when a layer resource is applied to create a layer.
Note??Starting in Windows?8, theClearType antialiasing must use the current contents of the render target to blend properly. When a pushed layer requests initializing for ClearType, Direct2D copies the current contents of the render target into the layer so that ClearType antialiasing can be performed. Rendering ClearType text into a transparent layer does not produce the desired results.
A small performance hit from re-copying content occurs when
Specifies how the layer contents should be prepared.
Default layer behavior. A premultiplied layer target is pushed and its contents are cleared to transparent black.
The layer is not cleared to transparent black.
The layer is always created as ignore alpha. All content rendered into the layer will be treated as opaque.
Identifiers for properties of the Linear transfer effect.
Describes the shape that joins two lines or segments.
A miter limit affects how sharp miter joins are allowed to be. If the line join style is
The following illustration shows different line join settings for the same stroked path geometry.
Regular angular vertices.
Beveled vertices.
Rounded vertices.
Regular angular vertices unless the join would extend beyond the miter limit; otherwise, beveled vertices.
Identifiers for the properties of the 3D Lookup Table effect.
The
The
Specifies how the memory to be mapped from the corresponding
The
These flags will be not be able to be used on bitmaps created by the
Indicates the measuring method used for text layout.
Specifies that text is measured using glyph ideal metrics whose values are independent to the current display resolution.
Specifies that text is measured using glyph display-compatible metrics whose values tuned for the current display resolution.
Specifies that text is measured using the same glyph display metrics as text measured by GDI using a font created with CLEARTYPE_NATURAL_QUALITY.
The mode for the Morphology effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Morphology effect.
Describes whether an opacity mask contains graphics or text. Direct2D uses this information to determine which gamma space to use when blending the opacity mask.
The opacity mask contains graphics. The opacity mask is blended in the gamma 2.2 color space.
The opacity mask contains non-GDI text. The gamma space used for blending is obtained from the render target's text rendering parameters. (
The opacity mask contains text rendered using the GDI-compatible rendering mode. The opacity mask is blended using the gamma for GDI rendering.
Identifiers for properties of the Opacity metadata effect.
This effect adjusts the opacity of an image by multiplying the alpha channel of the input by the specified opacity value. It has a single input.
The CLSID for this effect is
Specifies the flip and rotation at which an image appears.
The orientation is unchanged.
The image is flipped horizontally.
The image is rotated clockwise 180 degrees.
The image is rotated clockwise 180 degrees, then flipped horizontally.
The image is rotated clockwise 90 degrees, then flipped horizontally.
The image is rotated clockwise 270 degrees.
The image is rotated clockwise 270 degrees, then flipped horizontally.
The image is rotated clockwise 90 degrees.
Specifies how to render gradient mesh edges.
Render this patch edge aliased. Use this value for the internal edges of your gradient mesh.
Render this patch edge antialiased. Use this value for the external (boundary) edges of your mesh.
Render this patch edge aliased and also slightly inflated. Use this for the internal edges of your gradient mesh when there could be t-junctions among patches. Inflating the internal edges mitigates seams that can appear along those junctions.
Indicates whether a segment should be stroked and whether the join between this segment and the previous one should be smooth. This enumeration allows a bitwise combination of its member values.
The segment is joined as specified by the
The segment is not stroked.
The segment is always joined with the one preceding it using a round line join, regardless of which
The interpolation mode the 3D perspective transform effect uses on the image. There are 5 scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Identifiers for the properties of the 3D perspective transform effect.
Indicates how pixel shader sampling will be restricted. This indicates whether the vertex buffer is large and tends to change infrequently or smaller and changes frequently (typically frame over frame).
If the shader specifies
The pixel shader is not restricted in its sampling.
The pixel shader samples inputs only at the same scene coordinate as the output pixel and returns transparent black whenever the input pixels are also transparent black.
Identifiers for properties of the Point-diffuse lighting effect.
The interpolation mode the Point-diffuse lighting effect uses to scale the image to the corresponding kernel unit length. There are six scale modes that range in quality and speed
Identifiers for properties of the Point-specular lighting effect.
The interpolation mode the Point-specular lighting effect uses to scale the image to the corresponding kernel unit length. There are six scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Identifiers for properties of the Posterize effect.
Describes how a render target behaves when it presents its content. This enumeration allows a bitwise combination of its member values.
The render target waits until the display refreshes to present and discards the frame upon presenting.
The render target does not discard the frame upon presenting.
The render target does not wait until the display refreshes to present.
Used to specify the geometric blend mode for all Direct2D primitives.
The standard source-over-destination blend mode.
The source is copied to the destination; the destination pixels are ignored.
The resulting pixel values use the minimum of the source and destination pixel values. Available in Windows?8 and later.
The resulting pixel values are the sum of the source and destination pixel values. Available in Windows?8 and later.
Defines when font resources should be subset during printing.
Uses a heuristic strategy to decide when to subset fonts.
Note??If the print driver has requested archive-optimized content, then Direct2D will subset fonts once, for the entire document. ?Subsets and embeds font resources in each page, then discards that font subset after the page is printed out.
Sends out the original font resources without subsetting along with the page that first uses the font, and re-uses the font resources for later pages without resending them.
Specifies the indices of the system properties present on the
Under normal circumstances the minimum and maximum number of inputs to the effect are the same. If the effect supports a variable number of inputs, the ID2D1Effect::SetNumberOfInputs method can be used to choose the number that the application will enable.
Specifies the types of properties supported by the Direct2D property interface.
An unknown property.
An arbitrary-length string.
A 32-bit integer value constrained to be either 0 or 1.
An unsigned 32-bit integer.
A signed 32-bit integer.
A 32-bit float.
Two 32-bit float values.
Three 32-bit float values.
Four 32-bit float values.
An arbitrary number of bytes.
A returned COM or nano-COM interface.
An enumeration. The value should be treated as a UINT32 with a defined array of fields to specify the bindings to human-readable strings.
An enumeration. The value is the count of sub-properties in the array. The set of array elements will be contained in the sub-property.
A CLSID.
A 3x2 matrix of float values.
A 4x2 matrix of float values.
A 4x4 matrix of float values.
A 5x4 matrix of float values.
A nano-COM color context interface reference.
The rendering priority affects the extent to which Direct2D will throttle its rendering workload.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
The render target uses hardware rendering only.
Describes how a render target is remoted and whether it should be GDI-compatible. This enumeration allows a bitwise combination of its member values.
The render target attempts to use Direct3D command-stream remoting and uses bitmap remoting if stream remoting fails. The render target is not GDI-compatible.
The render target renders content locally and sends it to the terminal services client as a bitmap.
The render target can be used efficiently with GDI.
Values for the
Indentifiers for properties of the RGB to Hue effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Saturation effect.
The interpolation mode the Scale effect uses to scale the image. There are 6 scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Identifiers for properties of the Scale effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Sepia effect.
The level of performance optimization for the Shadow effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Shadow effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Sharpen effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Spot-diffuse lighting effect.
The interpolation mode the Spot-diffuse lighting effect uses to scale the image to the corresponding kernel unit length. There are six scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Identifiers for properties of the Spot-specular lighting effect.
The interpolation mode the Spot-specular lighting effect uses to scale the image to the corresponding kernel unit length. There are six scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Specifies additional aspects of how a sprite batch is to be drawn, as part of a call to
Identifiers for properties of the Straighten effect.
Values for the
Defines how the world transform, dots per inch (dpi), and stroke width affect the shape of the pen used to stroke a primitive.
If you specify
If you specify
If you specify
Apart from the stroke, any value derived from the stroke width is not affected when the transformType is either fixed or hairline. This includes miters, line caps and so on.
It is important to distinguish between the geometry being stroked and the shape of the stroke pen. When
Here is an illustration of a stroke with dashing and a skew and stretch transform.
And here is an illustration of a fixed width stroke which does not get transformed.
The stroke respects the currently set world transform, the dpi, and the stroke width.
The stroke does not respect the world transform but it does respect the dpi and stroke width.
The stroke is forced to 1 pixel wide (in device space) and does not respect the world transform, the dpi, or the stroke width.
Specifies the indices of the system sub-properties that may be present in any property.
The name for the parent property.
A Boolean indicating whether the parent property is writeable.
The minimum value that can be set to the parent property.
The maximum value that can be set to the parent property.
The default value of the parent property.
An array of name/index pairs that indicate the possible values that can be set to the parent property.
An index sub-property used by the elements of the
Describes how a render target behaves when it presents its content. This enumeration allows a bitwise combination of its member values.
The render target waits until the display refreshes to present and discards the frame upon presenting.
The render target does not discard the frame upon presenting.
The render target does not wait until the display refreshes to present.
Indicates how pixel shader sampling will be restricted. This indicates whether the vertex buffer is large and tends to change infrequently or smaller and changes frequently (typically frame over frame).
If the shader specifies
The pixel shader is not restricted in its sampling.
The pixel shader samples inputs only at the same scene coordinate as the output pixel and returns transparent black whenever the input pixels are also transparent black.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
The render target uses hardware rendering only.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
The render target uses hardware rendering only.
Indicates how pixel shader sampling will be restricted. This indicates whether the vertex buffer is large and tends to change infrequently or smaller and changes frequently (typically frame over frame).
If the shader specifies
The pixel shader is not restricted in its sampling.
The pixel shader samples inputs only at the same scene coordinate as the output pixel and returns transparent black whenever the input pixels are also transparent black.
Describes the shape at the end of a line or segment.
The following illustration shows the available cap styles for lines or segments. The red portion of the line shows the extra area added by the line cap setting.
A cap that does not extend past the last point of the line. Comparable to cap used for objects other than lines.
Half of a square that has a length equal to the line thickness.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
The render target uses hardware rendering only.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
The render target uses hardware rendering only.
Describes whether a render target uses hardware or software rendering, or if Direct2D should select the rendering mode.
Not every render target supports hardware rendering. For more information, see the Render Targets Overview.
The render target uses hardware rendering, if available; otherwise, it uses software rendering.
The render target uses software rendering only.
Defines options that should be applied to the color space.
The color space is otherwise described, such as with a color profile.
The color space is sRGB.
Defines the direction that an elliptical arc is drawn.
Arcs are drawn in a counterclockwise (negative-angle) direction.
Arcs are drawn in a clockwise (positive-angle) direction.
Identifiers for properties of the Table transfer effect.
Identifiers for properties of the Temperature and Tint effect.
Describes the antialiasing mode used for drawing text.
This enumeration is used with the SetTextAntialiasMode of an
By default, Direct2D renders text in ClearType mode. Factors that can downgrade the default quality to grayscale or aliased:
Use the system default. See Remarks.
Use ClearType antialiasing.
Use grayscale antialiasing.
Do not use antialiasing.
Specifies the threading mode used while simultaneously creating the device, factory, and device context.
Resources may only be invoked serially. Device context state is not protected from multi-threaded access.
Resources may be invoked from multiple threads. Resources use interlocked reference counting and their state is protected.
Identifiers for properties of the Tile effect.
This effect tints the source image by multiplying the source image by the specified color. It has a single input.
The CLSID for this effect is
The interpolation mode the 3D transform effect uses on the image. There are 5 scale modes that range in quality and speed.
Identifiers for properties of the 3D transform effect.
Option flags for transformed image sources.
No option flags.
Prevents the image source from being automatically scaled (by a ratio of the context DPI divided by 96) while drawn.
The turbulence noise mode for the Turbulence effect. Indicates whether to generate a bitmap based on Fractal Noise or the Turbulence function.
Identifiers for properties of the Turbulence effect.
Specifies how units in Direct2D will be interpreted.
Setting the unit mode to
Units will be interpreted as device-independent pixels (1/96").
Units will be interpreted as pixels.
Describes flags that influence how the renderer interacts with a custom vertex shader.
The logical equivalent of having no flags set.
If this flag is set, the renderer assumes that the vertex shader will cover the entire region of interest with vertices and need not clear the destination render target. If this flag is not set, the renderer assumes that the vertices do not cover the entire region interest and must clear the render target to transparent black first.
The renderer will use a depth buffer when rendering custom vertices. The depth buffer will be used for calculating occlusion information. This can result in the renderer output being draw-order dependent if it contains transparency.
Indicates that custom vertices do not overlap each other.
Indicates whether the vertex buffer changes infrequently or frequently.
If a dynamic vertex buffer is created, Direct2D will not necessarily map the buffer directly to a Direct3D vertex buffer. Instead, a system memory copy can be copied to the rendering engine vertex buffer as the effects are rendered.
The created vertex buffer is updated infrequently.
The created vertex buffer is changed frequently.
Identifiers for properties of the Vignette effect.
Describes whether a window is occluded.
If the window was occluded the last time EndDraw was called, the next time the render target calls CheckWindowState, it returns
The window is not occluded.
The window is occluded.
Specifies the chroma subsampling of the input chroma image used by the YCbCr effect.
Specifies the interpolation mode for the YCbCr effect.
Identifiers for properties of the YCbCr effect.
Defines an object that paints an area. Interfaces that derive from
An
Brush space in Direct2D is specified differently than in XPS and Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF). In Direct2D, brush space is not relative to the object being drawn, but rather is the current coordinate system of the render target, transformed by the brush transform, if present. To paint an object as it would be painted by a WPF brush, you must translate the brush space origin to the upper-left corner of the object's bounding box, and then scale the brush space so that the base tile fills the bounding box of the object.
For more information about brushes, see the Brushes Overview.
Gets or sets the degree of opacity of this brush.
Gets or sets the transform applied to this brush.
When the brush transform is the identity matrix, the brush appears in the same coordinate space as the render target in which it is drawn.
Sets the degree of opacity of this brush.
A value between zero and 1 that indicates the opacity of the brush. This value is a constant multiplier that linearly scales the alpha value of all pixels filled by the brush. The opacity values are clamped in the range 0?1 before they are multipled together.
Sets the transformation applied to the brush.
The transformation to apply to this brush.
When you paint with a brush, it paints in the coordinate space of the render target. Brushes do not automatically position themselves to align with the object being painted; by default, they begin painting at the origin (0, 0) of the render target.
You can "move" the gradient defined by an
To align the content of an
The following illustrations show the effect of using an
The illustration on the right shows the result of transforming the
Gets the degree of opacity of this brush.
A value between zero and 1 that indicates the opacity of the brush. This value is a constant multiplier that linearly scales the alpha value of all pixels filled by the brush. The opacity values are clamped in the range 0?1 before they are multipled together.
Gets the transform applied to this brush.
The transform applied to this brush.
When the brush transform is the identity matrix, the brush appears in the same coordinate space as the render target in which it is drawn.
Represents the set of transforms implemented by the effect-rendering system, which provides fixed-functionality.
Sets the properties of the output buffer of the specified transform node.
The number of bits and the type of the output buffer.
The number of channels in the output buffer (1 or 4).
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_INVALIDARG | One or more arguments are not valid |
?
You can use the
The available channel depth and precision depend on the capabilities of the underlying Microsoft Direct3D device.
Sets whether the output of the specified transform is cached.
TRUE if the output should be cached; otherwise,
Provides factory methods and other state management for effect and transform authors.
Creates a 3D lookup table for mapping a 3-channel input to a 3-channel output. The table data must be provided in 4-channel format.
Precision of the input lookup table data.
Number of lookup table elements per dimension (X, Y, Z).
Buffer holding the lookup table data.
Size of the lookup table data buffer.
An array containing two values. The first value is the size in bytes from one row (X dimension) of LUT data to the next. The second value is the size in bytes from one LUT data plane (X and Y dimensions) to the next.
Receives the new lookup table instance.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates Direct2D resources. This interface also enables the creation of
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates Direct2D resources. This interface also enables the creation of
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates Direct2D resources. This interface also enables the creation of
Creates an
This method returns an
Creates Direct2D resources.
The
A factory defines a set of CreateResource methods that can produce the following drawing resources:
To create an
Creates Direct2D resources.
The
A factory defines a set of CreateResource methods that can produce the following drawing resources:
To create an
A Direct2D resource that wraps a WMF, EMF, or EMF+ metafile.
Gets the bounds of the metafile, in device-independent pixels (DIPs), as reported in the metafile?s header.
This method streams the contents of the command to the given metafile sink.
The sink into which Direct2D will call back.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
Gets the bounds of the metafile, in device-independent pixels (DIPs), as reported in the metafile?s header.
The bounds, in DIPs, of the metafile.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Gets the bounds of the metafile in source space in DIPs. This corresponds to the frame rect in an EMF/EMF+.
Gets the DPI reported by the metafile.
Receives the horizontal DPI reported by the metafile.
Receives the vertical DPI reported by the metafile.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the bounds of the metafile in source space in DIPs. This corresponds to the frame rect in an EMF/EMF+.
The bounds, in DIPs, of the metafile.
A developer implemented interface that allows a metafile to be replayed.
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
This interface performs all the same functions as the existing
Provides access to metafile records, including their type, data, and flags.
The type of metafile record being processed. Please see MS-EMF and MS-EMFPLUS for a list of record types.
The data contained in this record. Please see MS-EMF and MS-EMFPLUS for information on record data layouts.
TThe size of the data pointed to by recordData.
The set of flags set for this record. Please see MS-EMF and MS-EMFPLUS for information on record flags.
For details on the EMF and EMF+ formats, please see Microsoft technical documents MS-EMF and MS-EMFPLUS.
A developer implemented interface that allows a metafile to be replayed.
This method is called once for each record stored in a metafile.
The type of the record.
The data for the record.
The byte size of the record data.
Return true if the record is successfully.
Represents a geometry resource and defines a set of helper methods for manipulating and measuring geometric shapes. Interfaces that inherit from
There are several types of Direct2D geometry objects: a simple geometry (
Direct2D geometries enable you to describe two-dimensional figures and also offer many uses, such as defining hit-test regions, clip regions, and even animation paths.
Direct2D geometries are immutable and device-independent resources created by
Gets the bounds of the geometry after it has been widened by the specified stroke width and style and transformed by the specified matrix.
The amount by which to widen the geometry by stroking its outline.
The style of the stroke that widens the geometry.
A transform to apply to the geometry after the geometry is transformed and after the geometry has been stroked.
When this method returns, contains the bounds of the widened geometry. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
When this method returns, contains the bounds of the widened geometry. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Determines whether the geometry's stroke contains the specified point given the specified stroke thickness, style, and transform.
The point to test for containment.
The thickness of the stroke to apply.
The style of stroke to apply.
The transform to apply to the stroked geometry.
The numeric accuracy with which the precise geometric path and path intersection is calculated. Points missing the stroke by less than the tolerance are still considered inside. Smaller values produce more accurate results but cause slower execution.
When this method returns, contains a boolean value set to true if the geometry's stroke contains the specified point; otherwise, false. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Indicates whether the area filled by the geometry would contain the specified point given the specified flattening tolerance.
The point to test.
The transform to apply to the geometry prior to testing for containment, or
The numeric accuracy with which the precise geometric path and path intersection is calculated. Points missing the fill by less than the tolerance are still considered inside. Smaller values produce more accurate results but cause slower execution.
When this method returns, contains a
Describes the intersection between this geometry and the specified geometry. The comparison is performed by using the specified flattening tolerance.
The geometry to test.
The transform to apply to inputGeometry, or
The maximum error allowed when constructing a polygonal approximation of the geometry. No point in the polygonal representation will diverge from the original geometry by more than the flattening tolerance. Smaller values produce more accurate results but cause slower execution.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a value that describes how this geometry is related to inputGeometry. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
When interpreting the returned relation value, it is important to remember that the member
For more information about how to interpret other possible return values, see
Creates a simplified version of the geometry that contains only lines and (optionally) cubic Bezier curves and writes the result to an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a set of clockwise-wound triangles that cover the geometry after it has been transformed using the specified matrix and flattened using the default tolerance.
The transform to apply to this geometry.
The
The
If this method succeeds, it returns
Combines this geometry with the specified geometry and stores the result in an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Computes the outline of the geometry and writes the result to an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Computes the area of the geometry after it has been transformed by the specified matrix and flattened using the specified tolerance.
The transform to apply to this geometry before computing its area.
The maximum error allowed when constructing a polygonal approximation of the geometry. No point in the polygonal representation will diverge from the original geometry by more than the flattening tolerance. Smaller values produce more accurate results but cause slower execution.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the area of the transformed, flattened version of this geometry. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Calculates the point and tangent vector at the specified distance along the geometry after it has been transformed by the specified matrix and flattened using the default tolerance.
The distance along the geometry of the point and tangent to find. If this distance is less then 0, this method calculates the first point in the geometry. If this distance is greater than the length of the geometry, this method calculates the last point in the geometry.
The transform to apply to the geometry before calculating the specified point and tangent.
The location at the specified distance along the geometry. If the geometry is empty, this point contains NaN as its x and y values.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the tangent vector at the specified distance along the geometry. If the geometry is empty, this vector contains NaN as its x and y values. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
The location at the specified distance along the geometry. If the geometry is empty, this point contains NaN as its x and y values.
Widens the geometry by the specified stroke and writes the result to an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a composite geometry, composed of other
Geometry groups are a convenient way to group several geometries simultaneously so all figures of several distinct geometries are concatenated into one.
Indicates how the intersecting areas of the geometries contained in this geometry group are combined.
Indicates the number of geometry objects in the geometry group.
Indicates how the intersecting areas of the geometries contained in this geometry group are combined.
A value that indicates how the intersecting areas of the geometries contained in this geometry group are combined.
Indicates the number of geometry objects in the geometry group.
The number of geometries in the
Retrieves the geometries in the geometry group.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to an array of geometries to be filled by this method. The length of the array is specified by the geometryCount parameter. If the array is
A value indicating the number of geometries to return in the geometries array. If this value is less than the number of geometries in the geometry group, the remaining geometries are omitted. If this value is larger than the number of geometries in the geometry group, the extra geometries are set to
The returned geometries are referenced and counted, and the caller must release them.
Encapsulates a device- and transform-dependent representation of a filled or stroked geometry. Callers should consider creating a geometry realization when they wish to accelerate repeated rendering of a given geometry. This interface exposes no methods.
Encapsulates a device- and transform-dependent representation of a filled or stroked geometry. Callers should consider creating a geometry realization when they wish to accelerate repeated rendering of a given geometry. This interface exposes no methods.
Creates a device-dependent representation of the fill of the geometry that can be subsequently rendered.
The geometry to realize.
The flattening tolerance to use when converting Beziers to line segments. This parameter shares the same units as the coordinates of the geometry.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
This method is used in conjunction with
If the provided stroke style specifies a stroke transform type other than
Creates a device-dependent representation of the stroke of a geometry that can be subsequently rendered.
The geometry to realize.
The flattening tolerance to use when converting Beziers to line segments. This parameter shares the same units as the coordinates of the geometry.
The width of the stroke. This parameter shares the same units as the coordinates of the geometry.
The stroke style (optional).
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid value was passed to the method. |
?
This method is used in conjunction with
If the provided stroke style specifies a stroke transform type other than
Describes a geometric path that can contain lines, arcs, cubic Bezier curves, and quadratic Bezier curves.
The
A geometry sink consists of one or more figures. Each figure is made up of one or more line, curve, or arc segments. To create a figure, call the BeginFigure method, specify the figure's start point, and then use its Add methods (such as AddLine and AddBezier) to add segments. When you are finished adding segments, call the EndFigure method. You can repeat this sequence to create additional figures. When you are finished creating figures, call the Close method.
Describes a geometric path that can contain lines, arcs, cubic Bezier curves, and quadratic Bezier curves.
The
A geometry sink consists of one or more figures. Each figure is made up of one or more line, curve, or arc segments. To create a figure, call the BeginFigure method, specify the figure's start point, and then use its Add methods (such as AddLine and AddBezier) to add segments. When you are finished adding segments, call the EndFigure method. You can repeat this sequence to create additional figures. When you are finished creating figures, call the Close method.
Creates a line segment between the current point and the specified end point and adds it to the geometry sink.
The end point of the line to draw.
Creates a quadratic Bezier curve between the current point and the specified end point.
A structure that describes the control point and the end point of the quadratic Bezier curve to add.
Adds a sequence of quadratic Bezier segments as an array in a single call.
An array of a sequence of quadratic Bezier segments.
A value indicating the number of quadratic Bezier segments in beziers.
Describes a geometric path that can contain lines, arcs, cubic Bezier curves, and quadratic Bezier curves.
The
A geometry sink consists of one or more figures. Each figure is made up of one or more line, curve, or arc segments. To create a figure, call the BeginFigure method, specify the figure's start point, and then use its Add methods (such as AddLine and AddBezier) to add segments. When you are finished adding segments, call the EndFigure method. You can repeat this sequence to create additional figures. When you are finished creating figures, call the Close method.
Represents a device-dependent representation of a gradient mesh composed of patches. Use the
Returns the number of patches that make up this gradient mesh.
Returns the number of patches that make up this gradient mesh.
Returns the number of patches that make up this gradient mesh.
Returns a subset of the patches that make up this gradient mesh.
Index of the first patch to return.
A reference to the array to be filled with the patch data.
The number of patches to be returned.
Represents an collection of
Retrieves the number of gradient stops in the collection.
Indicates the gamma space in which the gradient stops are interpolated.
Indicates the behavior of the gradient outside the normalized gradient range.
Retrieves the number of gradient stops in the collection.
The number of gradient stops in the collection.
Copies the gradient stops from the collection into an array of
Gradient stops are copied in order of position, starting with the gradient stop with the smallest position value and progressing to the gradient stop with the largest position value.
Indicates the gamma space in which the gradient stops are interpolated.
The gamma space in which the gradient stops are interpolated.
Indicates the behavior of the gradient outside the normalized gradient range.
The behavior of the gradient outside the [0,1] normalized gradient range.
Represents a collection of
Gets the color space of the input colors as well as the space in which gradient stops are interpolated.
If this object was created using
Gets the color space after interpolation has occurred.
If you create using
Gets the precision of the gradient buffer.
If this object was created using
Retrieves the color interpolation mode that the gradient stop collection uses.
Copies the gradient stops from the collection into memory.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a one-dimensional array of
The number of gradient stops to copy.
If the
If gradientStopsCount is less than the number of gradient stops in the collection, the remaining gradient stops are omitted. If gradientStopsCount is larger than the number of gradient stops in the collection, the extra gradient stops are set to
Gets the color space of the input colors as well as the space in which gradient stops are interpolated.
This method returns the color space.
If this object was created using
Gets the color space after interpolation has occurred.
This method returns the color space.
If you create using
Gets the precision of the gradient buffer.
The buffer precision of the gradient buffer.
If this object was created using
Retrieves the color interpolation mode that the gradient stop collection uses.
The color interpolation mode.
Represents a producer of pixels that can fill an arbitrary 2D plane.
An
Images are evaluated lazily. If the type of image passed in is concrete, then the image can be directly sampled from. Other images can act only as a source of pixels and can produce content only as a result of calling
Represents a brush based on an
Gets or sets the image associated with the image brush.
Gets or sets the extend mode of the image brush on the x-axis.
Gets or sets the extend mode of the image brush on the y-axis of the image.
Gets or sets the interpolation mode of the image brush.
Gets or sets the rectangle that will be used as the bounds of the image when drawn as an image brush.
Sets the image associated with the provided image brush.
The image to be associated with the image brush.
Sets how the content inside the source rectangle in the image brush will be extended on the x-axis.
The extend mode on the x-axis of the image.
Sets the extend mode on the y-axis.
The extend mode on the y-axis of the image.
Sets the interpolation mode for the image brush.
How the contents of the image will be interpolated to handle the brush transform.
Sets the source rectangle in the image brush.
The source rectangle that defines the portion of the image to tile.
The top left corner of the sourceRectangle parameter maps to the brush space origin. That is, if the brush and world transforms are both identity, the portion of the image in the top left corner of the source rectangle will be rendered at (0,0) in the render target.
The source rectangle will be expanded differently depending on whether the input image is based on pixels (a bitmap or effect) or by a command list.
Gets the image associated with the image brush.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the image associated with this brush.
Gets the extend mode of the image brush on the x-axis.
This method returns the x-extend mode.
Gets the extend mode of the image brush on the y-axis of the image.
This method returns the y-extend mode.
Gets the interpolation mode of the image brush.
This method returns the interpolation mode.
Gets the rectangle that will be used as the bounds of the image when drawn as an image brush.
When this method returns, contains the address of the output source rectangle.
Represents a producer of pixels that can fill an arbitrary 2D plane.
Allows the operating system to free the video memory of resources by discarding their content.
OfferResources returns:
Restores access to resources that were previously offered by calling OfferResources.
ReclaimResources returns:
After you call OfferResources to offer one or more resources, you must call TryReclaimResources before you can use those resources again. You must check the value in the resourcesDiscarded to determine whether the resource?s content was discarded. If a resource?s content was discarded while it was offered, its current content is undefined. Therefore, you must overwrite the resource?s content before you use the resource.
Produces 2D pixel data that has been sourced from WIC.
Create an an instance of
Retrieves the underlying bitmap image source from the Windows Imaging Component (WIC).
Ensures that a specified region of the image source cache is populated. This method can be used to minimize glitches by performing expensive work to populate caches outside of a rendering loop. This method can also be used to speculatively load image data before it is needed by drawing routines.
Specifies the region of the image, in pixels, that should be populated in the cache. By default, this is the entire extent of the image.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This API loads image data into caches of image sources, if that data was not already cached. It does not trim pre-existing caches, if any. More areas within the cache can be populated than actually requested.
?
The provided region must be constructed to include the scale with which the image source will subsequently be drawn. These coordinates must be provided in local coordinates. This means that they must be adjusted prior to calling the API according to the DPI and other relevant transforms, which can include the world transform and brush transforms.
This operation is only supported when the image source has been initialized using the
This method trims the populated regions of the image source cache to just the specified rectangle.
Specifies the region of the image, in pixels, which should be preserved in the image source cache. Regions which are outside of the rectangle are evicted from the cache. By default, this is an empty rectangle, meaning that the entire image is evicted from the cache.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The provided region must be constructed to include the scale at which the image source will be drawn at. These coordinates must be provided in local coordinates. This means that they must be adjusted prior to calling the API according to the DPI and other relevant transforms, which can include the world transform and brush transforms.
?
This method will fail if on-demand caching was not requested when the image source was created.
?
As with
This operation is only supported when the image source has been initialized using the
Retrieves the underlying bitmap image source from the Windows Imaging Component (WIC).
On return contains the bitmap image source.
Represents a single continuous stroke of variable-width ink, as defined by a series of Bezier segments and widths.
Retrieves or sets the starting point for this ink object.
Updates the last segment in this ink object with new control points.
Returns the number of segments in this ink object.
Sets the starting point for this ink object. This determines where this ink object will start rendering.
The new starting point for this ink object.
Retrieves the starting point for this ink object.
The starting point for this ink object.
Adds the given segments to the end of this ink object.
A reference to an array of segments to be added to this ink object.
The number of segments to be added to this ink object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Removes the given number of segments from the end of this ink object.
The number of segments to be removed from the end of this ink object. Note that segmentsCount must be less or equal to the number of segments in the ink object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Updates the specified segments in this ink object with new control points.
The index of the first segment in this ink object to update.
A reference to the array of segment data to be used in the update.
The number of segments in this ink object that will be updated with new data. Note that segmentsCount must be less than or equal to the number of segments in the ink object minus startSegment.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Updates the last segment in this ink object with new control points.
A reference to the segment data with which to overwrite this ink object's last segment. Note that if there are currently no segments in the ink object, SetSegmentsAtEnd will return an error.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns the number of segments in this ink object.
Returns the number of segments in this ink object.
Retrieves the specified subset of segments stored in this ink object.
The index of the first segment in this ink object to retrieve.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array of retrieved segments.
The number of segments to retrieve. Note that segmentsCount must be less than or equal to the number of segments in the ink object minus startSegment.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a geometric representation of this ink object.
The ink style to be used in determining the geometric representation.
The world transform to be used in determining the geometric representation.
The flattening tolerance to be used in determining the geometric representation.
The geometry sink to which the geometry representation will be streamed.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieve the bounds of the geometry, with an optional applied transform.
The ink style to be used in determining the bounds of this ink object.
The world transform to be used in determining the bounds of this ink object.
When this method returns, contains the bounds of this ink object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a collection of style properties to be used by methods like
Retrieves or sets the transform to be applied to this style's nib shape.
Retrieves or sets the pre-transform nib shape for this style.
Sets the transform to apply to this style's nib shape.
The transform to apply to this style?s nib shape. Note that the translation components of the transform matrix are ignored for the purposes of rendering.
Retrieves the transform to be applied to this style's nib shape.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the transform to be applied to this style's nib shape.
Sets the pre-transform nib shape for this style.
The pre-transform nib shape to use in this style.
Retrieves the pre-transform nib shape for this style.
Returns the pre-transform nib shape for this style.
Represents the backing store required to render a layer.
To create a layer, call the CreateLayer method of the render target where the layer will be used. To draw to a layer, push the layer to the render target stack by calling the PushLayer method. After you have finished drawing to the layer, call the PopLayer method.
Between PushLayer and PopLayer calls, the layer is in use and cannot be used by another render target.
If the size of the layer is not specified, the corresponding PushLayer call determines the minimum layer size, based on the layer content bounds and the geometric mask. The layer resource can be larger than the size required by PushLayer without any rendering artifacts.
If the size of a layer is specified, or if the layer has been used and the required backing store size as calculated during PushLayer is larger than the layer, then the layer resource is expanded on each axis monotonically to ensure that it is large enough. The layer resource never shrinks in size.
Gets the size of the layer in device-independent pixels.
Gets the size of the layer in device-independent pixels.
The size of the layer in device-independent pixels.
Paints an area with a linear gradient.
An
The start point and end point are described in the brush space and are mappped to the render target when the brush is used. Note the starting and ending coordinates are absolute, not relative to the render target size. A value of (0, 0) maps to the upper-left corner of the render target, while a value of (1, 1) maps one pixel diagonally away from (0, 0). If there is a nonidentity brush transform or render target transform, the brush start point and end point are also transformed.
It is possible to specify a gradient axis that does not completely fill the area that is being painted. When this occurs, the
Retrieves or sets the starting coordinates of the linear gradient.
The start point and end point are described in the brush's space and are mapped to the render target when the brush is used. If there is a non-identity brush transform or render target transform, the brush's start point and end point are also transformed.
Retrieves or sets the ending coordinates of the linear gradient.
The start point and end point are described in the brush's space and are mapped to the render target when the brush is used. If there is a non-identity brush transform or render target transform, the brush's start point and end point are also transformed.
Retrieves the
Sets the starting coordinates of the linear gradient in the brush's coordinate space.
The starting two-dimensional coordinates of the linear gradient, in the brush's coordinate space.
The start point and end point are described in the brush's space and are mapped to the render target when the brush is used. If there is a non-identity brush transform or render target transform, the brush's start point and end point are also transformed.
Sets the ending coordinates of the linear gradient in the brush's coordinate space.
The ending two-dimensional coordinates of the linear gradient, in the brush's coordinate space.
The start point and end point are described in the brush's space and are mapped to the render target when the brush is used. If there is a non-identity brush transform or render target transform, the brush's start point and end point are also transformed.
Retrieves the starting coordinates of the linear gradient.
The starting two-dimensional coordinates of the linear gradient, in the brush's coordinate space.
The start point and end point are described in the brush's space and are mapped to the render target when the brush is used. If there is a non-identity brush transform or render target transform, the brush's start point and end point are also transformed.
Retrieves the ending coordinates of the linear gradient.
The ending two-dimensional coordinates of the linear gradient, in the brush's coordinate space.
The start point and end point are described in the brush's space and are mapped to the render target when the brush is used. If there is a non-identity brush transform or render target transform, the brush's start point and end point are also transformed.
Retrieves the
A container for 3D lookup table data that can be passed to the LookupTable3D effect.
An ID2DLookupTable3D instance is created using
Represents a set of vertices that form a list of triangles.
Opens the mesh for population.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a reference to an
If this method succeeds, it returns
A locking mechanism from a Direct2D factory that Direct2D uses to control exclusive resource access in an app that is uses multiple threads.
You can get an
You should use this lock while doing any operation on a Direct3D/DXGI surface. Direct2D will wait on any call until you leave the critical section.
Note?? Normal rendering is guarded automatically by an internal Direct2D lock.? Returns whether the Direct2D factory was created with the
Returns whether the Direct2D factory was created with the
Returns true if the Direct2D factory was created as multi-threaded, or false if it was created as single-threaded.
Enters the Direct2D API critical section, if it exists.
Leaves the Direct2D API critical section, if it exists.
Instructs the effect-rendering system to offset an input bitmap without inserting a rendering pass.
Because a rendering pass is not required, the interface derives from a transform node. This allows it to be inserted into a graph but does not allow an output buffer to be specified.
Sets the offset in the current offset transform.
The new offset to apply to the offset transform.
Gets the offset currently in the offset transform.
The current transform offset.
Represents a complex shape that may be composed of arcs, curves, and lines.
An
Retrieves the number of segments in the path geometry.
Retrieves the number of figures in the path geometry.
Retrieves the geometry sink that is used to populate the path geometry with figures and segments.
When this method returns, geometrySink contains the address of a reference to the geometry sink that is used to populate the path geometry with figures and segments. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
Because path geometries are immutable and can only be populated once, it is an error to call Open on a path geometry more than once.
Note that the fill mode defaults to
Copies the contents of the path geometry to the specified
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the number of segments in the path geometry.
A reference that receives the number of segments in the path geometry when this method returns. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the number of figures in the path geometry.
A reference that receives the number of figures in the path geometry when this method returns. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The
This interface adds functionality to
Computes the point that exists at a given distance along the path geometry along with the index of the segment the point is on and the directional vector at that point.
The distance to walk along the path.
The index of the segment at which to begin walking. Note: This index is global to the entire path, not just a particular figure.
The transform to apply to the path prior to walking.
The flattening tolerance to use when walking along an arc or Bezier segment. The flattening tolerance is the maximum error allowed when constructing a polygonal approximation of the geometry. No point in the polygonal representation will diverge from the original geometry by more than the flattening tolerance. Smaller values produce more accurate results but cause slower execution.
When this method returns, contains a description of the point that can be found at the given location.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | One of the inputs was in an invalid range. |
?
Converts Direct2D primitives stored in an
Converts Direct2D primitives in the passed-in command list into a fixed page representation for use by the print subsystem.
The command list that contains the rendering operations.
The size of the page to add.
The print ticket stream.
Contains the first label for subsequent drawing operations. This parameter is passed uninitialized. If
Contains the second label for subsequent drawing operations. This parameter is passed uninitialized. If
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
The print job is already finished. |
?
Passes all remaining resources to the print sub-system, then clean up and close the current print job.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
The print job is already finished. |
?
[This documentation is preliminary and is subject to change.]
Applies to: desktop apps | Metro style apps
TBD
[This documentation is preliminary and is subject to change.]
Applies to: desktop apps | Metro style apps
TBD
Represents a set of run-time bindable and discoverable properties that allow a data-driven application to modify the state of a Direct2D effect.
This interface supports access through either indices or property names. In addition to top-level properties, each property in an
Gets the number of top-level properties.
This method returns the number of custom properties on the
Gets the number of top-level properties.
This method returns the number of custom (non-system) properties that can be accessed by the object.
This method returns the number of custom properties on the
Gets the number of characters for the given property name. This is a template overload. See Remarks.
The index of the property name to retrieve.
This method returns the size in characters of the name corresponding to the given property index, or zero if the property index does not exist.
The value returned by this method can be used to ensure that the buffer size for GetPropertyName is appropriate.
template<typename U> UINT32 GetPropertyNameLength( U index ) CONST;
Gets the
This method returns a
If the property does not exist, the method returns
Gets the index corresponding to the given property name.
The name of the property to retrieve.
The index of the corresponding property name.
If the property does not exist, this method returns D2D1_INVALID_PROPERTY_INDEX. This reserved value will never map to a valid index and will cause
Sets the corresponding property by index. This is a template overload. See Remarks.
The index of the property to set.
The data to set.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
The specified property does not exist. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Failed to allocate necessary memory. |
D3DERR_OUT_OF_VIDEO_MEMORY | Failed to allocate required video memory. |
E_INVALIDARG | One or more arguments are invalid. |
E_FAIL | Unspecified failure. |
?
template<typename T, typename U>
Gets the property value by name. This is a template overload. See Remarks.
The property name to get.
Returns the value requested.
If propertyName does not exist, no information is retrieved.
Any error not in the standard set returned by a property implementation will be mapped into the standard error range.
template<typename T> T GetValueByName( _In_ PCWSTR propertyName ) const;
Gets the value of the property by index. This is a template overload. See Remarks.
The index of the property from which the value is to be obtained.
Returns the value requested.
template<typename T, typename U> T GetValue( U index ) const;
Gets the size of the property value in bytes, using the property index. This is a template overload. See Remarks.
The index of the property.
This method returns size of the value in bytes, using the property index
This method returns zero if index does not exist.
template<typename U> UINT32 GetValueSize( U index ) CONST;
Gets the sub-properties of the provided property by index. This is a template overload. See Remarks.
The index of the sub-properties to be retrieved.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the sub-properties.
If there are no sub-properties, subProperties will be
template<typename U>
Paints an area with a radial gradient.
The
The brush maps the gradient stop position 0.0f of the gradient origin, and the position 1.0f is mapped to the ellipse boundary. When the gradient origin is within the ellipse, the contents of the ellipse enclose the entire [0, 1] range of the brush gradient stops. If the gradient origin is outside the bounds of the ellipse, the brush still works, but its gradient is not well-defined.
The start point and end point are described in the brush space and are mappped to the render target when the brush is used. Note the starting and ending coordinates are absolute, not relative to the render target size. A value of (0, 0) maps to the upper-left corner of the render target, while a value of (1, 1) maps just one pixel diagonally away from (0, 0). If there is a nonidentity brush transform or render target transform, the brush ellipse and gradient origin are also transformed.
It is possible to specify an ellipse that does not completely fill area being painted. When this occurs, the
Retrieves or sets the center of the gradient ellipse.
Retrieves or sets the offset of the gradient origin relative to the gradient ellipse's center.
Retrieves or sets the x-radius of the gradient ellipse.
Retrieves or sets the y-radius of the gradient ellipse.
Retrieves the
Specifies the center of the gradient ellipse in the brush's coordinate space.
The center of the gradient ellipse, in the brush's coordinate space.
Specifies the offset of the gradient origin relative to the gradient ellipse's center.
The offset of the gradient origin from the center of the gradient ellipse.
Specifies the x-radius of the gradient ellipse, in the brush's coordinate space.
The x-radius of the gradient ellipse. This value is in the brush's coordinate space.
Specifies the y-radius of the gradient ellipse, in the brush's coordinate space.
The y-radius of the gradient ellipse. This value is in the brush's coordinate space.
Retrieves the center of the gradient ellipse.
The center of the gradient ellipse. This value is expressed in the brush's coordinate space.
Retrieves the offset of the gradient origin relative to the gradient ellipse's center.
The offset of the gradient origin from the center of the gradient ellipse. This value is expressed in the brush's coordinate space.
Retrieves the x-radius of the gradient ellipse.
The x-radius of the gradient ellipse. This value is expressed in the brush's coordinate space.
Retrieves the y-radius of the gradient ellipse.
The y-radius of the gradient ellipse. This value is expressed in the brush's coordinate space.
Retrieves the
Describes a two-dimensional rectangle.
Retrieves the rectangle that describes the rectangle geometry's dimensions.
Retrieves the rectangle that describes the rectangle geometry's dimensions.
Contains a reference to a rectangle that describes the rectangle geometry's dimensions when this method returns. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Describes the render information common to all of the various transform implementations.
This interface is used by a transform implementation to first describe and then indicate changes to the rendering pass that corresponds to the transform.
Specifies that the output of the transform in which the render information is encapsulated is or is not cached.
Provides an estimated hint of shader execution cost to D2D.
The instruction count may be set according to the number of instructions in the shader. This information is used as a hint when rendering extremely large images. Calling this API is optional, but it may improve performance if you provide an accurate number.
Note??Instructions that occur in a loop should be counted according to the number of loop iterations.?Sets how a specific input to the transform should be handled by the renderer in terms of sampling.
The index of the input that will have the input description applied.
The description of the input to be applied to the transform.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
The input description must be matched correctly by the effect shader code.
Allows a caller to control the output precision and channel-depth of the transform in which the render information is encapsulated.
The type of buffer that should be used as an output from this transform.
The number of channels that will be used on the output buffer.
If the method succeeds, it returns
If the output precision of the transform is not specified, then it will default to the precision specified on the Direct2D device context. The maximum of 16bpc UNORM and 16bpc FLOAT is 32bpc FLOAT.
The output channel depth will match the maximum of the input channel depths if the channel depth is
There is no global output channel depth, this is always left to the control of the transforms.
Specifies that the output of the transform in which the render information is encapsulated is or is not cached.
TRUE if the output of the transform is cached; otherwise,
Provides an estimated hint of shader execution cost to D2D.
An approximate instruction count of the associated shader.
The instruction count may be set according to the number of instructions in the shader. This information is used as a hint when rendering extremely large images. Calling this API is optional, but it may improve performance if you provide an accurate number.
Note??Instructions that occur in a loop should be counted according to the number of loop iterations.?Represents an object that can receive drawing commands. Interfaces that inherit from
Your application should create render targets once and hold onto them for the life of the application or until the render target's EndDraw method returns the
Gets or sets the current transform of the render target.
Retrieves or sets the current antialiasing mode for nontext drawing operations.
Gets or sets the current antialiasing mode for text and glyph drawing operations.
Retrieves or sets the render target's current text rendering options.
If the settings specified by textRenderingParams are incompatible with the render target's text antialiasing mode (specified by SetTextAntialiasMode), subsequent text and glyph drawing operations will fail and put the render target into an error state.
Retrieves the pixel format and alpha mode of the render target.
Returns the size of the render target in device-independent pixels.
Returns the size of the render target in device pixels.
Gets the maximum size, in device-dependent units (pixels), of any one bitmap dimension supported by the render target.
This method returns the maximum texture size of the Direct3D device.
Note??The software renderer and WARP devices return the value of 16 megapixels (16*1024*1024). You can create a Direct2D texture that is this size, but not a Direct3D texture that is this size.?Creates a Direct2D bitmap from a reference to in-memory source data.
The dimension of the bitmap to create in pixels.
A reference to the memory location of the image data, or
The byte count of each scanline, which is equal to (the image width in pixels ? the number of bytes per pixel) + memory padding. If srcData is
The pixel format and dots per inch (DPI) of the bitmap to create.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a reference to the new bitmap. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Before Direct2D can load a WIC bitmap, that bitmap must be converted to a supported pixel format and alpha mode. For a list of supported pixel formats and alpha modes, see Supported Pixel Formats and Alpha Modes.
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
The CreateSharedBitmap method is useful for efficiently reusing bitmap data and can also be used to provide interoperability with Direct3D.
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a new
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a new bitmap render target for use during intermediate offscreen drawing that is compatible with the current render target and has the same size, DPI, and pixel format (but not alpha mode) as the current render target.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a reference to a new bitmap render target. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The bitmap render target created by this method is not compatible with GDI and has an alpha mode of
Creates a layer resource that can be used with this render target and its compatible render targets. The new layer has the specified initial size.
If (0, 0) is specified, no backing store is created behind the layer resource. The layer resource is allocated to the minimum size when PushLayer is called.
When the method returns, contains a reference to a reference to the new layer. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Regardless of whether a size is initially specified, the layer automatically resizes as needed.
Create a mesh that uses triangles to describe a shape.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a reference to the new mesh.
If this method succeeds, it returns
To populate a mesh, use its Open method to obtain an
Draws a line between the specified points using the specified stroke style.
The start point of the line, in device-independent pixels.
The end point of the line, in device-independent pixels.
The brush used to paint the line's stroke.
The width of the stroke, in device-independent pixels. The value must be greater than or equal to 0.0f. If this parameter isn't specified, it defaults to 1.0f. The stroke is centered on the line.
The style of stroke to paint, or
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as DrawLine) failed, check the result returned by the
Draws the outline of a rectangle that has the specified dimensions and stroke style.
The dimensions of the rectangle to draw, in device-independent pixels.
The brush used to paint the rectangle's stroke.
The width of the stroke, in device-independent pixels. The value must be greater than or equal to 0.0f. If this parameter isn't specified, it defaults to 1.0f. The stroke is centered on the line.
The style of stroke to paint, or
When this method fails, it does not return an error code. To determine whether a drawing method (such as DrawRectangle) failed, check the result returned by the
Paints the interior of the specified rectangle.
The dimension of the rectangle to paint, in device-independent pixels.
The brush used to paint the rectangle's interior.
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as FillRectangle) failed, check the result returned by the
Draws the outline of the specified rounded rectangle using the specified stroke style.
The dimensions of the rounded rectangle to draw, in device-independent pixels.
The brush used to paint the rounded rectangle's outline.
The width of the stroke, in device-independent pixels. The value must be greater than or equal to 0.0f. If this parameter isn't specified, it defaults to 1.0f. The stroke is centered on the line.
The style of the rounded rectangle's stroke, or
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as DrawRoundedRectangle) failed, check the result returned by the
Paints the interior of the specified rounded rectangle.
The dimensions of the rounded rectangle to paint, in device-independent pixels.
The brush used to paint the interior of the rounded rectangle.
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as FillRoundedRectangle) failed, check the result returned by the
Draws the outline of the specified ellipse using the specified stroke style.
The position and radius of the ellipse to draw, in device-independent pixels.
The brush used to paint the ellipse's outline.
The width of the stroke, in device-independent pixels. The value must be greater than or equal to 0.0f. If this parameter isn't specified, it defaults to 1.0f. The stroke is centered on the line.
The style of stroke to apply to the ellipse's outline, or
The DrawEllipse method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as DrawEllipse) failed, check the result returned by the
Paints the interior of the specified ellipse.
The position and radius, in device-independent pixels, of the ellipse to paint.
The brush used to paint the interior of the ellipse.
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as FillEllipse) failed, check the result returned by the
Draws the outline of the specified geometry using the specified stroke style.
The geometry to draw.
The brush used to paint the geometry's stroke.
The width of the stroke, in device-independent pixels. The value must be greater than or equal to 0.0f. If this parameter isn't specified, it defaults to 1.0f. The stroke is centered on the line.
The style of stroke to apply to the geometry's outline, or
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as DrawGeometry) failed, check the result returned by the
Paints the interior of the specified geometry.
The geometry to paint.
The brush used to paint the geometry's interior.
The opacity mask to apply to the geometry, or
If the opacityBrush parameter is not
When this method fails, it does not return an error code. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as FillGeometry) failed, check the result returned by the
Paints the interior of the specified mesh.
The mesh to paint.
The brush used to paint the mesh.
The current antialias mode of the render target must be
FillMesh does not expect a particular winding order for the triangles in the
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as FillMesh) failed, check the result returned by the
For this method to work properly, the render target must be using the
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as FillOpacityMask) failed, check the result returned by the
Draws the specified bitmap after scaling it to the size of the specified rectangle.
The bitmap to render.
The size and position, in device-independent pixels in the render target's coordinate space, of the area to which the bitmap is drawn. If the rectangle is not well-ordered, nothing is drawn, but the render target does not enter an error state.
A value between 0.0f and 1.0f, inclusive, that specifies the opacity value to be applied to the bitmap; this value is multiplied against the alpha values of the bitmap's contents. Default is 1.0f.
The interpolation mode to use if the bitmap is scaled or rotated by the drawing operation. The default value is
The size and position, in device-independent pixels in the bitmap's coordinate space, of the area within the bitmap to draw;
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as DrawBitmap) failed, check the result returned by the
Draws the specified text using the format information provided by an
To create an
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as DrawText) failed, check the result returned by the
Draws the formatted text described by the specified
When drawing the same text repeatedly, using the DrawTextLayout method is more efficient than using the DrawText method because the text doesn't need to be formatted and the layout processed with each call.
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as DrawTextLayout) failed, check the result returned by the
Draws the specified glyphs.
The origin, in device-independent pixels, of the glyphs' baseline.
The glyphs to render.
The brush used to paint the specified glyphs.
A value that indicates how glyph metrics are used to measure text when it is formatted. The default value is
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as DrawGlyphRun) failed, check the result returned by the
Gets the current transform of the render target.
When this returns, contains the current transform of the render target. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
Sets the antialiasing mode of the render target. The antialiasing mode applies to all subsequent drawing operations, excluding text and glyph drawing operations.
The antialiasing mode for future drawing operations.
To specify the antialiasing mode for text and glyph operations, use the SetTextAntialiasMode method.
Retrieves the current antialiasing mode for nontext drawing operations.
The current antialiasing mode for nontext drawing operations.
Specifies the antialiasing mode to use for subsequent text and glyph drawing operations.
The antialiasing mode to use for subsequent text and glyph drawing operations.
Gets the current antialiasing mode for text and glyph drawing operations.
The current antialiasing mode for text and glyph drawing operations.
Specifies text rendering options to be applied to all subsequent text and glyph drawing operations.
The text rendering options to be applied to all subsequent text and glyph drawing operations;
If the settings specified by textRenderingParams are incompatible with the render target's text antialiasing mode (specified by SetTextAntialiasMode), subsequent text and glyph drawing operations will fail and put the render target into an error state.
Retrieves the render target's current text rendering options.
When this method returns, textRenderingParamscontains the address of a reference to the render target's current text rendering options.
If the settings specified by textRenderingParams are incompatible with the render target's text antialiasing mode (specified by SetTextAntialiasMode), subsequent text and glyph drawing operations will fail and put the render target into an error state.
Specifies a label for subsequent drawing operations.
A label to apply to subsequent drawing operations.
A label to apply to subsequent drawing operations.
The labels specified by this method are printed by debug error messages. If no tag is set, the default value for each tag is 0.
Gets the label for subsequent drawing operations.
When this method returns, contains the first label for subsequent drawing operations. This parameter is passed uninitialized. If
When this method returns, contains the second label for subsequent drawing operations. This parameter is passed uninitialized. If
If the same address is passed for both parameters, both parameters receive the value of the second tag.
Adds the specified layer to the render target so that it receives all subsequent drawing operations until PopLayer is called.
The PushLayer method allows a caller to begin redirecting rendering to a layer. All rendering operations are valid in a layer. The location of the layer is affected by the world transform set on the render target.
Each PushLayer must have a matching PopLayer call. If there are more PopLayer calls than PushLayer calls, the render target is placed into an error state. If Flush is called before all outstanding layers are popped, the render target is placed into an error state, and an error is returned. The error state can be cleared by a call to EndDraw.
A particular
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as PushLayer) failed, check the result returned by the
Stops redirecting drawing operations to the layer that is specified by the last PushLayer call.
A PopLayer must match a previous PushLayer call.
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as PopLayer) failed, check the result returned by the
Executes all pending drawing commands.
When this method returns, contains the tag for drawing operations that caused errors or 0 if there were no errors. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
When this method returns, contains the tag for drawing operations that caused errors or 0 if there were no errors. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
If the method succeeds, it returns
This command does not flush the Direct3D device context that is associated with the render target.
Calling this method resets the error state of the render target.
Saves the current drawing state to the specified
Sets the render target's drawing state to that of the specified
Specifies a rectangle to which all subsequent drawing operations are clipped.
The size and position of the clipping area, in device-independent pixels.
The antialiasing mode that is used to draw the edges of clip rects that have subpixel boundaries, and to blend the clip with the scene contents. The blending is performed once when the PopAxisAlignedClip method is called, and does not apply to each primitive within the layer.
The clipRect is transformed by the current world transform set on the render target. After the transform is applied to the clipRect that is passed in, the axis-aligned bounding box for the clipRect is computed. For efficiency, the contents are clipped to this axis-aligned bounding box and not to the original clipRect that is passed in.
The following diagrams show how a rotation transform is applied to the render target, the resulting clipRect, and a calculated axis-aligned bounding box.
Assume the rectangle in the following illustration is a render target that is aligned to the screen pixels.
Apply a rotation transform to the render target. In the following illustration, the black rectangle represents the original render target and the red dashed rectangle represents the transformed render target.
After calling PushAxisAlignedClip, the rotation transform is applied to the clipRect. In the following illustration, the blue rectangle represents the transformed clipRect.
The axis-aligned bounding box is calculated. The green dashed rectangle represents the bounding box in the following illustration. All contents are clipped to this axis-aligned bounding box.
The PushAxisAlignedClip and PopAxisAlignedClip must match. Otherwise, the error state is set. For the render target to continue receiving new commands, you can call Flush to clear the error.
A PushAxisAlignedClip and PopAxisAlignedClip pair can occur around or within a PushLayer and PopLayer, but cannot overlap. For example, the sequence of PushAxisAlignedClip, PushLayer, PopLayer, PopAxisAlignedClip is valid, but the sequence of PushAxisAlignedClip, PushLayer, PopAxisAlignedClip, PopLayer is invalid.
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as PushAxisAlignedClip) failed, check the result returned by the
Removes the last axis-aligned clip from the render target. After this method is called, the clip is no longer applied to subsequent drawing operations.
A PushAxisAlignedClip/PopAxisAlignedClip pair can occur around or within a PushLayer/PopLayer pair, but may not overlap. For example, a PushAxisAlignedClip, PushLayer, PopLayer, PopAxisAlignedClip sequence is valid, but a PushAxisAlignedClip, PushLayer, PopAxisAlignedClip, PopLayer sequence is not.
PopAxisAlignedClip must be called once for every call to PushAxisAlignedClip.
For an example, see How to Clip with an Axis-Aligned Clip Rectangle.
This method doesn't return an error code if it fails. To determine whether a drawing operation (such as PopAxisAlignedClip) failed, check the result returned by the
Clears the drawing area to the specified color.
The color to which the drawing area is cleared, or
Direct2D interprets the clearColor as straight alpha (not premultiplied). If the render target's alpha mode is
If the render target has an active clip (specified by PushAxisAlignedClip), the clear command is applied only to the area within the clip region.
Initiates drawing on this render target.
Drawing operations can only be issued between a BeginDraw and EndDraw call.
BeginDraw and EndDraw are used to indicate that a render target is in use by the Direct2D system. Different implementations of
The BeginDraw method must be called before rendering operations can be called, though state-setting and state-retrieval operations can be performed even outside of BeginDraw/EndDraw.
After BeginDraw is called, a render target will normally build up a batch of rendering commands, but defer processing of these commands until either an internal buffer is full, the Flush method is called, or until EndDraw is called. The EndDraw method causes any batched drawing operations to complete, and then returns an
If EndDraw is called without a matched call to BeginDraw, it returns an error indicating that BeginDraw must be called before EndDraw. Calling BeginDraw twice on a render target puts the target into an error state where nothing further is drawn, and returns an appropriate
Ends drawing operations on the render target and indicates the current error state and associated tags.
When this method returns, contains the tag for drawing operations that caused errors or 0 if there were no errors. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
When this method returns, contains the tag for drawing operations that caused errors or 0 if there were no errors. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Drawing operations can only be issued between a BeginDraw and EndDraw call.
BeginDraw and EndDraw are use to indicate that a render target is in use by the Direct2D system. Different implementations of
The BeginDraw method must be called before rendering operations can be called, though state-setting and state-retrieval operations can be performed even outside of BeginDraw/EndDraw.
After BeginDraw is called, a render target will normally build up a batch of rendering commands, but defer processing of these commands until either an internal buffer is full, the Flush method is called, or until EndDraw is called. The EndDraw method causes any batched drawing operations to complete, and then returns an
If EndDraw is called without a matched call to BeginDraw, it returns an error indicating that BeginDraw must be called before EndDraw. Calling BeginDraw twice on a render target puts the target into an error state where nothing further is drawn, and returns an appropriate
Retrieves the pixel format and alpha mode of the render target.
The pixel format and alpha mode of the render target.
Sets the dots per inch (DPI) of the render target.
A value greater than or equal to zero that specifies the horizontal DPI of the render target.
A value greater than or equal to zero that specifies the vertical DPI of the render target.
This method specifies the mapping from pixel space to device-independent space for the render target. If both dpiX and dpiY are 0, the factory-read system DPI is chosen. If one parameter is zero and the other unspecified, the DPI is not changed.
For
Return the render target's dots per inch (DPI).
When this method returns, contains the horizontal DPI of the render target. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
When this method returns, contains the vertical DPI of the render target. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
This method indicates the mapping from pixel space to device-independent space for the render target.
For
Returns the size of the render target in device-independent pixels.
The current size of the render target in device-independent pixels.
Returns the size of the render target in device pixels.
The size of the render target in device pixels.
Gets the maximum size, in device-dependent units (pixels), of any one bitmap dimension supported by the render target.
The maximum size, in pixels, of any one bitmap dimension supported by the render target.
This method returns the maximum texture size of the Direct3D device.
Note??The software renderer and WARP devices return the value of 16 megapixels (16*1024*1024). You can create a Direct2D texture that is this size, but not a Direct3D texture that is this size.?Indicates whether the render target supports the specified properties.
The render target properties to test.
TRUE if the specified render target properties are supported by this render target; otherwise,
This method does not evaluate the DPI settings specified by the renderTargetProperties parameter.
Ends drawing operations on the render target and indicates the current error state and associated tags.
When this method returns, contains the tag for drawing operations that caused errors or 0 if there were no errors. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
When this method returns, contains the tag for drawing operations that caused errors or 0 if there were no errors. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Drawing operations can only be issued between a BeginDraw and EndDraw call.
BeginDraw and EndDraw are use to indicate that a render target is in use by the Direct2D system. Different implementations of
The BeginDraw method must be called before rendering operations can be called, though state-setting and state-retrieval operations can be performed even outside of BeginDraw/EndDraw.
After BeginDraw is called, a render target will normally build up a batch of rendering commands, but defer processing of these commands until either an internal buffer is full, the Flush method is called, or until EndDraw is called. The EndDraw method causes any batched drawing operations to complete, and then returns an
If EndDraw is called without a matched call to BeginDraw, it returns an error indicating that BeginDraw must be called before EndDraw. Calling BeginDraw twice on a render target puts the target into an error state where nothing further is drawn, and returns an appropriate
Represents a Direct2D drawing resource.
Retrieves the factory associated with this resource.
Retrieves the factory associated with this resource.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a reference to the factory that created this resource. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
Tracks a transform-created resource texture.
Updates the specific resource texture inside the specific range or box using the supplied data.
The "left" extent of the updates if specified; if
The "right" extent of the updates if specified; if
The stride to advance through the input data, according to dimension.
The number of dimensions in the resource texture. This must match the number used to load the texture.
The data to be placed into the resource texture.
The size of the data buffer to be used to update the resource texture.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
?
The number of dimensions in the update must match those of the created texture.
Describes a rounded rectangle.
Retrieves a rounded rectangle that describes this rounded rectangle geometry.
Retrieves a rounded rectangle that describes this rounded rectangle geometry.
A reference that receives a rounded rectangle that describes this rounded rectangle geometry. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
Describes a geometric path that does not contain quadratic bezier curves or arcs.
A geometry sink consists of one or more figures. Each figure is made up of one or more line or Bezier curve segments. To create a figure, call the BeginFigure method and specify the figure's start point, then use AddLines and AddBeziers to add line and Bezier segments. When you are finished adding segments, call the EndFigure method. You can repeat this sequence to create additional figures. When you are finished creating figures, call the Close method.
To create geometry paths that can contain arcs and quadratic Bezier curves, use an
Describes a geometric path that does not contain quadratic bezier curves or arcs.
A geometry sink consists of one or more figures. Each figure is made up of one or more line or Bezier curve segments. To create a figure, call the BeginFigure method and specify the figure's start point, then use AddLines and AddBeziers to add line and Bezier segments. When you are finished adding segments, call the EndFigure method. You can repeat this sequence to create additional figures. When you are finished creating figures, call the Close method.
To create geometry paths that can contain arcs and quadratic Bezier curves, use an
Specifies the method used to determine which points are inside the geometry described by this geometry sink and which points are outside.
The method used to determine whether a given point is part of the geometry.
The fill mode defaults to
Specifies stroke and join options to be applied to new segments added to the geometry sink.
Stroke and join options to be applied to new segments added to the geometry sink.
After this method is called, the specified segment flags are applied to each segment subsequently added to the sink. The segment flags are applied to every additional segment until this method is called again and a different set of segment flags is specified.
Starts a new figure at the specified point.
The point at which to begin the new figure.
Whether the new figure should be hollow or filled.
If this method is called while a figure is currently in progress, the interface is invalidated and all future methods will fail.
Creates a sequence of lines using the specified points and adds them to the geometry sink.
A reference to an array of one or more points that describe the lines to draw. A line is drawn from the geometry sink's current point (the end point of the last segment drawn or the location specified by BeginFigure) to the first point in the array. if the array contains additional points, a line is drawn from the first point to the second point in the array, from the second point to the third point, and so on.
The number of points in the points array.
Creates a sequence of cubic Bezier curves and adds them to the geometry sink.
A reference to an array of Bezier segments that describes the Bezier curves to create. A curve is drawn from the geometry sink's current point (the end point of the last segment drawn or the location specified by BeginFigure) to the end point of the first Bezier segment in the array. if the array contains additional Bezier segments, each subsequent Bezier segment uses the end point of the preceding Bezier segment as its start point.
The number of Bezier segments in the beziers array.
Ends the current figure; optionally, closes it.
A value that indicates whether the current figure is closed. If the figure is closed, a line is drawn between the current point and the start point specified by BeginFigure.
Calling this method without a matching call to BeginFigure places the geometry sink in an error state; subsequent calls are ignored, and the overall failure will be returned when the Close method is called.
Closes the geometry sink, indicates whether it is in an error state, and resets the sink's error state.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Do not close the geometry sink while a figure is still in progress; doing so puts the geometry sink in an error state. For the close operation to be successful, there must be one EndFigure call for each call to BeginFigure.
After calling this method, the geometry sink might not be usable. Direct2D implementations of this interface do not allow the geometry sink to be modified after it is closed, but other implementations might not impose this restriction.
Paints an area with a solid color.
Retrieves or sets the color of the solid color brush.
Specifies the color of this solid color brush.
The color of this solid color brush.
To help create colors, Direct2D provides the ColorF class. It offers several helper methods for creating colors and provides a set or predefined colors.
Retrieves the color of the solid color brush.
The color of this solid color brush.
Represents a CPU-based rasterization stage in the transform pipeline graph.
Represents a CPU-based rasterization stage in the transform pipeline graph.
Sets the render information for the transform.
The interface supplied to the transform to allow specifying the CPU based transform pass.
If the method succeeds, it returns
Provides a render information interface to the source transform to allow it to specify state to the rendering system.
Draws the transform to the graphics processing unit (GPU)?based Direct2D pipeline.
The target to which the transform should be written.
The area within the source from which the image should be drawn.
The origin within the target bitmap to which the source data should be drawn.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The implementation of the rasterizer guarantees that adding the renderRect to the targetOrigin does not exceed the bounds of the bitmap.
When implementing this method you must update the bitmap in this way:
If you set the buffer precision manually on the associated
Adds the given sprites to the end of this sprite batch.
In Direct2D, a sprite is defined by four properties: a destination rectangle, a source rectangle, a color, and a transform. Destination rectangles are mandatory, but the remaining properties are optional.
Note??Always omit or pass a null value for properties you do not wish to use. This allows Direct2D to avoid storing values for those properties and to skip their handling entirely, which improves drawing speed. For example, suppose you have a batch of 500 sprites, and you do not wish to transform any of their destination rectangles. Rather than passing an array of identity matrices, simply omit the transforms parameter. This allows Direct2D to avoid storing any transforms and will yield the fastest drawing performance. On the other hand, if any sprite in the batch has any value set for a property, then internally Direct2D must allocate space for that property array and assign every sprite a value for that property (even if it?s just the default value).?Retrieves the number of sprites in this sprite batch.
Adds the given sprites to the end of this sprite batch.
The number of sprites to be added. This determines how many strides into each given array Direct2D will read.
A reference to an array containing the destination rectangles specifying where to draw the sprites on the destination device context.
A reference to an array containing the source rectangles specifying the regions of the source bitmap to draw as sprites. Direct2D will use the entire source bitmap for sprites that are assigned a null value or the InfiniteRectU. If this parameter is omitted entirely or set to a null value, then Direct2D will use the entire source bitmap for all the added sprites.
A reference to an array containing the colors to apply to each sprite. The output color is the result of component-wise multiplication of the source bitmap color and the provided color. The output color is not clamped.
Direct2D will not change the color of sprites that are assigned a null value. If this parameter is omitted entirely or set to a null value, then Direct2D will not change the color of any of the added sprites.
A reference to an array containing the transforms to apply to each sprite?s destination rectangle.
Direct2D will not transform the destination rectangle of any sprites that are assigned a null value. If this parameter is omitted entirely or set to a null value, then Direct2D will not transform the destination rectangle of any of the added sprites.
Specifies the distance, in bytes, between each rectangle in the destinationRectangles array. If you provide a stride of 0, then the same destination rectangle will be used for each added sprite.
Specifies the distance, in bytes, between each rectangle in the sourceRectangles array (if that array is given). If you provide a stride of 0, then the same source rectangle will be used for each added sprite.
Specifies the distance, in bytes, between each color in the colors array (if that array is given). If you provide a stride of 0, then the same color will be used for each added sprite.
Specifies the distance, in bytes, between each transform in the transforms array (if that array is given). If you provide a stride of 0, then the same transform will be used for each added sprite.
If this method succeeds, it returns
In Direct2D, a sprite is defined by four properties: a destination rectangle, a source rectangle, a color, and a transform. Destination rectangles are mandatory, but the remaining properties are optional.
Note??Always omit or pass a null value for properties you do not wish to use. This allows Direct2D to avoid storing values for those properties and to skip their handling entirely, which improves drawing speed. For example, suppose you have a batch of 500 sprites, and you do not wish to transform any of their destination rectangles. Rather than passing an array of identity matrices, simply omit the transforms parameter. This allows Direct2D to avoid storing any transforms and will yield the fastest drawing performance. On the other hand, if any sprite in the batch has any value set for a property, then internally Direct2D must allocate space for that property array and assign every sprite a value for that property (even if it?s just the default value).?Updates the properties of the specified sprites in this sprite batch. Providing a null value for any property will leave that property unmodified for that sprite.
The index of the first sprite in this sprite batch to update.
The number of sprites to update with new properties. This determines how many strides into each given array Direct2D will read.
A reference to an array containing the destination rectangles specifying where to draw the sprites on the destination device context.
A reference to an array containing the source rectangles specifying the regions of the source bitmap to draw as sprites.
Direct2D will use the entire source bitmap for sprites that are assigned a null value or the InfiniteRectU. If this parameter is omitted entirely or set to a null value, then Direct2D will use the entire source bitmap for all the updated sprites.
A reference to an array containing the colors to apply to each sprite. The output color is the result of component-wise multiplication of the source bitmap color and the provided color. The output color is not clamped.
Direct2D will not change the color of sprites that are assigned a null value. If this parameter is omitted entirely or set to a null value, then Direct2D will not change the color of any of the updated sprites.
A reference to an array containing the transforms to apply to each sprite?s destination rectangle.
Direct2D will not transform the destination rectangle of any sprites that are assigned a null value. If this parameter is omitted entirely or set to a null value, then Direct2D will not transform the destination rectangle of any of the updated sprites.
Specifies the distance, in bytes, between each rectangle in the destinationRectangles array. If you provide a stride of 0, then the same destination rectangle will be used for each updated sprite.
Specifies the distance, in bytes, between each rectangle in the sourceRectangles array (if that array is given). If you provide a stride of 0, then the same source rectangle will be used for each updated sprite.
Specifies the distance, in bytes, between each color in the colors array (if that array is given). If you provide a stride of 0, then the same color will be used for each updated sprite.
Specifies the distance, in bytes, between each transform in the transforms array (if that array is given). If you provide a stride of 0, then the same transform will be used for each updated sprite.
Returns
Retrieves the specified subset of sprites from this sprite batch. For the best performance, use nullptr for properties that you do not need to retrieve.
The index of the first sprite in this sprite batch to retrieve.
The number of sprites to retrieve.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array containing the destination rectangles for the retrieved sprites.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array containing the source rectangles for the retrieved sprites.
The InfiniteRectU is returned for any sprites that were not assigned a source rectangle.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array containing the colors to be applied to the retrieved sprites.
The color {1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f} is returned for any sprites that were not assigned a color.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array containing the transforms to be applied to the retrieved sprites.
The identity matrix is returned for any sprites that were not assigned a transform.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the number of sprites in this sprite batch.
Returns the number of sprites in this sprite batch
Removes all sprites from this sprite batch.
Describes the caps, miter limit, line join, and dash information for a stroke.
Retrieves the type of shape used at the beginning of a stroke.
Retrieves the type of shape used at the end of a stroke.
Gets a value that specifies how the ends of each dash are drawn.
Retrieves the limit on the ratio of the miter length to half the stroke's thickness.
Retrieves the type of joint used at the vertices of a shape's outline.
Retrieves a value that specifies how far in the dash sequence the stroke will start.
Gets a value that describes the stroke's dash pattern.
If a custom dash style is specified, the dash pattern is described by the dashes array, which can be retrieved by calling the GetDashes method.
Retrieves the number of entries in the dashes array.
Retrieves the type of shape used at the beginning of a stroke.
The type of shape used at the beginning of a stroke.
Retrieves the type of shape used at the end of a stroke.
The type of shape used at the end of a stroke.
Gets a value that specifies how the ends of each dash are drawn.
A value that specifies how the ends of each dash are drawn.
Retrieves the limit on the ratio of the miter length to half the stroke's thickness.
A positive number greater than or equal to 1.0f that describes the limit on the ratio of the miter length to half the stroke's thickness.
Retrieves the type of joint used at the vertices of a shape's outline.
A value that specifies the type of joint used at the vertices of a shape's outline.
Retrieves a value that specifies how far in the dash sequence the stroke will start.
A value that specifies how far in the dash sequence the stroke will start.
Gets a value that describes the stroke's dash pattern.
A value that describes the predefined dash pattern used, or
If a custom dash style is specified, the dash pattern is described by the dashes array, which can be retrieved by calling the GetDashes method.
Retrieves the number of entries in the dashes array.
The number of entries in the dashes array if the stroke is dashed; otherwise, 0.
Copies the dash pattern to the specified array.
A reference to an array that will receive the dash pattern. The array must be able to contain at least as many elements as specified by dashesCount. You must allocate storage for this array.
The number of dashes to copy. If this value is less than the number of dashes in the stroke style's dashes array, the returned dashes are truncated to dashesCount. If this value is greater than the number of dashes in the stroke style's dashes array, the extra dashes are set to 0.0f. To obtain the actual number of dashes in the stroke style's dashes array, use the GetDashesCount method.
The dashes are specified in units that are a multiple of the stroke width, with subsequent members of the array indicating the dashes and gaps between dashes: the first entry indicates a filled dash, the second a gap, and so on.
Describes the caps, miter limit, line join, and dash information for a stroke.
This interface adds functionality to
Gets the stroke transform type.
Gets the stroke transform type.
This method returns the stroke transform type.
This interface performs all the same functions as the
This interface performs all the same functions as the
Interface for all SVG elements.
This object supplies the values for context-fill, context-stroke, and context-value that are used when rendering SVG glyphs.
Returns or sets the requested fill parameters.
Returns the number of dashes in the dash array.
Provides values to an SVG glyph for fill.
Describes how the area is painted. A null brush will cause the context-fill value to come from the defaultFillBrush. If the defaultFillBrush is also null, the context-fill value will be 'none'. To set the ?context-fill? value, this method uses the provided brush with its opacity set to 1. To set the ?context-fill-opacity? value, this method uses the opacity of the provided brush.
This method returns an
Returns the requested fill parameters.
Describes how the area is painted.
Provides values to an SVG glyph for stroke properties. The brush with opacity set to 1 is used as the 'context-stroke'. The opacity of the brush is used as the 'context-stroke-opacity' value.
Describes how the stroke is painted. A null brush will cause the context-stroke value to be none.
Specifies the 'context-value' for the 'stroke-width' property.
Specifies the 'context-value' for the 'stroke-dasharray' property. A null value will cause the stroke-dasharray to be set to 'none'.
The the number of dashes in the dash array.
Specifies the 'context-value' for the 'stroke-dashoffset' property.
This method returns an
Returns the number of dashes in the dash array.
Returns the number of dashes in the dash array.
Returns the requested stroke parameters. Any parameters that are non-null will receive the value of the requested parameter.
Describes how the stroke is painted.
The 'context-value' for the 'stroke-width' property.
The 'context-value' for the 'stroke-dasharray' property.
The the number of dashes in the dash array.
The 'context-value' for the 'stroke-dashoffset' property.
Represents a bitmap that has been bound to an
This interface performs all the same functions as the
Interface describing an SVG points value in a polyline or polygon element.
This interface performs all the same functions as the
Populates an
Populates an
Copies the specified triangles to the sink.
An array of
The number of triangles to copy from the triangles array.
Closes the sink and returns its error status.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents the base interface for all of the transforms implemented by the transform author.
Transforms are aggregated by effect authors. This interface provides a common interface for implementing the Shantzis rectangle calculations which is the basis for all the transform processing in Direct2D imaging extensions. These calculations are described in the paper A model for efficient and flexible image computing.
[This documentation is preliminary and is subject to change.]
Applies to: desktop apps | Metro style apps
Allows a transform to state how it would map a rectangle requested on its output to a set of sample rectangles on its input.
The output rectangle to which the inputs must be mapped.
The corresponding set of inputs. The inputs will directly correspond to the transform inputs.
The transform implementation must ensure that any pixel shader or software callback implementation it provides honors this calculation.
The transform implementation must regard this method as purely functional. It can base the mapped input and output rectangles on its current state as specified by the encapsulating effect properties. However, it must not change its own state in response to this method being invoked. The DirectImage renderer implementation reserves the right to call this method at any time and in any sequence.
[This documentation is preliminary and is subject to change.]
Applies to: desktop apps | Metro style apps
Performs the inverse mapping to MapOutputRectToInputRects.
The transform implementation must ensure that any pixel shader or software callback implementation it provides honors this calculation.
The transform implementation must regard this method as purely functional. It can base the mapped input and output rectangles on its current state as specified by the encapsulating effect properties. However, it must not change its own state in response to this method being invoked. The Direct2D renderer implementation reserves the right to call this method at any time and in any sequence.
Represents a geometry that has been transformed.
Using an
Retrieves the source geometry of this transformed geometry object.
Retrieves the matrix used to transform the
Retrieves the source geometry of this transformed geometry object.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a reference to the source geometry for this transformed geometry object. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
Retrieves the matrix used to transform the
Represents an image source which shares resources with an original image source.
Retrieves the source image used to create the transformed image source. This value corresponds to the value passed to CreateTransformedImageSource.
Retrieves the properties specified when the transformed image source was created. This value corresponds to the value passed to CreateTransformedImageSource.
Retrieves the source image used to create the transformed image source. This value corresponds to the value passed to CreateTransformedImageSource.
Retrieves the properties specified when the transformed image source was created. This value corresponds to the value passed to CreateTransformedImageSource.
Represents a graph of transform nodes.
This interface allows a graph of transform nodes to be specified. This interface is passed to
Returns the number of inputs to the transform graph.
Returns the number of inputs to the transform graph.
The number of inputs to this transform graph.
Sets a single transform node as being equivalent to the whole graph.
The node to be set.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
?
This equivalent to calling
Adds the provided node to the transform graph.
The node that will be added to the transform graph.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred | |
E_OUTOFMEMORY | Direct2D could not allocate sufficient memory to complete the call. |
?
This adds a transform node to the transform graph. A node must be added to the transform graph before it can be interconnected in any way.
A transform graph cannot be directly added to another transform graph.
Only interfaces derived from
Removes the provided node from the transform graph.
The node that will be removed from the transform graph.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred | |
D2DERR_NOT_FOUND = (HRESULT_FROM_WIN32( | Direct2D could not locate the specified node. |
?
The node must already exist in the graph; otherwise, the call fails with D2DERR_NOT_FOUND.
Any connections to this node will be removed when the node is removed.
After the node is removed, it cannot be used by the interface until it has been added to the graph by AddNode.
Sets the output node for the transform graph.
The node that will be considered the output of the transform node.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred | |
D2DERR_NOT_FOUND = (HRESULT_FROM_WIN32( | Direct2D could not locate the specified node. |
?
The node must already exist in the graph; otherwise, the call fails with D2DERR_NOT_FOUND.
Connects two nodes inside the transform graph.
The node from which the connection will be made.
The node to which the connection will be made.
The node input that will be connected.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred | |
D2DERR_NOT_FOUND = (HRESULT_FROM_WIN32( | Direct2D could not locate the specified node. |
?
Both nodes must already exist in the graph; otherwise, the call fails with D2DERR_NOT_FOUND.
Connects a transform node inside the graph to the corresponding effect input of the encapsulating effect.
The effect input to which the transform node will be bound.
The node to which the connection will be made.
The node input that will be connected.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred | |
D2DERR_NOT_FOUND = (HRESULT_FROM_WIN32( | Direct2D could not locate the specified node. |
?
Clears the transform nodes and all connections from the transform graph.
Used when enough changes to transfoms would make editing of the transform graph inefficient.
Uses the specified input as the effect output.
The index of the input to the effect.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred | |
D2DERR_NOT_FOUND = (HRESULT_FROM_WIN32( | Direct2D could not locate the specified node. |
?
Represents the base interface for all of the transforms implemented by the transform author.
Transforms are aggregated by effect authors. This interface provides a common interface for implementing the Shantzis rectangle calculations which is the basis for all the transform processing in Direct2D imaging extensions. These calculations are described in the paper A model for efficient and flexible image computing.
Allows a transform to state how it would map a rectangle requested on its output to a set of sample rectangles on its input.
The output rectangle from which the inputs must be mapped.
The corresponding set of inputs. The inputs will directly correspond to the transform inputs.
The number of inputs specified. Direct2D guarantees that this is equal to the number of inputs specified on the transform.
If the method succeeds, it returns
The transform implementation must ensure that any pixel shader or software callback implementation it provides honors this calculation.
The transform implementation must regard this method as purely functional. It can base the mapped input and output rectangles on its current state as specified by the encapsulating effect properties. However, it must not change its own state in response to this method being invoked. The Direct2D renderer implementation reserves the right to call this method at any time and in any sequence.
Performs the inverse mapping to MapOutputRectToInputRects.
The transform implementation must ensure that any pixel shader or software callback implementation it provides honors this calculation.
Unlike the MapOutputRectToInputRects and MapInvalidRect functions, this method is explicitly called by the renderer at a determined place in its rendering algorithm. The transform implementation may change its state based on the input rectangles and use this information to control its rendering information. This method is always called before the MapInvalidRect and MapOutputRectToInputRects methods of the transform.
Sets the input rectangles for this rendering pass into the transform.
The index of the input rectangle.
The invalid input rectangle.
The output rectangle to which the input rectangle must be mapped.
The transform implementation must regard MapInvalidRect as purely functional. The transform implementation can base the mapped input rectangle on the transform implementation's current state as specified by the encapsulating effect properties. But the transform implementation can't change its own state in response to a call to MapInvalidRect. Direct2D can call this method at any time and in any sequence following a call to the MapInputRectsToOutputRect method.
Describes a node in a transform topology.
Transform nodes are type-less and only define the notion of an object that accepts a number of inputs and is an output. This interface limits a topology to single output nodes.
Describes a node in a transform topology.
Transform nodes are type-less and only define the notion of an object that accepts a number of inputs and is an output. This interface limits a topology to single output nodes.
Gets the number of inputs to the transform node.
This method returns the number of inputs to this transform node.
Defines a mappable single-dimensional vertex buffer.
Maps the provided data into user memory.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the available buffer.
The desired size of the buffer.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
E_INVALIDARG | An invalid parameter was passed to the returning function. |
D3DERR_DEVICELOST | The device has been lost but cannot be reset at this time. |
?
If data is larger than bufferSize, this method fails.
Unmaps the vertex buffer.
The method returns an
Description | |
---|---|
No error occurred. | |
The object was not in the correct state to process the method. |
?
After this method returns, the mapped memory from the vertex buffer is no longer accessible by the effect.
Renders drawing instructions to a window.
As is the case with other render targets, you must call BeginDraw before issuing drawing commands. After you've finished drawing, call EndDraw to indicate that drawing is finished and to release access to the buffer backing the render target. For
A hardware render target's back-buffer is the size specified by GetPixelSize. If EndDraw presents the buffer, this bitmap is stretched to cover the surface where it is presented: the entire client area of the window. This stretch is performed using bilinear filtering if the render target is rendering in hardware and using nearest-neighbor filtering if the rendering target is using software. (Typically, an application will call Resize to ensure the pixel size of the render target and the pixel size of the destination match, and no scaling is necessary, though this is not a requirement.)
In the case where a window straddles adapters, Direct2D ensures that the portion of the off-screen render target is copied from the adapter where rendering is occurring to the adapter that needs to display the contents. If the adapter a render target is on has been removed or the driver upgraded while the application is running, this is returned as an error in the EndDraw call. In this case, the application should create a new render target and resources as necessary.
Returns the
Indicates whether the
A value that indicates whether the
After this method is called, the contents of the render target's back-buffer are not defined, even if the
Returns the
The
Describes an elliptical arc between two points.
The end point of the arc.
The x-radius and y-radius of the arc.
A value that specifies how many degrees in the clockwise direction the ellipse is rotated relative to the current coordinate system.
A value that specifies whether the arc sweep is clockwise or counterclockwise.
A value that specifies whether the given arc is larger than 180 degrees.
Represents a cubic bezier segment drawn between two points.
A cubic Bezier curve is defined by four points: a start point, an end point (point3), and two control points (point1 and point2). A Bezier segment does not contain a property for the starting point of the curve; it defines only the end point. The beginning point of the curve is the current point of the path to which the Bezier curve is added.
The two control points of a cubic Bezier curve behave like magnets, attracting portions of what would otherwise be a straight line toward themselves and producing a curve. The first control point, point1, affects the beginning portion of the curve; the second control point, point2, affects the ending portion of the curve.
Note??The curve doesn't necessarily pass through either of the control points; each control point moves its portion of the line toward itself, but not through itself.?The first control point for the Bezier segment.
The second control point for the Bezier segment.
The end point for the Bezier segment.
Describes the extend modes and the interpolation mode of an
Describes the extend modes and the interpolation mode of an
Defines a blend description to be used in a particular blend transform.
This description closely matches the
Specifies the first RGB data source and includes an optional preblend operation.
Specifies the second RGB data source and includes an optional preblend operation.
Specifies how to combine the RGB data sources.
Specifies the first alpha data source and includes an optional preblend operation. Blend options that end in _COLOR are not allowed.
Specifies the second alpha data source and includes an optional preblend operation. Blend options that end in _COLOR are not allowed.
Specifies how to combine the alpha data sources.
Parameters to the blend operations. The blend must use
Describes the opacity and transformation of a brush.
This structure is used when creating a brush. For convenience, Direct2D provides the D2D1::BrushProperties function for creating
After creating a brush, you can change its opacity or transform by calling the SetOpacity or SetTransform methods.
A value between 0.0f and 1.0f, inclusive, that specifies the degree of opacity of the brush.
The transformation that is applied to the brush.
Specifies the options with which the Direct2D device, factory, and device context are created.
The root objects referred to here are the Direct2D device, Direct2D factory and the Direct2D device context.
Describes the drawing state of a render target.
The antialiasing mode for subsequent nontext drawing operations.
The antialiasing mode for subsequent text and glyph drawing operations.
A label for subsequent drawing operations.
A label for subsequent drawing operations.
The transformation to apply to subsequent drawing operations.
Describes the drawing state of a device context.
The antialiasing mode for subsequent nontext drawing operations.
The antialiasing mode for subsequent text and glyph drawing operations.
A label for subsequent drawing operations.
A label for subsequent drawing operations.
The transformation to apply to subsequent drawing operations.
The blend mode for the device context to apply to subsequent drawing operations.
Contains the debugging level of an
To enable debugging, you must install the Direct2D Debug Layer.
Describes compute shader support, which is an option on D3D10 feature level.
You can fill this structure by passing a D2D1_ FEATURE_DATA_D3D10_X_HARDWARE_OPTIONS structure to
Shader model 4 compute shaders are supported.
Describes the support for doubles in shaders.
Fill this structure by passing a
TRUE is doubles are supported within the shaders.
Represents a tensor patch with 16 control points, 4 corner colors, and boundary flags. An
The following image shows the numbering of control points on a tensor grid.
Contains the position and color of a gradient stop.
Gradient stops can be specified in any order if they are at different positions. Two stops may share a position. In this case, the first stop specified is treated as the "low" stop (nearer 0.0f) and subsequent stops are treated as "higher" (nearer 1.0f). This behavior is useful if a caller wants an instant transition in the middle of a stop.
Typically, there are at least two points in a collection, although creation with only one stop is permitted. For example, one point is at position 0.0f, another point is at position 1.0f, and additional points are distributed in the [0, 1] range. Where the gradient progression is beyond the range of [0, 1], the stops are stored, but may affect the gradient.
When drawn, the [0, 1] range of positions is mapped to the brush, in a brush-dependent way. For details, see
Gradient stops with a position outside the [0, 1] range cannot be seen explicitly, but they can still affect the colors produced in the [0, 1] range. For example, a two-stop gradient 0.0f, Black}, {2.0f, White is indistinguishable visually from 0.0f, Black}, {1.0f, Mid-level gray. Also, the colors are clamped before interpolation.
A value that indicates the relative position of the gradient stop in the brush. This value must be in the [0.0f, 1.0f] range if the gradient stop is to be seen explicitly.
The color of the gradient stop.
Contains the
Use this structure when you call the CreateHwndRenderTarget method to create a new
For convenience, Direct2D provides the D2D1::HwndRenderTargetProperties function for creating new
Describes image brush features.
The source rectangle in the image space from which the image will be tiled or interpolated.
The extend mode in the image x-axis.
The extend mode in the image y-axis.
The interpolation mode to use when scaling the image brush.
Represents a Bezier segment to be used in the creation of an
Represents a point, radius pair that makes up part of a
Defines the general pen tip shape and the transform used in an
Describes the options that transforms may set on input textures.
The type of filter to apply to the input texture.
The mip level to retrieve from the upstream transform, if specified.
A description of a single element to the vertex layout.
This structure is a subset of
If the D2D1_APPEND_ALIGNED_ELEMENT constant is used for alignedByteOffset, the elements will be packed contiguously for convenience.
The HLSL semantic associated with this element in a shader input-signature.
The semantic index for the element. A semantic index modifies a semantic, with an integer index number. A semantic index is only needed in a case where there is more than one element with the same semantic. For example, a 4x4 matrix would have four components each with the semantic name matrix; however, each of the four components would have different semantic indices (0, 1, 2, and 3).
The data type of the element data.
An integer value that identifies the input-assembler. Valid values are between 0 and 15.
The offset in bytes between each element.
Contains the content bounds, mask information, opacity settings, and other options for a layer resource.
The content bounds of the layer. Content outside these bounds is not guaranteed to render.
The geometric mask specifies the area of the layer that is composited into the render target.
A value that specifies the antialiasing mode for the geometricMask.
A value that specifies the transform that is applied to the geometric mask when composing the layer.
An opacity value that is applied uniformly to all resources in the layer when compositing to the target.
A brush that is used to modify the opacity of the layer. The brush is mapped to the layer, and the alpha channel of each mapped brush pixel is multiplied against the corresponding layer pixel.
A value that specifies whether the layer intends to render text with ClearType antialiasing.
Contains the content bounds, mask information, opacity settings, and other options for a layer resource.
The content bounds of the layer. Content outside these bounds is not guaranteed to render.
The geometric mask specifies the area of the layer that is composited into the render target.
A value that specifies the antialiasing mode for the geometricMask.
A value that specifies the transform that is applied to the geometric mask when composing the layer.
An opacity value that is applied uniformly to all resources in the layer when compositing to the target.
A brush that is used to modify the opacity of the layer. The brush is mapped to the layer, and the alpha channel of each mapped brush pixel is multiplied against the corresponding layer pixel.
Additional options for the layer creation.
Contains the starting point and endpoint of the gradient axis for an
Use this method when creating new
The following illustration shows how a linear gradient changes as you change its start and end points. For the first gradient, the start point is set to (0,0) and the end point to (150, 50); this creates a diagonal gradient that starts at the upper-left corner and extends to the lower-right corner of the area being painted. When you set the start point to (0, 25) and the end point to (150, 25), a horizontal gradient is created. Similarly, setting the start point to (75, 0) and the end point to (75, 50) creates a vertical gradient. Setting the start point to (0, 50) and the end point to (150, 0) creates a diagonal gradient that starts at the lower-left corner and extends to the upper-right corner of the area being painted.
Describes mapped memory from the
The mapped rectangle is used to map a rectangle into the caller's address space.
Contains the data format and alpha mode for a bitmap or render target.
For more information about the pixel formats and alpha modes supported by each render target, see Supported Pixel Formats and Alpha Modes.
A value that specifies the size and arrangement of channels in each pixel.
A value that specifies whether the alpha channel is using pre-multiplied alpha, straight alpha, whether it should be ignored and considered opaque, or whether it is unkown.
Describes a point on a path geometry.
The end point after walking the path.
A unit vector indicating the tangent point.
The index of the segment on which point resides. This index is global to the entire path, not just to a particular figure.
The index of the figure on which point resides.
The length of the section of the path stretching from the start of the path to the start of endSegment.
The creation properties for a
Defines a property binding to a pair of functions which get and set the corresponding property.
The propertyName is used to cross-correlate the property binding with the registration XML. The propertyName must be present in the XML call or the registration will fail. All properties must be bound.
The name of the property.
The function that will receive the data to set.
The function that will be asked to write the output data.
Contains the control point and end point for a quadratic Bezier segment.
The control point of the quadratic Bezier segment.
The end point of the quadratic Bezier segment.
Contains the gradient origin offset and the size and position of the gradient ellipse for an
Different values for center, gradientOriginOffset, radiusX and/or radiusY produce different gradients. The following illustration shows several radial gradients that have different gradient origin offsets, creating the appearance of the light illuminating the circles from different angles.
For convenience, Direct2D provides the D2D1::RadialGradientBrushProperties function for creating new D2D1_RADIAL_GRADIENT_BRUSH structures.
Describes limitations to be applied to an imaging effect renderer.
The renderer can allocate tiles larger than the minimum tile allocation. The allocated tiles will be powers of two of the minimum size on each axis, except that the size on each axis will not exceed the guaranteed maximum texture size for the device feature level.
The minimumPixelRenderExtent is the size of the square tile below which the renderer will expand the tile allocation rather than attempting to subdivide the rendering tile any further. When this threshold is reached, the allocation tile size is expanded. This might occur repeatedly until rendering can either proceed or it is determined that the graph cannot be rendered.
The buffer precision is used for intermediate buffers if it is otherwise unspecified by the effects or the internal effect topology. The application can also use the Output.BufferPrecision method to specify the output precision for a particular effect. This takes precedence over the context precision. In addition, the effect might set a different precision internally if required. If the buffer type on the context is
The buffer precision used by default if the buffer precision is not otherwise specified by the effect or the transform.
The tile allocation size to be used by the imaging effect renderer.
Contains rendering options (hardware or software), pixel format, DPI information, remoting options, and Direct3D support requirements for a render target.
Use this structure when creating a render target, or use it with the
As a convenience, Direct2D provides the D2D1::RenderTargetProperties helper function for creating
Not all render targets support hardware rendering. For a list, see the Render Targets Overview.
A value that specifies whether the render target should force hardware or software rendering. A value of
The pixel format and alpha mode of the render target. You can use the D2D1::PixelFormat function to create a pixel format that specifies that Direct2D should select the pixel format and alpha mode for you. For a list of pixel formats and alpha modes supported by each render target, see Supported Pixel Formats and Alpha Modes.
The horizontal DPI of the render target. To use the default DPI, set dpiX and dpiY to 0. For more information, see the Remarks section.
The vertical DPI of the render target. To use the default DPI, set dpiX and dpiY to 0. For more information, see the Remarks section.
A value that specifies how the render target is remoted and whether it should be GDI-compatible. Set to
A value that specifies the minimum Direct3D feature level required for hardware rendering. If the specified minimum level is not available, the render target uses software rendering if the type member is set to
Defines a resource texture when the original resource texture is created.
The extents of the resource table in each dimension.
The number of dimensions in the resource texture. This must be a number from 1 to 3.
The precision of the resource texture to create.
The number of channels in the resource texture.
The filtering mode to use on the texture.
Specifies how pixel values beyond the extent of the texture will be sampled, in every dimension.
Contains the dimensions and corner radii of a rounded rectangle.
Each corner of the rectangle specified by the rect is replaced with a quarter ellipse, with a radius in each direction specified by radiusX and radiusY.
If the radiusX is greater than or equal to half the width of the rectangle, and the radiusY is greater than or equal to one-half the height, the rounded rectangle is an ellipse with the same width and height of the rect.
Even when both radiuX and radiusY are zero, the rounded rectangle is different from a rectangle., When stroked, the corners of the rounded rectangle are roundly joined, not mitered (square).
The coordinates of the rectangle.
The x-radius for the quarter ellipse that is drawn to replace every corner of the rectangle.
The y-radius for the quarter ellipse that is drawn to replace every corner of the rectangle.
Creates a color context from a simple color profile. It is only valid to use this with the Color Management Effect in 'Best' mode.
The simple color profile to create the color context from.
The created color context.
Describes the stroke that outlines a shape.
The following illustration shows different dashOffset values for the same custom dash style.
The cap applied to the start of all the open figures in a stroked geometry.
The cap applied to the end of all the open figures in a stroked geometry.
The shape at either end of each dash segment.
A value that describes how segments are joined. This value is ignored for a vertex if the segment flags specify that the segment should have a smooth join.
The limit of the thickness of the join on a mitered corner. This value is always treated as though it is greater than or equal to 1.0f.
A value that specifies whether the stroke has a dash pattern and, if so, the dash style.
A value that specifies an offset in the dash sequence. A positive dash offset value shifts the dash pattern, in units of stroke width, toward the start of the stroked geometry. A negative dash offset value shifts the dash pattern, in units of stroke width, toward the end of the stroked geometry.
Describes the stroke that outlines a shape.
The cap to use at the start of each open figure.
The cap to use at the end of each open figure.
The cap to use at the start and end of each dash.
The line join to use.
The limit beyond which miters are either clamped or converted to bevels.
The type of dash to use.
The location of the first dash, relative to the start of the figure.
The rule that determines what render target properties affect the nib of the stroke.
A 3D vector that consists of three single-precision floating-point values (x, y, z).
The x value of the vector.
The y value of the vector.
A description of a single element to the vertex layout.
This structure is a subset of
If the D2D1_APPEND_ALIGNED_ELEMENT constant is used for alignedByteOffset, the elements will be packed contiguously for convenience.
The HLSL semantic associated with this element in a shader input-signature.
The semantic index for the element. A semantic index modifies a semantic, with an integer index number. A semantic index is only needed in a case where there is more than one element with the same semantic. For example, a 4x4 matrix would have four components each with the semantic name matrix; however, each of the four components would have different semantic indices (0, 1, 2, and 3).
The data type of the element data.
A 3D vector that consists of three single-precision floating-point values (x, y, z).
The x value of the vector.
The y value of the vector.
The z value of the vector.
Properties of a transformed image source.
The orientation at which the image source is drawn.
The horizontal scale factor at which the image source is drawn.
The vertical scale factor at which the image source is drawn.
The interpolation mode used when the image source is drawn. This is ignored if the image source is drawn using the DrawImage method, or using an image brush.
Image sourc option flags.
Contains the three vertices that describe a triangle.
The first vertex of a triangle.
The second vertex of a triangle.
The third vertex of a triangle.
Defines the properties of a vertex buffer that are standard for all vertex shader definitions.
If usage is dynamic, the system might return a system memory buffer and copy these vertices into the rendering vertex buffer for each element.
If the initialization data is not specified, the buffer will be uninitialized.
The number of inputs to the vertex shader.
Indicates how frequently the vertex buffer is likely to be updated.
The initial contents of the vertex buffer.
The size of the vertex buffer, in bytes.
Defines a range of vertices that are used when rendering less than the full contents of a vertex buffer.
The first vertex in the range to process.
The number of vertices to use.
Encapsulates a 32-bit device independent bitmap and device context, which can be used for rendering glyphs.
You create an
if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = g_pGdiInterop->CreateBitmapRenderTarget(hdc, r.right, r.bottom, &g_pBitmapRenderTarget); }
Draws a run of glyphs to a bitmap target at the specified position.
The horizontal position of the baseline origin, in DIPs, relative to the upper-left corner of the DIB.
The vertical position of the baseline origin, in DIPs, relative to the upper-left corner of the DIB.
The measuring method for glyphs in the run, used with the other properties to determine the rendering mode.
The structure containing the properties of the glyph run.
The object that controls rendering behavior.
The foreground color of the text.
The optional rectangle that receives the bounding box (in pixels not DIPs) of all the pixels affected by drawing the glyph run. The black box rectangle may extend beyond the dimensions of the bitmap.
If this method succeeds, it returns
You can use the
STDMETHODIMP GdiTextRenderer::DrawGlyphRun( __maybenull void* clientDrawingContext, FLOAT baselineOriginX, FLOAT baselineOriginY,measuringMode, __in const* glyphRun, __in const* glyphRunDescription, * clientDrawingEffect ) { hr = ; // Pass on the drawing call to the render target to do the real work. dirtyRect = {0}; hr = pRenderTarget_->DrawGlyphRun( baselineOriginX, baselineOriginY, measuringMode, glyphRun, pRenderingParams_, RGB(0,200,255), &dirtyRect ); return hr; }
The baselineOriginX, baslineOriginY, measuringMethod, and glyphRun parameters are provided (as arguments) when the callback method is invoked. The renderingParams, textColor and blackBoxRect are not.
Default rendering params can be retrieved by using the
STDMETHODIMP GdiTextRenderer::DrawGlyphRun( __maybenull void* clientDrawingContext, FLOAT baselineOriginX, FLOAT baselineOriginY, DWRITE_MEASURING_MODE measuringMode, __in DWRITE_GLYPH_RUN const* glyphRun, __in DWRITE_GLYPH_RUN_DESCRIPTION const* glyphRunDescription, IUnknown* clientDrawingEffect )
{ HRESULT hr = S_OK; // Pass on the drawing call to the render target to do the real work. RECT dirtyRect = {0}; hr = pRenderTarget_->DrawGlyphRun( baselineOriginX, baselineOriginY, measuringMode, glyphRun, pRenderingParams_, RGB(0,200,255), &dirtyRect ); return hr;
}
The baselineOriginX, baslineOriginY, measuringMethod, and glyphRun parameters are provided (as arguments) when the callback method is invoked. The renderingParams, textColor and blackBoxRect are not. Default rendering params can be retrieved by using the Gets a handle to the memory device context.
An application can use the device context to draw using GDI functions. An application can obtain the bitmap handle (
Note that this method takes no parameters and returns an
memoryHdc = g_pBitmapRenderTarget->GetMemoryDC();
The
Gets or sets the number of bitmap pixels per DIP.
A DIP (device-independent pixel) is 1/96 inch. Therefore, this value is the number if pixels per inch divided by 96.
Gets or sets the transform that maps abstract coordinates to DIPs. By default this is the identity transform. Note that this is unrelated to the world transform of the underlying device context.
Gets the dimensions of the target bitmap.
Draws a run of glyphs to a bitmap target at the specified position.
The horizontal position of the baseline origin, in DIPs, relative to the upper-left corner of the DIB.
The vertical position of the baseline origin, in DIPs, relative to the upper-left corner of the DIB.
The measuring method for glyphs in the run, used with the other properties to determine the rendering mode.
The structure containing the properties of the glyph run.
The object that controls rendering behavior.
The foreground color of the text.
The optional rectangle that receives the bounding box (in pixels not DIPs) of all the pixels affected by drawing the glyph run. The black box rectangle may extend beyond the dimensions of the bitmap.
If this method succeeds, it returns
You can use the
STDMETHODIMP GdiTextRenderer::DrawGlyphRun( __maybenull void* clientDrawingContext, FLOAT baselineOriginX, FLOAT baselineOriginY,measuringMode, __in const* glyphRun, __in const* glyphRunDescription, * clientDrawingEffect ) { hr = ; // Pass on the drawing call to the render target to do the real work. dirtyRect = {0}; hr = pRenderTarget_->DrawGlyphRun( baselineOriginX, baselineOriginY, measuringMode, glyphRun, pRenderingParams_, RGB(0,200,255), &dirtyRect ); return hr; }
The baselineOriginX, baslineOriginY, measuringMethod, and glyphRun parameters are provided (as arguments) when the callback method is invoked. The renderingParams, textColor and blackBoxRect are not.
Default rendering params can be retrieved by using the
Gets a handle to the memory device context.
Returns a device context handle to the memory device context.
An application can use the device context to draw using GDI functions. An application can obtain the bitmap handle (
Note that this method takes no parameters and returns an
memoryHdc = g_pBitmapRenderTarget->GetMemoryDC();
The
Gets the number of bitmap pixels per DIP.
The number of bitmap pixels per DIP.
A DIP (device-independent pixel) is 1/96 inch. Therefore, this value is the number if pixels per inch divided by 96.
Sets the number of bitmap pixels per DIP (device-independent pixel). A DIP is 1/96 inch, so this value is the number if pixels per inch divided by 96.
A value that specifies the number of pixels per DIP.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the transform that maps abstract coordinates to DIPs. By default this is the identity transform. Note that this is unrelated to the world transform of the underlying device context.
When this method returns, contains a transform matrix.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the transform that maps abstract coordinate to DIPs (device-independent pixel). This does not affect the world transform of the underlying device context.
Specifies the new transform. This parameter can be
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the dimensions of the target bitmap.
Returns the width and height of the bitmap in pixels.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Resizes the bitmap.
The new bitmap width, in pixels.
The new bitmap height, in pixels.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Used to create all subsequent DirectWrite objects. This interface is the root factory interface for all DirectWrite objects.
Create an
if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr =( , __uuidof( ), reinterpret_cast< **>(&pDWriteFactory_) ); }
An
Creates an object that is used for interoperability with GDI.
Gets an object which represents the set of installed fonts.
If this parameter is nonzero, the function performs an immediate check for changes to the set of installed fonts. If this parameter is
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the system font collection object, or
Creates a font collection using a custom font collection loader.
An application-defined font collection loader, which must have been previously registered using RegisterFontCollectionLoader.
The key used by the loader to identify a collection of font files. The buffer allocated for this key should at least be the size of collectionKeySize.
The size, in bytes, of the collection key.
Contains an address of a reference to the system font collection object if the method succeeds, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Registers a custom font collection loader with the factory object.
Pointer to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
This function registers a font collection loader with DirectWrite. The font collection loader interface, which should be implemented by a singleton object, handles enumerating font files in a font collection given a particular type of key. A given instance can only be registered once. Succeeding attempts will return an error, indicating that it has already been registered. Note that font file loader implementations must not register themselves with DirectWrite inside their constructors, and must not unregister themselves inside their destructors, because registration and unregistraton operations increment and decrement the object reference count respectively. Instead, registration and unregistration with DirectWrite of font file loaders should be performed outside of the font file loader implementation.
Unregisters a custom font collection loader that was previously registered using RegisterFontCollectionLoader.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a font file reference object from a local font file.
An array of characters that contains the absolute file path for the font file. Subsequent operations on the constructed object may fail if the user provided filePath doesn't correspond to a valid file on the disk.
The last modified time of the input file path. If the parameter is omitted, the function will access the font file to obtain its last write time. You should specify this value to avoid extra disk access. Subsequent operations on the constructed object may fail if the user provided lastWriteTime doesn't match the file on the disk.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created font file reference object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a reference to an application-specific font file resource.
A font file reference key that uniquely identifies the font file resource during the lifetime of fontFileLoader.
The size of the font file reference key in bytes.
The font file loader that will be used by the font system to load data from the file identified by fontFileReferenceKey.
Contains an address of a reference to the newly created font file object when this method succeeds, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
This function is provided for cases when an application or a document needs to use a private font without having to install it on the system. fontFileReferenceKey has to be unique only in the scope of the fontFileLoader used in this call.
Creates an object that represents a font face.
A value that indicates the type of file format of the font face.
The number of font files, in element count, required to represent the font face.
A font file object representing the font face. Because
The zero-based index of a font face, in cases when the font files contain a collection of font faces. If the font files contain a single face, this value should be zero.
A value that indicates which, if any, font face simulation flags for algorithmic means of making text bold or italic are applied to the current font face.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created font face object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an object that represents a font face.
A value that indicates the type of file format of the font face.
The number of font files, in element count, required to represent the font face.
A font file object representing the font face. Because
The zero-based index of a font face, in cases when the font files contain a collection of font faces. If the font files contain a single face, this value should be zero.
A value that indicates which, if any, font face simulation flags for algorithmic means of making text bold or italic are applied to the current font face.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created font face object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an object that represents a font face.
A value that indicates the type of file format of the font face.
The number of font files, in element count, required to represent the font face.
A font file object representing the font face. Because
The zero-based index of a font face, in cases when the font files contain a collection of font faces. If the font files contain a single face, this value should be zero.
A value that indicates which, if any, font face simulation flags for algorithmic means of making text bold or italic are applied to the current font face.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created font face object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a rendering parameters object with default settings for the primary monitor. Different monitors may have different rendering parameters, for more information see the How to Add Support for Multiple Monitors topic.
Standard
Creates a rendering parameters object with default settings for the specified monitor. In most cases, this is the preferred way to create a rendering parameters object.
A handle for the specified monitor.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the rendering parameters object created by this method.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a rendering parameters object with the specified properties.
The gamma level to be set for the new rendering parameters object.
The enhanced contrast level to be set for the new rendering parameters object.
The ClearType level to be set for the new rendering parameters object.
Represents the internal structure of a device pixel (that is, the physical arrangement of red, green, and blue color components) that is assumed for purposes of rendering text.
A value that represents the method (for example, ClearType natural quality) for rendering glyphs.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created rendering parameters object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Registers a font file loader with DirectWrite.
Pointer to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
This function registers a font file loader with DirectWrite. The font file loader interface, which should be implemented by a singleton object, handles loading font file resources of a particular type from a key. A given instance can only be registered once. Succeeding attempts will return an error, indicating that it has already been registered. Note that font file loader implementations must not register themselves with DirectWrite inside their constructors, and must not unregister themselves inside their destructors, because registration and unregistraton operations increment and decrement the object reference count respectively. Instead, registration and unregistration with DirectWrite of font file loaders should be performed outside of the font file loader implementation.
Unregisters a font file loader that was previously registered with the DirectWrite font system using RegisterFontFileLoader.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This function unregisters font file loader callbacks with the DirectWrite font system. You should implement the font file loader interface by a singleton object. Note that font file loader implementations must not register themselves with DirectWrite inside their constructors and must not unregister themselves in their destructors, because registration and unregistraton operations increment and decrement the object reference count respectively. Instead, registration and unregistration of font file loaders with DirectWrite should be performed outside of the font file loader implementation.
Creates a text format object used for text layout.
An array of characters that contains the name of the font family
A reference to a font collection object. When this is
A value that indicates the font weight for the text object created by this method.
A value that indicates the font style for the text object created by this method.
A value that indicates the font stretch for the text object created by this method.
The logical size of the font in DIP ("device-independent pixel") units. A DIP equals 1/96 inch.
An array of characters that contains the locale name.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to a newly created text format object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a typography object for use in a text layout.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a newly created typography object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an object that is used for interoperability with GDI.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to a GDI interop object if successful, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Takes a string, text format, and associated constraints, and produces an object that represents the fully analyzed and formatted result.
An array of characters that contains the string to create a new
The number of characters in the string.
A reference to an object that indicates the format to apply to the string.
The width of the layout box.
The height of the layout box.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the resultant text layout object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Takes a string, format, and associated constraints, and produces an object representing the result, formatted for a particular display resolution and measuring mode.
An array of characters that contains the string to create a new
The length of the string, in character count.
The text formatting object to apply to the string.
The width of the layout box.
The height of the layout box.
The number of physical pixels per DIP (device independent pixel). For example, if rendering onto a 96 DPI device pixelsPerDip is 1. If rendering onto a 120 DPI device pixelsPerDip is 1.25 (120/96).
An optional transform applied to the glyphs and their positions. This transform is applied after the scaling specifies the font size and pixels per DIP.
Instructs the text layout to use the same metrics as GDI bi-level text when set to
When this method returns, contains an address to the reference of the resultant text layout object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The resulting text layout should only be used for the intended resolution, and for cases where text scalability is desired CreateTextLayout should be used instead.
Creates an inline object for trimming, using an ellipsis as the omission sign.
A text format object, created with CreateTextFormat, used for text layout.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the omission (that is, ellipsis trimming) sign created by this method.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The ellipsis will be created using the current settings of the format, including base font, style, and any effects. Alternate omission signs can be created by the application by implementing
Returns an interface for performing text analysis.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created text analyzer object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a number substitution object using a locale name, substitution method, and an indicator whether to ignore user overrides (use NLS defaults for the given culture instead).
A value that specifies how to apply number substitution on digits and related punctuation.
The name of the locale to be used in the numberSubstitution object.
A Boolean flag that indicates whether to ignore user overrides.
When this method returns, contains an address to a reference to the number substitution object created by this method.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a glyph run analysis object, which encapsulates information used to render a glyph run.
A structure that contains the properties of the glyph run (font face, advances, and so on).
Number of physical pixels per DIP (device independent pixel). For example, if rendering onto a 96 DPI bitmap then pixelsPerDip is 1. If rendering onto a 120 DPI bitmap then pixelsPerDip is 1.25.
Optional transform applied to the glyphs and their positions. This transform is applied after the scaling specified the emSize and pixelsPerDip.
A value that specifies the rendering mode, which must be one of the raster rendering modes (that is, not default and not outline).
Specifies the measuring mode to use with glyphs.
The horizontal position (X-coordinate) of the baseline origin, in DIPs.
Vertical position (Y-coordinate) of the baseline origin, in DIPs.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created glyph run analysis object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The glyph run analysis object contains the results of analyzing the glyph run, including the positions of all the glyphs and references to all of the rasterized glyphs in the font cache.
Creates a rendering parameters object with the specified properties.
The root factory interface for all DirectWrite objects.
Gets a font collection representing the set of EUDC (end-user defined characters) fonts.
The font collection to fill.
Whether to check for updates.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Note that if no EUDC is set on the system, the returned collection will be empty, meaning it will return success but GetFontFamilyCount will be zero.
Creates a rendering parameters object with the specified properties.
The gamma level to be set for the new rendering parameters object.
The enhanced contrast level to be set for the new rendering parameters object.
The amount of contrast enhancement to use for grayscale antialiasing, zero or greater.
The ClearType level to be set for the new rendering parameters object.
Represents the internal structure of a device pixel (that is, the physical arrangement of red, green, and blue color components) that is assumed for purposes of rendering text.
A value that represents the method (for example, ClearType natural quality) for rendering glyphs.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created rendering parameters object.
Standard
An object that encapsulates a set of fonts, such as the set of fonts installed on the system, or the set of fonts in a particular directory. The font collection API can be used to discover what font families and fonts are available, and to obtain some metadata about the fonts.
The
* pFontCollection = null ; // Get the system font collection. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pDWriteFactory->GetSystemFontCollection(&pFontCollection); }
To determine what fonts are available on the system, get a reference to the system font collection. You can then use the
#include <dwrite.h> #include <string.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <new> // SafeRelease inline function. template <class T> inline void SafeRelease(T **ppT) { if (*ppT) { (*ppT)->Release(); *ppT =null ; } } void wmain() {* pDWriteFactory = null ;hr = ( , __uuidof( ), reinterpret_cast< **>(&pDWriteFactory) ); * pFontCollection = null ; // Get the system font collection. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pDWriteFactory->GetSystemFontCollection(&pFontCollection); } UINT32 familyCount = 0; // Get the number of font families in the collection. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { familyCount = pFontCollection->GetFontFamilyCount(); } for (UINT32 i = 0; i < familyCount; ++i) {* pFontFamily = null ; // Get the font family. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFontCollection->GetFontFamily(i, &pFontFamily); }* pFamilyNames = null ; // Get a list of localized strings for the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFontFamily->GetFamilyNames(&pFamilyNames); } UINT32 index = 0;exists = false; wchar_t localeName[LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { // Get the default locale for this user. int defaultLocaleSuccess = GetUserDefaultLocaleName(localeName, LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH); // If the default locale is returned, find that locale name, otherwise use "en-us". if (defaultLocaleSuccess) { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(localeName, &index, &exists); } if (SUCCEEDED(hr) && !exists) // if the above find did not find a match, retry with US English { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(L"en-us", &index, &exists); } } // If the specified locale doesn't exist, select the first on the list. if (!exists) index = 0; UINT32 length = 0; // Get the string length. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetStringLength(index, &length); } // Allocate a string big enough to hold the name. wchar_t* name = new (std::nothrow) wchar_t[length+1]; if (name == null ) { hr = E_OUTOFMEMORY; } // Get the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetString(index, name, length+1); } if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { // Print out the family name. wprintf(L"%s\n", name); } SafeRelease(&pFontFamily); SafeRelease(&pFamilyNames); delete [] name; } SafeRelease(&pFontCollection); SafeRelease(&pDWriteFactory); }
Gets the number of font families in the collection.
Gets the number of font families in the collection.
The number of font families in the collection.
Creates a font family object given a zero-based font family index.
Zero-based index of the font family.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the newly created font family object.
Finds the font family with the specified family name.
An array of characters, which is null-terminated, containing the name of the font family. The name is not case-sensitive but must otherwise exactly match a family name in the collection.
When this method returns, contains the zero-based index of the matching font family if the family name was found; otherwise, UINT_MAX.
When this method returns, TRUE if the family name exists; otherwise,
Gets the font object that corresponds to the same physical font as the specified font face object. The specified physical font must belong to the font collection.
A font face object that specifies the physical font.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the newly created font object if successful; otherwise,
Used to construct a collection of fonts given a particular type of key.
The font collection loader interface is recommended to be implemented by a singleton object. Note that font collection loader implementations must not register themselves with DirectWrite factory inside their constructors and must not unregister themselves in their destructors, because registration and unregistraton operations increment and decrement the object reference count respectively. Instead, registration and unregistration of font file loaders with DirectWrite factory should be performed outside of the font file loader implementation as a separate step.
Represents an absolute reference to a font face which contains font face type, appropriate file references, face identification data and various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines.
Obtains the file format type of a font face.
Obtains the index of a font face in the context of its font files.
Obtains the algorithmic style simulation flags of a font face.
Determines whether the font is a symbol font.
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a font face and are used by applications for layout calculations.
Obtains the number of glyphs in the font face.
Obtains the file format type of a font face.
A value that indicates the type of format for the font face (such as Type 1, TrueType, vector, or bitmap).
Obtains the font files representing a font face.
If fontFiles is
When this method returns, contains a reference to a user-provided array that stores references to font files representing the font face. This parameter can be
If this method succeeds, it returns
The
Then, call the method a second time, passing the numberOfFiles value that was output the first call, and a non-null buffer of the correct size to store the
Obtains the index of a font face in the context of its font files.
The zero-based index of a font face in cases when the font files contain a collection of font faces. If the font files contain a single face, this value is zero.
Obtains the algorithmic style simulation flags of a font face.
Font face simulation flags for algorithmic means of making text bold or italic.
Determines whether the font is a symbol font.
Returns TRUE if the font is a symbol font, otherwise
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a font face and are used by applications for layout calculations.
When this method returns, a?
Obtains the number of glyphs in the font face.
The number of glyphs in the font face.
Obtains ideal (resolution-independent) glyph metrics in font design units.
An array of glyph indices for which to compute metrics. The array must contain at least as many elements as specified by glyphCount.
The number of elements in the glyphIndices array.
When this method returns, contains an array of
Indicates whether the font is being used in a sideways run. This can affect the glyph metrics if the font has oblique simulation because sideways oblique simulation differs from non-sideways oblique simulation
If this method succeeds, it returns
Design glyph metrics are used for glyph positioning.
Returns the nominal mapping of UCS4 Unicode code points to glyph indices as defined by the font 'CMAP' table.
An array of USC4 code points from which to obtain nominal glyph indices. The array must be allocated and be able to contain the number of elements specified by codePointCount.
The number of elements in the codePoints array.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array of nominal glyph indices filled by this function.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Note that this mapping is primarily provided for line layout engines built on top of the physical font API. Because of OpenType glyph substitution and line layout character substitution, the nominal conversion does not always correspond to how a Unicode string will map to glyph indices when rendering using a particular font face. Also, note that Unicode variant selectors provide for alternate mappings for character to glyph. This call will always return the default variant.
When characters are not present in the font this method returns the index 0, which is the undefined glyph or ".notdef" glyph. If a character isn't in a font,
Finds the specified OpenType font table if it exists and returns a reference to it. The function accesses the underlying font data through the
If this method succeeds, it returns
The context for the same tag may be different for each call, so each one must be held and released separately.
Releases the table obtained earlier from TryGetFontTable.
Computes the outline of a run of glyphs by calling back to the outline sink interface.
The logical size of the font in DIP units. A DIP ("device-independent pixel") equals 1/96 inch.
An array of glyph indices. The glyphs are in logical order and the advance direction depends on the isRightToLeft parameter. The array must be allocated and be able to contain the number of elements specified by glyphCount.
An optional array of glyph advances in DIPs. The advance of a glyph is the amount to advance the position (in the direction of the baseline) after drawing the glyph. glyphAdvances contains the number of elements specified by glyphCount.
An optional array of glyph offsets, each of which specifies the offset along the baseline and offset perpendicular to the baseline of a glyph relative to the current pen position. glyphOffsets contains the number of elements specified by glyphCount.
The number of glyphs in the run.
If TRUE, the ascender of the glyph runs alongside the baseline. If
A client can render a vertical run by setting isSideways to TRUE and rotating the resulting geometry 90 degrees to the right using a transform. The isSideways and isRightToLeft parameters cannot both be true.
The visual order of the glyphs. If this parameter is
A reference to the interface that is called back to perform outline drawing operations.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Determines the recommended rendering mode for the font, using the specified size and rendering parameters.
The logical size of the font in DIP units. A DIP ("device-independent pixel") equals 1/96 inch.
The number of physical pixels per DIP. For example, if the DPI of the rendering surface is 96, this value is 1.0f. If the DPI is 120, this value is 120.0f/96.
The measuring method that will be used for glyphs in the font. Renderer implementations may choose different rendering modes for different measuring methods, for example:
A reference to an object that contains rendering settings such as gamma level, enhanced contrast, and ClearType level. This parameter is necessary in case the rendering parameters object overrides the rendering mode.
When this method returns, contains a value that indicates the recommended rendering mode to use.
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a fontface and are used by applications for layout calculations.
The logical size of the font in DIP units.
The number of physical pixels per DIP.
An optional transform applied to the glyphs and their positions. This transform is applied after the scaling specified by the font size and pixelsPerDip.
A reference to a DWRITE_FONT_METRICS structure to fill in. The metrics returned by this function are in font design units.
Obtains glyph metrics in font design units with the return values compatible with what GDI would produce.
The ogical size of the font in DIP units.
The number of physical pixels per DIP.
An optional transform applied to the glyphs and their positions. This transform is applied after the scaling specified by the font size and pixelsPerDip.
When set to
An array of glyph indices for which to compute the metrics.
The number of elements in the glyphIndices array.
An array of
A
Standard
Allows you to access fallback fonts from the font list.
The
Determines an appropriate font to use to render the beginning range of text.
The text source implementation holds the text and locale.
Starting position to analyze.
Length of the text to analyze.
Default font collection to use.
Family name of the base font. If you pass null, no matching will be done against the family.
The desired weight.
The desired style.
The desired stretch.
Length of text mapped to the mapped font. This will always be less than or equal to the text length and greater than zero (if the text length is non-zero) so the caller advances at least one character.
The font that should be used to render the first mappedLength characters of the text. If it returns
Scale factor to multiply the em size of the returned font by.
Determines an appropriate font to use to render the beginning range of text.
The text source implementation holds the text and locale.
Starting position to analyze.
Length of the text to analyze.
Default font collection to use.
Family name of the base font. If you pass null, no matching will be done against the family.
The desired weight.
The desired style.
The desired stretch.
Length of text mapped to the mapped font. This will always be less than or equal to the text length and greater than zero (if the text length is non-zero) so the caller advances at least one character.
The font that should be used to render the first mappedLength characters of the text. If it returns
Scale factor to multiply the em size of the returned font by.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Specifies properties used to identify and execute typographic features in the current font face.
A non-zero value generally enables the feature execution, while the zero value disables it. A feature requiring a selector uses this value to indicate the selector index.
The OpenType standard provides access to typographic features available in the font by means of a feature tag with the associated parameters. The OpenType feature tag is a 4-byte identifier of the registered name of a feature. For example, the 'kern' feature name tag is used to identify the 'Kerning' feature in OpenType font. Similarly, the OpenType feature tag for 'Standard Ligatures' and 'Fractions' is 'liga' and 'frac' respectively. Since a single run can be associated with more than one typographic features, the Text String API accepts typographic settings for a run as a list of features and are executed in the order they are specified.
The value of the tag member represents the OpenType name tag of the feature, while the param value represents additional parameter for the execution of the feature referred by the tag member. Both nameTag and parameter are stored as little endian, the same convention followed by GDI. Most features treat the Param value as a binary value that indicates whether to turn the execution of the feature on or off, with it being off by default in the majority of cases. Some features, however, treat this value as an integral value representing the integer index to the list of alternate results it may produce during the execution; for instance, the feature 'Stylistic Alternates' or 'salt' uses the parameter value as an index to the list of alternate substituting glyphs it could produce for a specified glyph.
The feature OpenType name identifier.
The execution parameter of the feature.
Represents a font file. Applications such as font managers or font viewers can call
Obtains the reference to the reference key of a font file. The returned reference is valid until the font file object is released.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the font file reference key. Note that the reference value is only valid until the font file object it is obtained from is released. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
When this method returns, contains the size of the font file reference key in bytes. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Obtains the file loader associated with a font file object.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the font file loader associated with the font file object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Analyzes a file and returns whether it represents a font, and whether the font type is supported by the font system.
TRUE if the font type is supported by the font system; otherwise,
When this method returns, contains a value that indicates the type of the font file. Note that even if isSupportedFontType is
When this method returns, contains a value that indicates the type of the font face. If fontFileType is not equal to
When this method returns, contains the number of font faces contained in the font file.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Advances to the next font file in the collection. When it is first created, the enumerator is positioned before the first element of the collection and the first call to MoveNext advances to the first file.
Handles loading font file resources of a particular type from a font file reference key into a font file stream object.
The font file loader interface is recommended to be implemented by a singleton object. Note that font file loader implementations must not register themselves with DirectWrite factory inside their constructors and must not unregister themselves in their destructors, because registration and unregistraton operations increment and decrement the object reference count respectively. Instead, registration and unregistration of font file loaders with DirectWrite factory should be performed outside of the font file loader implementation as a separate step.
Handles loading font file resources of a particular type from a font file reference key into a font file stream object.
The font file loader interface is recommended to be implemented by a singleton object. Note that font file loader implementations must not register themselves with DirectWrite factory inside their constructors and must not unregister themselves in their destructors, because registration and unregistraton operations increment and decrement the object reference count respectively. Instead, registration and unregistration of font file loaders with DirectWrite factory should be performed outside of the font file loader implementation as a separate step.
Creates a font file stream object that encapsulates an open file resource.
A reference to a font file reference key that uniquely identifies the font file resource within the scope of the font loader being used. The buffer allocated for this key must at least be the size, in bytes, specified by fontFileReferenceKeySize.
The size of font file reference key, in bytes.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the newly created
If this method succeeds, it returns
The resource is closed when the last reference to fontFileStream is released.
Reads a fragment from a font file.
Note that ReadFileFragment implementations must check whether the requested font file fragment is within the file bounds. Otherwise, an error should be returned from ReadFileFragment.
DirectWrite may invoke
Reads a fragment from a font file.
Note that ReadFileFragment implementations must check whether the requested font file fragment is within the file bounds. Otherwise, an error should be returned from ReadFileFragment.
DirectWrite may invoke
Reads a fragment from a font file.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the start of the font file fragment. This parameter is passed uninitialized.
The offset of the fragment, in bytes, from the beginning of the font file.
The size of the file fragment, in bytes.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to a reference to the client-defined context to be passed to ReleaseFileFragment.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Note that ReadFileFragment implementations must check whether the requested font file fragment is within the file bounds. Otherwise, an error should be returned from ReadFileFragment.
DirectWrite may invoke
Releases a fragment from a file.
A reference to the client-defined context of a font fragment returned from ReadFileFragment.
Obtains the total size of a file.
When this method returns, contains the total size of the file.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Implementing GetFileSize() for asynchronously loaded font files may require downloading the complete file contents. Therefore, this method should be used only for operations that either require a complete font file to be loaded (for example, copying a font file) or that need to make decisions based on the value of the file size (for example, validation against a persisted file size).
Obtains the last modified time of the file.
When this method returns, contains the last modified time of the file in the format that represents the number of 100-nanosecond intervals since January 1, 1601 (UTC).
If this method succeeds, it returns
The "last modified time" is used by DirectWrite font selection algorithms to determine whether one font resource is more up to date than another one.
Provides interoperability with GDI, such as methods to convert a font face to a
Creates a font object that matches the properties specified by the
A structure containing a GDI-compatible font description.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to a newly created
If this method succeeds, it returns
Initializes a
An
When this method returns, contains a structure that receives a GDI-compatible font description.
When this method returns, contains TRUE if the specified font object is part of the system font collection; otherwise,
If this method succeeds, it returns
The conversion to a
Initializes a
An
When this method returns, contains a reference to a structure that receives a GDI-compatible font description.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The conversion to a
Creates an
A handle to a device context into which a font has been selected. It is assumed that the client has already performed font mapping and that the font selected into the device context is the actual font to be used for rendering glyphs.
Contains an address of a reference to the newly created font face object, or
This function is intended for scenarios in which an application wants to use GDI and Uniscribe 1.x for text layout and shaping, but DirectWrite for final rendering. This function assumes the client is performing text output using glyph indexes.
Creates an object that encapsulates a bitmap and memory DC (device context) which can be used for rendering glyphs.
A handle to the optional device context used to create a compatible memory DC (device context).
The width of the bitmap render target.
The height of the bitmap render target.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created
Contains the information needed by renderers to draw glyph runs. All coordinates are in device independent pixels (DIPs).
The physical font face object to draw with.
The logical size of the font in DIPs (equals 1/96 inch), not points.
The number of glyphs in the glyph run.
A reference to an array of indices to render for the glyph run.
A reference to an array containing glyph advance widths for the glyph run.
A reference to an array containing glyph offsets for the glyph run.
If true, specifies that glyphs are rotated 90 degrees to the left and vertical metrics are used. Vertical writing is achieved by specifying isSideways = true and rotating the entire run 90 degrees to the right via a rotate transform.
The implicit resolved bidi level of the run. Odd levels indicate right-to-left languages like Hebrew and Arabic, while even levels indicate left-to-right languages like English and Japanese (when written horizontally). For right-to-left languages, the text origin is on the right, and text should be drawn to the left.
Contains low-level information used to render a glyph run.
The alpha texture can be a bi-level alpha texture or a ClearType alpha texture.
A bi-level alpha texture contains one byte per pixel, therefore the size of the buffer for a bi-level texture will be the area of the texture bounds, in bytes. Each byte in a bi-level alpha texture created by CreateAlphaTexture is either set to DWRITE_ALPHA_MAX (that is, 255) or zero.
A ClearType alpha texture contains three bytes per pixel, therefore the size of the buffer for a ClearType alpha texture is three times the area of the texture bounds, in bytes.
Gets the bounding rectangle of the physical pixels affected by the glyph run.
Specifies the type of texture requested. If a bi-level texture is requested, the bounding rectangle includes only bi-level glyphs. Otherwise, the bounding rectangle includes only antialiased glyphs.
When this method returns, contains the bounding rectangle of the physical pixels affected by the glyph run, or an empty rectangle if there are no glyphs of the specified texture type.
Creates an alpha texture of the specified type for glyphs within a specified bounding rectangle.
A value that specifies the type of texture requested. This can be DWRITE_TEXTURE_BILEVEL_1x1 or
The bounding rectangle of the texture, which can be different than the bounding rectangle returned by GetAlphaTextureBounds.
When this method returns, contains the array of alpha values from the texture. The buffer allocated for this array must be at least the size of bufferSize.
The size of the alphaValues array, in bytes. The minimum size depends on the dimensions of the rectangle and the type of texture requested.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets alpha blending properties required for ClearType blending.
An object that specifies the ClearType level and enhanced contrast, gamma, pixel geometry, and rendering mode. In most cases, the values returned by the output parameters of this method are based on the properties of this object, unless a GDI-compatible rendering mode was specified.
When this method returns, contains the gamma value to use for gamma correction.
When this method returns, contains the enhanced contrast value to be used for blending.
When this method returns, contains the ClearType level used in the alpha blending.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Contains additional properties related to those in
Wraps an application-defined inline graphic, allowing DWrite to query metrics as if the graphic were a glyph inline with the text.
Wraps an application-defined inline graphic, allowing DWrite to query metrics as if the graphic were a glyph inline with the text.
The application implemented rendering callback (
If this method succeeds, it returns
If this method succeeds, it returns
The overhangs should be returned relative to the reported size of the object (see
If this method succeeds, it returns
Layout uses this to determine the line-breaking behavior of the inline object among the text.
When this method returns, contains a value which indicates the line-breaking condition between the object and the content immediately preceding it.
When this method returns, contains a value which indicates the line-breaking condition between the object and the content immediately following it.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Line breakpoint characteristics of a character.
Indicates a breaking condition before the character.
Indicates a breaking condition after the character.
Indicates that the character is some form of whitespace, which may be meaningful for justification.
Indicates that the character is a soft hyphen, often used to indicate hyphenation points inside words.
Reserved for future use.
A built-in implementation of the
Obtains the absolute font file path from the font file reference key.
The font file reference key that uniquely identifies the local font file within the scope of the font loader being used.
If this method succeeds, the absolute font file path from the font file reference key.
Obtains the last write time of the file from the font file reference key.
The font file reference key that uniquely identifies the local font file within the scope of the font loader being used.
The time of the last font file modification.
Obtains the length of the absolute file path from the font file reference key.
Font file reference key that uniquely identifies the local font file within the scope of the font loader being used.
Size of font file reference key in bytes.
Length of the file path string, not including the terminated
Obtains the absolute font file path from the font file reference key.
The font file reference key that uniquely identifies the local font file within the scope of the font loader being used.
The size of font file reference key in bytes.
The character array that receives the local file path.
The length of the file path character array.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Obtains the last write time of the file from the font file reference key.
The font file reference key that uniquely identifies the local font file within the scope of the font loader being used.
The size of font file reference key in bytes.
The time of the last font file modification.
Represents a collection of strings indexed by locale name.
The set of strings represented by an
A common use for the
* pFamilyNames = null ; // Get a list of localized strings for the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFontFamily->GetFamilyNames(&pFamilyNames); } UINT32 index = 0;exists = false; wchar_t localeName[LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { // Get the default locale for this user. int defaultLocaleSuccess = GetUserDefaultLocaleName(localeName, LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH); // If the default locale is returned, find that locale name, otherwise use "en-us". if (defaultLocaleSuccess) { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(localeName, &index, &exists); } if (SUCCEEDED(hr) && !exists) // if the above find did not find a match, retry with US English { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(L"en-us", &index, &exists); } } // If the specified locale doesn't exist, select the first on the list. if (!exists) index = 0; UINT32 length = 0; // Get the string length. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetStringLength(index, &length); } // Allocate a string big enough to hold the name. wchar_t* name = new (std::nothrow) wchar_t[length+1]; if (name == null ) { hr = E_OUTOFMEMORY; } // Get the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetString(index, name, length+1); }
Gets the number of language/string pairs.
Gets the number of language/string pairs.
The number of language/string pairs.
Gets the zero-based index of the locale name/string pair with the specified locale name.
A null-terminated array of characters containing the locale name to look for.
The zero-based index of the locale name/string pair. This method initializes index to UINT_MAX.
When this method returns, contains TRUE if the locale name exists; otherwise,
Note that if the locale name does not exist, the return value is a success and the exists parameter is
UINT32 index = 0;exists = false; wchar_t localeName[LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { // Get the default locale for this user. int defaultLocaleSuccess = GetUserDefaultLocaleName(localeName, LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH); // If the default locale is returned, find that locale name, otherwise use "en-us". if (defaultLocaleSuccess) { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(localeName, &index, &exists); } if (SUCCEEDED(hr) && !exists) // if the above find did not find a match, retry with US English { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(L"en-us", &index, &exists); } } // If the specified locale doesn't exist, select the first on the list. if (!exists) index = 0;
Gets the length in characters (not including the null terminator) of the locale name with the specified index.
Zero-based index of the locale name to be retrieved.
When this method returns, contains the length in characters of the locale name, not including the null terminator.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Copies the locale name with the specified index to the specified array.
Zero-based index of the locale name to be retrieved.
When this method returns, contains a character array, which is null-terminated, that receives the locale name from the language/string pair. The buffer allocated for this array must be at least the size of size, in element count.
The size of the array in characters. The size must include space for the terminating null character.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the length in characters (not including the null terminator) of the string with the specified index.
A zero-based index of the language/string pair.
The length in characters of the string, not including the null terminator, from the language/string pair.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Use GetStringLength to get the string length before calling the
UINT32 length = 0; // Get the string length. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetStringLength(index, &length); } // Allocate a string big enough to hold the name. wchar_t* name = new (std::nothrow) wchar_t[length+1]; if (name ==null ) { hr = E_OUTOFMEMORY; } // Get the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetString(index, name, length+1); }
Copies the string with the specified index to the specified array.
The zero-based index of the language/string pair to be examined.
The null terminated array of characters that receives the string from the language/string pair. The buffer allocated for this array should be at least the size of size. GetStringLength can be used to get the size of the array before using this method.
The size of the array in characters. The size must include space for the terminating null character. GetStringLength can be used to get the size of the array before using this method.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The string returned must be allocated by the caller. You can get the size of the string by using the GetStringLength method prior to calling GetString, as shown in the following example.
UINT32 length = 0; // Get the string length. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetStringLength(index, &length); } // Allocate a string big enough to hold the name. wchar_t* name = new (std::nothrow) wchar_t[length+1]; if (name ==null ) { hr = E_OUTOFMEMORY; } // Get the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetString(index, name, length+1); }
Holds the appropriate digits and numeric punctuation for a specified locale.
Defines the pixel snapping properties such as pixels per DIP(device-independent pixel) and the current transform matrix of a text renderer.
Represents text rendering settings such as ClearType level, enhanced contrast, and gamma correction for glyph rasterization and filtering.
An application typically obtains a rendering parameters object by calling the
Gets the gamma value used for gamma correction. Valid values must be greater than zero and cannot exceed 256.
The gamma value is used for gamma correction, which compensates for the non-linear luminosity response of most monitors.
Gets the enhanced contrast property of the rendering parameters object. Valid values are greater than or equal to zero.
Enhanced contrast is the amount to increase the darkness of text, and typically ranges from 0 to 1. Zero means no contrast enhancement.
Gets the ClearType level of the rendering parameters object.
The ClearType level represents the amount of ClearType ? that is, the degree to which the red, green, and blue subpixels of each pixel are treated differently. Valid values range from zero (meaning no ClearType, which is equivalent to grayscale anti-aliasing) to one (meaning full ClearType)
Gets the pixel geometry of the rendering parameters object.
Gets the rendering mode of the rendering parameters object.
By default, the rendering mode is initialized to
Gets the gamma value used for gamma correction. Valid values must be greater than zero and cannot exceed 256.
Returns the gamma value used for gamma correction. Valid values must be greater than zero and cannot exceed 256.
The gamma value is used for gamma correction, which compensates for the non-linear luminosity response of most monitors.
Gets the enhanced contrast property of the rendering parameters object. Valid values are greater than or equal to zero.
Returns the amount of contrast enhancement. Valid values are greater than or equal to zero.
Enhanced contrast is the amount to increase the darkness of text, and typically ranges from 0 to 1. Zero means no contrast enhancement.
Gets the ClearType level of the rendering parameters object.
The ClearType level of the rendering parameters object.
The ClearType level represents the amount of ClearType ? that is, the degree to which the red, green, and blue subpixels of each pixel are treated differently. Valid values range from zero (meaning no ClearType, which is equivalent to grayscale anti-aliasing) to one (meaning full ClearType)
Gets the pixel geometry of the rendering parameters object.
A value that indicates the type of pixel geometry used in the rendering parameters object.
Gets the rendering mode of the rendering parameters object.
A value that indicates the rendering mode of the rendering parameters object.
By default, the rendering mode is initialized to
Contains shaping output properties for an output glyph.
Indicates that the glyph has justification applied.
Indicates that the glyph is the start of a cluster.
Indicates that the glyph is a diacritic mark.
Indicates that the glyph is a word boundary with no visible space.
Reserved for future use.
This interface is implemented by the text analyzer's client to receive the output of a given text analysis.
The text analyzer disregards any current state of the analysis sink, therefore, a Set method call on a range overwrites the previously set analysis result of the same range.
The interface you implement to receive the output of the text analyzers.
The text analyzer calls back to this to report the actual orientation of each character for shaping and drawing.
The starting position to report from.
Number of UTF-16 units of the reported range.
A
The adjusted bidi level to be used by the client layout for reordering runs. This will differ from the resolved bidi level retrieved from the source for cases such as Arabic stacked top-to-bottom, where the glyphs are still shaped as RTL, but the runs are TTB along with any CJK or Latin.
Whether the glyphs are rotated on their side, which is the default case for CJK and the case stacked Latin
Whether the script should be shaped as right-to-left. For Arabic stacked top-to-bottom, even when the adjusted bidi level is coerced to an even level, this will still be true.
Returns a successful code or an error code to abort analysis.
Implemented by the text analyzer's client to provide text to the analyzer. It allows the separation between the logical view of text as a continuous stream of characters identifiable by unique text positions, and the actual memory layout of potentially discrete blocks of text in the client's backing store.
If any of these callbacks returns an error, then the analysis functions will stop prematurely and return a callback error. Note that rather than return E_NOTIMPL, an application should stub the method and return a constant/null and
The interface you implement to provide needed information to the text analyzer, like the text and associated text properties.
Note?? If any of these callbacks return an error, the analysis functions will stop prematurely and return a callback error.?
Used by the text analyzer to obtain the desired glyph orientation and resolved bidi level.
The text position.
A reference to the text length.
A
A reference to the resolved bidi level.
Returning an error will abort the analysis.
The text analyzer calls back to this to get the desired glyph orientation and resolved bidi level, which it uses along with the script properties of the text to determine the actual orientation of each character, which it reports back to the client via the sink SetGlyphOrientation method.
Analyzes various text properties for complex script processing such as bidirectional (bidi) support for languages like Arabic, determination of line break opportunities, glyph placement, and number substitution.
Analyzes a text range for script boundaries, reading text attributes from the source and reporting the Unicode script ID to the sink callback SetScript.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Analyzes a text range for script directionality, reading attributes from the source and reporting levels to the sink callback SetBidiLevel.
If this method succeeds, it returns
While the function can handle multiple paragraphs, the text range should not arbitrarily split the middle of paragraphs. Otherwise, the returned levels may be wrong, because the Bidi algorithm is meant to apply to the paragraph as a whole.
Analyzes a text range for spans where number substitution is applicable, reading attributes from the source and reporting substitutable ranges to the sink callback SetNumberSubstitution.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Although the function can handle multiple ranges of differing number substitutions, the text ranges should not arbitrarily split the middle of numbers. Otherwise, it will treat the numbers separately and will not translate any intervening punctuation.
Analyzes a text range for potential breakpoint opportunities, reading attributes from the source and reporting breakpoint opportunities to the sink callback SetLineBreakpoints.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Although the function can handle multiple paragraphs, the text range should not arbitrarily split the middle of paragraphs, unless the specified text span is considered a whole unit. Otherwise, the returned properties for the first and last characters will inappropriately allow breaks.
Parses the input text string and maps it to the set of glyphs and associated glyph data according to the font and the writing system's rendering rules.
An array of characters to convert to glyphs.
The length of textString.
The font face that is the source of the output glyphs.
A Boolean flag set to TRUE if the text is intended to be drawn vertically.
A Boolean flag set to TRUE for right-to-left text.
A reference to a Script analysis result from an AnalyzeScript call.
The locale to use when selecting glyphs. For example the same character may map to different glyphs for ja-jp versus zh-chs. If this is
A reference to an optional number substitution which selects the appropriate glyphs for digits and related numeric characters, depending on the results obtained from AnalyzeNumberSubstitution. Passing
An array of references to the sets of typographic features to use in each feature range.
The length of each feature range, in characters. The sum of all lengths should be equal to textLength.
The number of feature ranges.
The maximum number of glyphs that can be returned.
When this method returns, contains the mapping from character ranges to glyph ranges.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array of structures that contains shaping properties for each character.
The output glyph indices.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array of structures that contain shaping properties for each output glyph.
When this method returns, contains the actual number of glyphs returned if the call succeeds.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Note that the mapping from characters to glyphs is, in general, many-to-many. The recommended estimate for the per-glyph output buffers is (3 * textLength / 2 + 16). This is not guaranteed to be sufficient. The value of the actualGlyphCount parameter is only valid if the call succeeds. In the event that maxGlyphCount is not big enough, HRESULT_FROM_WIN32(
Places glyphs output from the GetGlyphs method according to the font and the writing system's rendering rules.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Place glyphs output from the GetGlyphs method according to the font and the writing system's rendering rules.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Analyzes various text properties for complex script processing.
Analyzes a text range for script orientation, reading text and attributes from the source and reporting results to the sink.
Source object to analyze.
Starting position within the source object.
Length to analyze.
Length to analyze.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Applies spacing between characters, properly adjusting glyph clusters and diacritics.
The spacing before each character, in reading order.
The spacing after each character, in reading order.
The minimum advance of each character, to prevent characters from becoming too thin or zero-width. This must be zero or greater.
The length of the clustermap and original text.
The number of glyphs.
Mapping from character ranges to glyph ranges.
The advance width of each glyph.
The offset of the origin of each glyph.
Properties of each glyph, from GetGlyphs.
The new advance width of each glyph.
The new offset of the origin of each glyph.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The input and output advances/offsets are allowed to alias the same array.
Retrieves the given baseline from the font.
The font face to read.
A
Whether the baseline is vertical or horizontal.
Simulate the baseline if it is missing in the font.
Script analysis result from AnalyzeScript.
Note??You can pass an empty script analysis structure, like this scriptAnalysis = {};
, and this method will return the default baseline. ? The language of the run.
The baseline coordinate value in design units.
Whether the returned baseline exists in the font.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If the baseline does not exist in the font, it is not considered an error, but the function will return exists = false. You may then use heuristics to calculate the missing base, or, if the flag simulationAllowed is true, the function will compute a reasonable approximation for you.
Analyzes a text range for script orientation, reading text and attributes from the source and reporting results to the sink callback SetGlyphOrientation.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns 2x3 transform matrix for the respective angle to draw the glyph run.
A
Whether the run's glyphs are sideways or not.
Returned transform.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The translation component of the transform returned is zero.
Retrieves the properties for a given script.
The script for a run of text returned from
A reference to a
Returns properties for the given script. If the script is invalid, it returns generic properties for the unknown script and E_INVALIDARG.
Determines the complexity of text, and whether you need to call
If this method succeeds, it returns
Text is not simple if the characters are part of a script that has complex shaping requirements, require bidi analysis, combine with other characters, reside in the supplementary planes, or have glyphs that participate in standard OpenType features. The length returned will not split combining marks from their base characters.
Retrieves justification opportunity information for each of the glyphs given the text and shaping glyph properties.
Font face that was used for shaping. This is mainly important for returning correct results of the kashida width.
May be
Font em size used for the glyph run.
Script of the text from the itemizer.
Length of the text.
Number of glyphs.
Characters used to produce the glyphs.
Clustermap produced from shaping.
Glyph properties produced from shaping.
A reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
This function is called per-run, after shaping is done via the
Justifies an array of glyph advances to fit the line width.
The line width.
The glyph count.
A reference to a
An array of glyph advances.
An array of glyph offsets.
The returned array of justified glyph advances.
The returned array of justified glyph offsets.
If this method succeeds, it returns
You call JustifyGlyphAdvances after you call
Fills in new glyphs for complex scripts where justification increased the advances of glyphs, such as Arabic with kashida.
Font face used for shaping.
May be
Font em size used for the glyph run.
Script of the text from the itemizer.
Length of the text.
Number of glyphs.
Maximum number of output glyphs allocated by caller.
Clustermap produced from shaping.
Original glyphs produced from shaping.
Original glyph advances produced from shaping.
Justified glyph advances from
Justified glyph offsets from
Properties of each glyph, from
The new glyph count written to the modified arrays, or the needed glyph count if the size is not large enough.
Updated clustermap.
Updated glyphs with new glyphs inserted where needed.
Updated glyph advances.
Updated glyph offsets.
If this method succeeds, it returns
You call GetJustifiedGlyphs after the line has been justified, and it is per-run.
You should call GetJustifiedGlyphs if
Use GetJustifiedGlyphs mainly for cursive scripts like Arabic. If maxGlyphCount is not large enough, GetJustifiedGlyphs returns the error E_NOT_SUFFICIENT_BUFFER and fills the variable to which actualGlyphCount points with the needed glyph count.
The
To get a reference to the
if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pDWriteFactory_->CreateTextFormat( L"Gabriola",null ,, , , 72.0f, L"en-us", &pTextFormat_ ); }
When creating an
These properties cannot be changed after the
The
To draw text with multiple formats, or to use a custom text renderer, use the
This object may not be thread-safe, and it may carry the state of text format change.
Sets trimming options for text overflowing the layout width.
Text trimming options.
Application-defined omission sign. This parameter may be
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets or sets the alignment option of text relative to the layout box's leading and trailing edge.
Gets or sets the alignment option of a paragraph which is relative to the top and bottom edges of a layout box.
Gets or sets the word wrapping option.
Gets or sets the current reading direction for text in a paragraph.
Gets or sets the direction that text lines flow.
Gets or sets the incremental tab stop position.
Gets the current font collection.
Gets the font weight of the text.
Gets the font style of the text.
Gets the font stretch of the text.
Gets the font size in DIP unites.
Sets the alignment of text in a paragraph, relative to the leading and trailing edge of a layout box for a
This method can return one of these values.
Return code | Description |
---|---|
| The method succeeded. |
| The textAlignment argument is invalid. |
?
The text can be aligned to the leading or trailing edge of the layout box, or it can be centered. The following illustration shows text with the alignment set to
See
Sets the alignment option of a paragraph relative to the layout box's top and bottom edge.
The paragraph alignment option being set for a paragraph; see
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the word wrapping option.
The word wrapping option being set for a paragraph; see
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the paragraph reading direction.
The text reading direction (for example,
If this method succeeds, it returns
The reading direction and flow direction must always be set 90 degrees orthogonal to each other, or else you will get the error DWRITE_E_FLOWDIRECTIONCONFLICTS when you use layout functions like Draw or GetMetrics. So if you set a vertical reading direction (for example, to
Sets the paragraph flow direction.
The paragraph flow direction; see
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets a fixed distance between two adjacent tab stops.
The fixed distance between two adjacent tab stops.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets trimming options for text overflowing the layout width.
Text trimming options.
Application-defined omission sign. This parameter may be
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the line spacing.
Specifies how line height is being determined; see
The line height, or distance between one baseline to another.
The distance from top of line to baseline. A reasonable ratio to lineSpacing is 80 percent.
If this method succeeds, it returns
For the default method, spacing depends solely on the content. For uniform spacing, the specified line height overrides the content.
Gets the alignment option of text relative to the layout box's leading and trailing edge.
Returns the text alignment option of the current paragraph.
Gets the alignment option of a paragraph which is relative to the top and bottom edges of a layout box.
A value that indicates the current paragraph alignment option.
Gets the word wrapping option.
Returns the word wrapping option; see
Gets the current reading direction for text in a paragraph.
A value that indicates the current reading direction for text in a paragraph.
Gets the direction that text lines flow.
The direction that text lines flow within their parent container. For example,
Gets the incremental tab stop position.
The incremental tab stop value.
Gets the trimming options for text that overflows the layout box.
When this method returns, it contains a reference to a
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to a trimming omission sign. This parameter may be
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the line spacing adjustment set for a multiline text paragraph.
A value that indicates how line height is determined.
When this method returns, contains the line height, or distance between one baseline to another.
When this method returns, contains the distance from top of line to baseline. A reasonable ratio to lineSpacing is 80 percent.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the current font collection.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the font collection being used for the current text.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the length of the font family name.
The size of the character array, in character count, not including the terminated
Gets a copy of the font family name.
When this method returns, contains a reference to a character array, which is null-terminated, that receives the current font family name. The buffer allocated for this array should be at least the size, in elements, of nameSize.
The size of the fontFamilyName character array, in character count, including the terminated
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the font weight of the text.
A value that indicates the type of weight (such as normal, bold, or black).
Gets the font style of the text.
A value which indicates the type of font style (such as slope or incline).
Gets the font stretch of the text.
A value which indicates the type of font stretch (such as normal or condensed).
Gets the font size in DIP unites.
The current font size in DIP units.
Gets the length of the locale name.
The size of the character array in character count, not including the terminated
Gets a copy of the locale name.
Contains a character array that receives the current locale name.
The size of the character array, in character count, including the terminated
If this method succeeds, it returns
The
To get a reference to the
// Create a text layout using the text format. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {rect; GetClientRect(hwnd_, &rect); float width = rect.right / dpiScaleX_; float height = rect.bottom / dpiScaleY_; hr = pDWriteFactory_->CreateTextLayout( wszText_, // The string to be laid out and formatted. cTextLength_, // The length of the string. pTextFormat_, // The text format to apply to the string (contains font information, etc). width, // The width of the layout box. height, // The height of the layout box. &pTextLayout_ // The interface reference. ); }
The
// Set the font weight to bold for the first 5 letters.textRange = {0, 4}; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pTextLayout_->SetFontWeight( , textRange); }
To draw the block of text represented by an
Gets or sets the layout maximum width.
Gets or sets the layout maximum height.
Retrieves overall metrics for the formatted string.
Returns the overhangs (in DIPs) of the layout and all objects contained in it, including text glyphs and inline objects.
Underlines and strikethroughs do not contribute to the black box determination, since these are actually drawn by the renderer, which is allowed to draw them in any variety of styles.
Sets the layout maximum width.
A value that indicates the maximum width of the layout box.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the layout maximum height.
A value that indicates the maximum height of the layout box.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the font collection.
The font collection to set.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets null-terminated font family name for text within a specified text range.
The font family name that applies to the entire text string within the range specified by textRange.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the font weight for text within a text range specified by a
If this method succeeds, it returns
The font weight can be set to one of the predefined font weight values provided in the
The following illustration shows an example of Normal and UltraBold weights for the Palatino Linotype typeface.
Sets the font style for text within a text range specified by a
If this method succeeds, it returns
The font style can be set to Normal, Italic or Oblique. The following illustration shows three styles for the Palatino font. For more information, see
Sets the font stretch for text within a specified text range.
A value which indicates the type of font stretch for text within the range specified by textRange.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the font size in DIP units for text within a specified text range.
The font size in DIP units to be set for text in the range specified by textRange.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The
To get a reference to the
// Create a text layout using the text format. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) {rect; GetClientRect(hwnd_, &rect); float width = rect.right / dpiScaleX_; float height = rect.bottom / dpiScaleY_; hr = pDWriteFactory_->CreateTextLayout( wszText_, // The string to be laid out and formatted. cTextLength_, // The length of the string. pTextFormat_, // The text format to apply to the string (contains font information, etc). width, // The width of the layout box. height, // The height of the layout box. &pTextLayout_ // The interface reference. ); }
The
// Set the font weight to bold for the first 5 letters.textRange = {0, 4}; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pTextLayout_->SetFontWeight( , textRange); }
To draw the block of text represented by an
Sets strikethrough for text within a specified text range.
A Boolean flag that indicates whether strikethrough takes place in the range specified by textRange.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the application-defined drawing effect.
Application-defined drawing effects that apply to the range. This data object will be passed back to the application's drawing callbacks for final rendering.
The text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
An
This drawing effect is associated with the specified range and will be passed back to the application by way of the callback when the range is drawn at drawing time.
Sets the inline object.
An application-defined inline object.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The application may call this function to specify the set of properties describing an application-defined inline object for specific range.
This inline object applies to the specified range and will be passed back to the application by way of the DrawInlineObject callback when the range is drawn. Any text in that range will be suppressed.
Sets font typography features for text within a specified text range.
Pointer to font typography settings.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the locale name for text within a specified text range.
A null-terminated locale name string.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the layout maximum width.
Returns the layout maximum width.
Gets the layout maximum height.
The layout maximum height.
Gets the font collection associated with the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the underline.
Contains an address of a reference to the current font collection.
Get the length of the font family name at the current position.
The current text position.
When this method returns, contains the size of the character array containing the font family name, in character count, not including the terminated
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the font family.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Copies the font family name of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to examine.
When this method returns, contains an array of characters that receives the current font family name. You must allocate storage for this parameter.
The size of the character array in character count including the terminated
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the font family name.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the font weight of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the font weight.
When this method returns, contains a value which indicates the type of font weight being applied at the specified position.
Gets the font style (also known as slope) of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the font style.
When this method returns, contains a value which indicates the type of font style (also known as slope or incline) being applied at the specified position.
Gets the font stretch of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the font stretch.
When this method returns, contains a value which indicates the type of font stretch (also known as width) being applied at the specified position.
Gets the font em height of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the font size.
When this method returns, contains the size of the font in ems of the text at the specified position.
Gets the underline presence of the text at the specified position.
The current text position.
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the underline.
A Boolean flag that indicates whether underline is present at the position indicated by currentPosition.
Get the strikethrough presence of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
Contains the range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to strikethrough.
A Boolean flag that indicates whether strikethrough is present at the position indicated by currentPosition.
Gets the application-defined drawing effect at the specified text position.
The position of the text whose drawing effect is to be retrieved.
Contains the range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the drawing effect.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the current application-defined drawing effect. Usually this effect is a foreground brush that is used in glyph drawing.
Gets the inline object at the specified position.
The specified text position.
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the inline object.
Contains the application-defined inline object.
Gets the typography setting of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the typography.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the current typography setting.
Gets the length of the locale name of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
Size of the character array, in character count, not including the terminated
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the locale name.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the locale name of the text at the specified position.
The position of the text to inspect.
When this method returns, contains the character array receiving the current locale name.
Size of the character array, in character count, including the terminated
The range of text that has the same formatting as the text at the position specified by currentPosition. This means the run has the exact formatting as the position specified, including but not limited to the locale name.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Draws text using the specified client drawing context.
An application-defined drawing context.
Pointer to the set of callback functions used to draw parts of a text string.
The x-coordinate of the layout's left side.
The y-coordinate of the layout's top side.
If this method succeeds, it returns
To draw text with this method, a textLayout object needs to be created by the application using
After the textLayout object is obtained, the application calls the
If you set a vertical text reading direction on
Retrieves the information about each individual text line of the text string.
When this method returns, contains a reference to an array of structures containing various calculated length values of individual text lines.
The maximum size of the lineMetrics array.
When this method returns, contains the actual size of the lineMetrics array that is needed.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If maxLineCount is not large enough E_NOT_SUFFICIENT_BUFFER, which is equivalent to HRESULT_FROM_WIN32(
Retrieves overall metrics for the formatted string.
When this method returns, contains the measured distances of text and associated content after being formatted.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns the overhangs (in DIPs) of the layout and all objects contained in it, including text glyphs and inline objects.
Overshoots of visible extents (in DIPs) outside the layout.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Underlines and strikethroughs do not contribute to the black box determination, since these are actually drawn by the renderer, which is allowed to draw them in any variety of styles.
Retrieves logical properties and measurements of each glyph cluster.
When this method returns, contains metrics, such as line-break or total advance width, for a glyph cluster.
The maximum size of the clusterMetrics array.
When this method returns, contains the actual size of the clusterMetrics array that is needed.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If maxClusterCount is not large enough, then E_NOT_SUFFICIENT_BUFFER, which is equivalent to HRESULT_FROM_WIN32(
Determines the minimum possible width the layout can be set to without emergency breaking between the characters of whole words occurring.
Minimum width.
The application calls this function passing in a specific pixel location relative to the top-left location of the layout box and obtains the information about the correspondent hit-test metrics of the text string where the hit-test has occurred. When the specified pixel location is outside the text string, the function sets the output value *isInside to
The pixel location X to hit-test, relative to the top-left location of the layout box.
The pixel location Y to hit-test, relative to the top-left location of the layout box.
An output flag that indicates whether the hit-test location is at the leading or the trailing side of the character. When the output *isInside value is set to
An output flag that indicates whether the hit-test location is inside the text string. When
The output geometry fully enclosing the hit-test location. When the output *isInside value is set to
The application calls this function to get the pixel location relative to the top-left of the layout box given the text position and the logical side of the position. This function is normally used as part of caret positioning of text where the caret is drawn at the location corresponding to the current text editing position. It may also be used as a way to programmatically obtain the geometry of a particular text position in UI automation.
The text position used to get the pixel location.
A Boolean flag that indicates whether the pixel location is of the leading or the trailing side of the specified text position.
When this method returns, contains the output pixel location X, relative to the top-left location of the layout box.
When this method returns, contains the output pixel location Y, relative to the top-left location of the layout box.
When this method returns, contains the output geometry fully enclosing the specified text position.
The application calls this function to get a set of hit-test metrics corresponding to a range of text positions. One of the main usages is to implement highlight selection of the text string. The function returns E_NOT_SUFFICIENT_BUFFER, which is equivalent to HRESULT_FROM_WIN32(
If this method succeeds, it returns
Specifies a range of text positions where format is applied in the text represented by an
Represents a set of application-defined callbacks that perform rendering of text, inline objects, and decorations such as underlines.
Represents a font typography setting.
Gets the number of OpenType font features for the current font.
A single run of text can be associated with more than one typographic feature. The
Adds an OpenType font feature.
A structure that contains the OpenType name identifier and the execution parameter for the font feature being added.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the number of OpenType font features for the current font.
The number of font features for the current text format.
A single run of text can be associated with more than one typographic feature. The
Gets the font feature at the specified index.
The zero-based index of the font feature to retrieve.
When this method returns, contains the font feature which is at the specified index.
A single run of text can be associated with more than one typographic feature. The
The
The Roman baseline for horizontal; the Central baseline for vertical.
The baseline that is used by alphabetic scripts such as Latin, Greek, and Cyrillic.
Central baseline, which is generally used for vertical text.
Mathematical baseline, which math characters are centered on.
Hanging baseline, which is used in scripts like Devanagari.
Ideographic bottom baseline for CJK, left in vertical.
Ideographic top baseline for CJK, right in vertical.
The bottom-most extent in horizontal, left-most in vertical.
The top-most extent in horizontal, right-most in vertical.
Indicates the condition at the edges of inline object or text used to determine line-breaking behavior.
Indicates whether a break is allowed by determining the condition of the neighboring text span or inline object.
Indicates that a line break is allowed, unless overruled by the condition of the neighboring text span or inline object, either prohibited by a "may not break" condition or forced by a "must break" condition.
Indicates that there should be no line break, unless overruled by a "must break" condition from the neighboring text span or inline object.
Indicates that the line break must happen, regardless of the condition of the adjacent text span or inline object.
Represents the degree to which a font has been stretched compared to a font's normal aspect ratio. The enumerated values correspond to the usWidthClass definition in the OpenType specification. The usWidthClass represents an integer value between 1 and 9?lower values indicate narrower widths; higher values indicate wider widths.
A font stretch describes the degree to which a font form is stretched from its normal aspect ratio, which is the original width to height ratio specified for the glyphs in the font. The following illustration shows an example of Normal and Condensed stretches for the Rockwell Bold typeface.
Note??Values other than the ones defined in the enumeration are considered to be invalid, and are rejected by font API functions.?Predefined font stretch : Not known (0).
Predefined font stretch : Ultra-condensed (1).
Predefined font stretch : Extra-condensed (2).
Specifies the type of DirectWrite factory object.
A DirectWrite factory object contains information about its internal state, such as font loader registration and cached font data. In most cases you should use the shared factory object, because it allows multiple components that use DirectWrite to share internal DirectWrite state information, thereby reducing memory usage. However, there are cases when it is desirable to reduce the impact of a component on the rest of the process, such as a plug-in from an untrusted source, by sandboxing and isolating it from the rest of the process components. In such cases, you should use an isolated factory for the sandboxed component.
Indicates that the DirectWrite factory is a shared factory and that it allows for the reuse of cached font data across multiple in-process components. Such factories also take advantage of cross process font caching components for better performance.
Indicates that the DirectWrite factory object is isolated. Objects created from the isolated factory do not interact with internal DirectWrite state from other components.
Indicates the direction of how lines of text are placed relative to one another.
Specifies that text lines are placed from top to bottom.
Specifies that text lines are placed from bottom to top.
Specifies that text lines are placed from left to right.
Specifies that text lines are placed from right to left.
Indicates the file format of a complete font face.
Font formats that consist of multiple files, such as Type 1 .PFM and .PFB, have a single enum entry.
OpenType font face with CFF outlines.
OpenType font face with TrueType outlines.
OpenType font face with TrueType outlines.
A Type 1 font face.
A vector .FON format font face.
A bitmap .FON format font face.
Font face type is not recognized by the DirectWrite font system.
The font data includes only the CFF table from an OpenType CFF font. This font face type can be used only for embedded fonts (i.e., custom font file loaders) and the resulting font face object supports only the minimum functionality necessary to render glyphs.
OpenType font face that is a part of a TrueType collection.
A value that indicates the typographic feature of text supplied by the font.
Replaces figures separated by a slash with an alternative form.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'afrc'
Turns capital characters into petite capitals. It is generally used for words which would otherwise be set in all caps, such as acronyms, but which are desired in petite-cap form to avoid disrupting the flow of text. See the pcap feature description for notes on the relationship of caps, smallcaps and petite caps.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'c2pc'
Turns capital characters into small capitals. It is generally used for words which would otherwise be set in all caps, such as acronyms, but which are desired in small-cap form to avoid disrupting the flow of text.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'c2sc'
In specified situations, replaces default glyphs with alternate forms which provide better joining behavior. Used in script typefaces which are designed to have some or all of their glyphs join.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'calt'
Shifts various punctuation marks up to a position that works better with all-capital sequences or sets of lining figures; also changes oldstyle figures to lining figures. By default, glyphs in a text face are designed to work with lowercase characters. Some characters should be shifted vertically to fit the higher visual center of all-capital or lining text. Also, lining figures are the same height (or close to it) as capitals, and fit much better with all-capital text.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'case'
To minimize the number of glyph alternates, it is sometimes desired to decompose a character into two glyphs. Additionally, it may be preferable to compose two characters into a single glyph for better glyph processing. This feature permits such composition/decomposition. The feature should be processed as the first feature processed, and should be processed only when it is called.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ccmp'
Replaces a sequence of glyphs with a single glyph which is preferred for typographic purposes. Unlike other ligature features, clig specifies the context in which the ligature is recommended. This capability is important in some script designs and for swash ligatures.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'clig'
Globally adjusts inter-glyph spacing for all-capital text. Most typefaces contain capitals and lowercase characters, and the capitals are positioned to work with the lowercase. When capitals are used for words, they need more space between them for legibility and esthetics. This feature would not apply to monospaced designs. Of course the user may want to override this behavior in order to do more pronounced letterspacing for esthetic reasons.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'cpsp'
Replaces default character glyphs with corresponding swash glyphs in a specified context. Note that there may be more than one swash alternate for a given character.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'cswh'
In cursive scripts like Arabic, this feature cursively positions adjacent glyphs.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'curs'
Globally adjusts inter-glyph spacing for all-capital text. Most typefaces contain capitals and lowercase characters, and the capitals are positioned to work with the lowercase. When capitals are used for words, they need more space between them for legibility and esthetics. This feature would not apply to monospaced designs. Of course the user may want to override this behavior in order to do more pronounced letterspacing for esthetic reasons.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'cpsp'
Replaces a sequence of glyphs with a single glyph which is preferred for typographic purposes. This feature covers those ligatures which may be used for special effect, at the user's preference.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'dlig'
Replaces standard forms in Japanese fonts with corresponding forms preferred by typographers. For example, a user would invoke this feature to replace kanji character U+5516 with U+555E.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'expt'
Replaces figures separated by a slash with 'common' (diagonal) fractions.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'frac'
Replaces glyphs set on other widths with glyphs set on full (usually em) widths. In a CJKV font, this may include "lower ASCII" Latin characters and various symbols. In a European font, this feature replaces proportionally-spaced glyphs with monospaced glyphs, which are generally set on widths of 0.6 em. For example, a user may invoke this feature in a Japanese font to get full monospaced Latin glyphs instead of the corresponding proportionally-spaced versions.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'fwid'
Produces the half forms of consonants in Indic scripts. For example, in Hindi (Devanagari script), the conjunct KKa, obtained by doubling the Ka, is denoted with a half form of Ka followed by the full form.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'half'
Produces the halant forms of consonants in Indic scripts. For example, in Sanskrit (Devanagari script), syllable final consonants are frequently required in their halant form.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'haln'
Respaces glyphs designed to be set on full-em widths, fitting them onto half-em widths. This differs from hwid in that it does not substitute new glyphs.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'halt'
Replaces the default (current) forms with the historical alternates. While some ligatures are also used for historical effect, this feature deals only with single characters. Some fonts include the historical forms as alternates, so they can be used for a 'period' effect.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'hist'
Replaces standard kana with forms that have been specially designed for only horizontal writing. This is a typographic optimization for improved fit and more even color.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'hkna'
Replaces the default (current) forms with the historical alternates. Some ligatures were in common use in the past, but appear anachronistic today. Some fonts include the historical forms as alternates, so they can be used for a 'period' effect.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'hlig'
Replaces glyphs on proportional widths, or fixed widths other than half an em, with glyphs on half-em (en) widths. Many CJKV fonts have glyphs which are set on multiple widths; this feature selects the half-em version. There are various contexts in which this is the preferred behavior, including compatibility with older desktop documents.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'hwid'
Used to access the JIS X 0212-1990 glyphs for the cases when the JIS X 0213:2004 form is encoded. The JIS X 0212-1990 (aka, "Hojo Kanji") and JIS X 0213:2004 character sets overlap significantly. In some cases their prototypical glyphs differ. When building fonts that support both JIS X 0212-1990 and JIS X 0213:2004 (such as those supporting the Adobe-Japan 1-6 character collection), it is recommended that JIS X 0213:2004 forms be the preferred encoded form.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'hojo'
The National Language Council (NLC) of Japan has defined new glyph shapes for a number of JIS characters, which were incorporated into JIS X 0213:2004 as new prototypical forms. The 'jp04' feature is A subset of the 'nlck' feature, and is used to access these prototypical glyphs in a manner that maintains the integrity of JIS X 0213:2004.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'jp04'
Replaces default (JIS90) Japanese glyphs with the corresponding forms from the JIS C 6226-1978 (JIS78) specification.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'jp78'
Replaces default (JIS90) Japanese glyphs with the corresponding forms from the JIS X 0208-1983 (JIS83) specification.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'jp83'
Replaces Japanese glyphs from the JIS78 or JIS83 specifications with the corresponding forms from the JIS X 0208-1990 (JIS90) specification.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'jp90'
Adjusts amount of space between glyphs, generally to provide optically consistent spacing between glyphs. Although a well-designed typeface has consistent inter-glyph spacing overall, some glyph combinations require adjustment for improved legibility. Besides standard adjustment in the horizontal direction, this feature can supply size-dependent kerning data via device tables, "cross-stream" kerning in the Y text direction, and adjustment of glyph placement independent of the advance adjustment. Note that this feature may apply to runs of more than two glyphs, and would not be used in monospaced fonts. Also note that this feature does not apply to text set vertically.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'kern'
Replaces a sequence of glyphs with a single glyph which is preferred for typographic purposes. This feature covers the ligatures which the designer/manufacturer judges should be used in normal conditions.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'liga'
Changes selected figures from oldstyle to the default lining form. For example, a user may invoke this feature in order to get lining figures, which fit better with all-capital text. This feature overrides results of the Oldstyle Figures feature (onum).
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'lnum'
Enables localized forms of glyphs to be substituted for default forms. Many scripts used to write multiple languages over wide geographical areas have developed localized variant forms of specific letters, which are used by individual literary communities. For example, a number of letters in the Bulgarian and Serbian alphabets have forms distinct from their Russian counterparts and from each other. In some cases the localized form differs only subtly from the script 'norm', in others the forms are radically distinct.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'locl'
Positions mark glyphs with respect to base glyphs. For example, in Arabic script positioning the Hamza above the Yeh.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'mark'
Replaces standard typographic forms of Greek glyphs with corresponding forms commonly used in mathematical notation (which are a subset of the Greek alphabet).
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'mgrk'
Positions marks with respect to other marks. Required in various non-Latin scripts like Arabic. For example, in Arabic, the ligaturised mark Ha with Hamza above it can also be obtained by positioning these marks relative to one another.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'mkmk'
Replaces default glyphs with various notational forms (such as glyphs placed in open or solid circles, squares, parentheses, diamonds or rounded boxes). In some cases an annotation form may already be present, but the user may want a different one.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'nalt'
Used to access glyphs made from glyph shapes defined by the National Language Council (NLC) of Japan for a number of JIS characters in 2000.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'nlck'
Changes selected figures from the default lining style to oldstyle form. For example, a user may invoke this feature to get oldstyle figures, which fit better into the flow of normal upper- and lowercase text. This feature overrides results of the Lining Figures feature (lnum).
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'onum'
Replaces default alphabetic glyphs with the corresponding ordinal forms for use after figures. One exception to the follows-a-figure rule is the numero character (U+2116), which is actually a ligature substitution, but is best accessed through this feature.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ordn'
Respaces glyphs designed to be set on full-em widths, fitting them onto individual (more or less proportional) horizontal widths. This differs from pwid in that it does not substitute new glyphs (GPOS, not GSUB feature). The user may prefer the monospaced form, or may simply want to ensure that the glyph is well-fit and not rotated in vertical setting (Latin forms designed for proportional spacing would be rotated).
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'palt'
Turns lowercase characters into petite capitals. Forms related to petite capitals, such as specially designed figures, may be included. Some fonts contain an additional size of capital letters, shorter than the regular smallcaps and it is referred to as petite caps. Such forms are most likely to be found in designs with a small lowercase x-height, where they better harmonise with lowercase text than the taller smallcaps (for examples of petite caps, see the Emigre type families Mrs Eaves and Filosofia).
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'pcap'
Replaces figure glyphs set on uniform (tabular) widths with corresponding glyphs set on glyph-specific (proportional) widths. Tabular widths will generally be the default, but this cannot be safely assumed. Of course this feature would not be present in monospaced designs.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'pnum'
Replaces glyphs set on uniform widths (typically full or half-em) with proportionally spaced glyphs. The proportional variants are often used for the Latin characters in CJKV fonts, but may also be used for Kana in Japanese fonts.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'pwid'
Replaces glyphs on other widths with glyphs set on widths of one quarter of an em (half an en). The characters involved are normally figures and some forms of punctuation.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'qwid'
Replaces a sequence of glyphs with a single glyph which is preferred for typographic purposes. This feature covers those ligatures, which the script determines as required to be used in normal conditions. This feature is important for some scripts to ensure correct glyph formation.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'rlig'
Identifies glyphs in the font which have been designed for "ruby", from the old typesetting term for four-point-sized type. Japanese typesetting often uses smaller kana glyphs, generally in superscripted form, to clarify the meaning of kanji which may be unfamiliar to the reader.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ruby'
Replaces the default forms with the stylistic alternates. Many fonts contain alternate glyph designs for a purely esthetic effect; these don't always fit into a clear category like swash or historical. As in the case of swash glyphs, there may be more than one alternate form.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'salt'
Replaces lining or oldstyle figures with inferior figures (smaller glyphs which sit lower than the standard baseline, primarily for chemical or mathematical notation). May also replace lowercase characters with alphabetic inferiors.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'sinf'
Turns lowercase characters into small capitals. This corresponds to the common SC font layout. It is generally used for display lines set in Large & small caps, such as titles. Forms related to small capitals, such as oldstyle figures, may be included.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'smcp'
Replaces 'traditional' Chinese or Japanese forms with the corresponding 'simplified' forms.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'smpl'
In addition to, or instead of, stylistic alternatives of individual glyphs (see 'salt' feature), some fonts may contain sets of stylistic variant glyphs corresponding to portions of the character set, such as multiple variants for lowercase letters in a Latin font. Glyphs in stylistic sets may be designed to harmonise visually, interract in particular ways, or otherwise work together. Examples of fonts including stylistic sets are Zapfino Linotype and Adobe's Poetica. Individual features numbered sequentially with the tag name convention 'ss01' 'ss02' 'ss03' . 'ss20' provide a mechanism for glyphs in these sets to be associated via GSUB lookup indexes to default forms and to each other, and for users to select from available stylistic sets
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss01'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss02'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss03'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss04'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss05'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss06'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss07'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss08'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss09'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss10'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss11'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss12'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss13'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss14'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss15'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss16'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss17'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss18'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss19'
See the description for
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'ss20'
May replace a default glyph with a subscript glyph, or it may combine a glyph substitution with positioning adjustments for proper placement.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'subs'
Replaces lining or oldstyle figures with superior figures (primarily for footnote indication), and replaces lowercase letters with superior letters (primarily for abbreviated French titles).
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'sups'
Replaces default character glyphs with corresponding swash glyphs. Note that there may be more than one swash alternate for a given character.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'swsh'
Replaces the default glyphs with corresponding forms designed specifically for titling. These may be all-capital and/or larger on the body, and adjusted for viewing at larger sizes.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'titl'
Replaces 'simplified' Japanese kanji forms with the corresponding 'traditional' forms. This is equivalent to the Traditional Forms feature, but explicitly limited to the traditional forms considered proper for use in personal names (as many as 205 glyphs in some fonts).
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'tnam'
Replaces figure glyphs set on proportional widths with corresponding glyphs set on uniform (tabular) widths. Tabular widths will generally be the default, but this cannot be safely assumed. Of course this feature would not be present in monospaced designs.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'tnum'
Replaces 'simplified' Chinese hanzi or Japanese kanji forms with the corresponding 'traditional' forms.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'trad'
Replaces glyphs on other widths with glyphs set on widths of one third of an em. The characters involved are normally figures and some forms of punctuation.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'twid'
Maps upper- and lowercase letters to a mixed set of lowercase and small capital forms, resulting in a single case alphabet (for an example of unicase, see the Emigre type family Filosofia). The letters substituted may vary from font to font, as appropriate to the design. If aligning to the x-height, smallcap glyphs may be substituted, or specially designed unicase forms might be used. Substitutions might also include specially designed figures.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'unic'
Indicates that the font is displayed vertically.
Replaces normal figures with figures adjusted for vertical display.
Allows the user to change from the default 0 to a slashed form. Some fonts contain both a default form of zero, and an alternative form which uses a diagonal slash through the counter. Especially in condensed designs, it can be difficult to distinguish between 0 and O (zero and capital O) in any situation where capitals and lining figures may be arbitrarily mixed.
Equivalent OpenType tag: 'zero'
The type of a font represented by a single font file. Font formats that consist of multiple files, for example Type 1 .PFM and .PFB, have separate enum values for each of the file types.
Font type is not recognized by the DirectWrite font system.
OpenType font with CFF outlines.
OpenType font with TrueType outlines.
OpenType font that contains a TrueType collection.
Type 1 PFM font.
Type 1 PFB font.
Vector .FON font.
Bitmap .FON font.
OpenType font that contains a TrueType collection.
Specify whether
Identifies a string in a font.
Unspecified font property identifier.
Family name for the weight-width-slope model.
Family name preferred by the designer. This enables font designers to group more than four fonts in a single family without losing compatibility with GDI. This name is typically only present if it differs from the GDI-compatible family name.
Face name of the font, for example Regular or Bold.
The full name of the font, for example "Arial Bold", from name id 4 in the name table.
GDI-compatible family name. Because GDI allows a maximum of four fonts per family, fonts in the same family may have different GDI-compatible family names, for example "Arial", "Arial Narrow", "Arial Black".
The postscript name of the font, for example "GillSans-Bold", from name id 6 in the name table.
Script/language tag to identify the scripts or languages that the font was primarily designed to support.
Script/language tag to identify the scripts or languages that the font declares it is able to support.
Semantic tag to describe the font, for example Fancy, Decorative, Handmade, Sans-serif, Swiss, Pixel, Futuristic.
Weight of the font represented as a decimal string in the range 1-999.
Stretch of the font represented as a decimal string in the range 1-9.
Style of the font represented as a decimal string in the range 0-2.
Total number of properties.
Specifies algorithmic style simulations to be applied to the font face. Bold and oblique simulations can be combined via bitwise OR operation.
Style simulations are not recommended for good typographic quality.
Indicates that no simulations are applied to the font face.
Indicates that algorithmic emboldening is applied to the font face.
Indicates that algorithmic italicization is applied to the font face.
Represents the degree to which a font has been stretched compared to a font's normal aspect ratio. The enumerated values correspond to the usWidthClass definition in the OpenType specification. The usWidthClass represents an integer value between 1 and 9?lower values indicate narrower widths; higher values indicate wider widths.
A font stretch describes the degree to which a font form is stretched from its normal aspect ratio, which is the original width to height ratio specified for the glyphs in the font. The following illustration shows an example of Normal and Condensed stretches for the Rockwell Bold typeface.
Note??Values other than the ones defined in the enumeration are considered to be invalid, and are rejected by font API functions.?Predefined font stretch : Not known (0).
Predefined font stretch : Ultra-condensed (1).
Predefined font stretch : Extra-condensed (2).
Predefined font stretch : Condensed (3).
Predefined font stretch : Semi-condensed (4).
Predefined font stretch : Normal (5).
Predefined font stretch : Medium (5).
Predefined font stretch : Semi-expanded (6).
Predefined font stretch : Expanded (7).
Predefined font stretch : Extra-expanded (8).
Predefined font stretch : Ultra-expanded (9).
Represents the style of a font face as normal, italic, or oblique.
Three terms categorize the slant of a font: normal, italic, and oblique.
Font style | Description |
---|---|
Normal | The characters in a normal, or roman, font are upright. |
Italic | The characters in an italic font are truly slanted and appear as they were designed. |
Oblique | The characters in an oblique font are artificially slanted. |
?
For Oblique, the slant is achieved by performing a shear transformation on the characters from a normal font. When a true italic font is not available on a computer or printer, an oblique style can be generated from the normal font and used to simulate an italic font. The following illustration shows the normal, italic, and oblique font styles for the Palatino Linotype font. Notice how the italic font style has a more flowing and visually appealing appearance than the oblique font style, which is simply created by skewing the normal font style version of the text.
Note?? Values other than the ones defined in the enumeration are considered to be invalid, and they are rejected by font API functions.?Font style : Normal.
Font style : Oblique.
Font style : Italic.
Represents the density of a typeface, in terms of the lightness or heaviness of the strokes. The enumerated values correspond to the usWeightClass definition in the OpenType specification. The usWeightClass represents an integer value between 1 and 999. Lower values indicate lighter weights; higher values indicate heavier weights.
Weight differences are generally differentiated by an increased stroke or thickness that is associated with a given character in a typeface, as compared to a "normal" character from that same typeface. The following illustration shows an example of Normal and UltraBold weights for the Palatino Linotype typeface.
Note??Not all weights are available for all typefaces. When a weight is not available for a typeface, the closest matching weight is returned.?Font weight values less than 1 or greater than 999 are considered invalid, and they are rejected by font API functions.
Predefined font weight : Thin (100).
Predefined font weight : Extra-light (200).
Predefined font weight : Ultra-light (200).
Predefined font weight : Light (300).
Predefined font weight : Semi-Light (350).
Predefined font weight : Normal (400).
Predefined font weight : Regular (400).
Predefined font weight : Medium (500).
Predefined font weight : Demi-bold (600).
Predefined font weight : Semi-bold (600).
Predefined font weight : Bold (700).
Predefined font weight : Extra-bold (800).
Predefined font weight : Ultra-bold (800).
Predefined font weight : Black (900).
Predefined font weight : Heavy (900).
Predefined font weight : Extra-black (950).
Predefined font weight : Ultra-black (950).
The
The text analyzer outputs
Glyph orientation is upright.
Glyph orientation is rotated 90 degrees clockwise.
Glyph orientation is upside-down.
Glyph orientation is rotated 270 degrees clockwise.
Specifies whether to enable grid-fitting of glyph outlines (also known as hinting).
Choose grid fitting based on the font's table information.
Always disable grid fitting, using the ideal glyph outlines.
Enable grid fitting, adjusting glyph outlines for device pixel display.
The informational string enumeration which identifies a string embedded in a font file.
Indicates the string containing the unspecified name ID.
Indicates the string containing the copyright notice provided by the font.
Indicates the string containing a version number.
Indicates the string containing the trademark information provided by the font.
Indicates the string containing the name of the font manufacturer.
Indicates the string containing the name of the font designer.
Indicates the string containing the URL of the font designer (with protocol, e.g., http://, ftp://).
Indicates the string containing the description of the font. This may also contain revision information, usage recommendations, history, features, and so on.
Indicates the string containing the URL of the font vendor (with protocol, e.g., http://, ftp://). If a unique serial number is embedded in the URL, it can be used to register the font.
Indicates the string containing the description of how the font may be legally used, or different example scenarios for licensed use.
Indicates the string containing the URL where additional licensing information can be found.
Indicates the string containing the GDI-compatible family name. Since GDI allows a maximum of four fonts per family, fonts in the same family may have different GDI-compatible family names (e.g., "Arial", "Arial Narrow", "Arial Black").
Indicates the string containing a GDI-compatible subfamily name.
Indicates the string containing the family name preferred by the designer. This enables font designers to group more than four fonts in a single family without losing compatibility with GDI. This name is typically only present if it differs from the GDI-compatible family name.
Indicates the string containing the subfamily name preferred by the designer. This name is typically only present if it differs from the GDI-compatible subfamily name.
Contains sample text for display in font lists. This can be the font name or any other text that the designer thinks is the best example to display the font in.
The full name of the font, like Arial Bold, from name id 4 in the name table
The postscript name of the font, like GillSans-Bold, from name id 6 in the name table.
The postscript CID findfont name, from name id 20 in the name table
The method used for line spacing in a text layout.
The line spacing method is set by using the SetLineSpacing method of the
Line spacing depends solely on the content, adjusting to accommodate the size of fonts and inline objects.
Lines are explicitly set to uniform spacing, regardless of the size of fonts and inline objects. This can be useful to avoid the uneven appearance that can occur from font fallback.
Line spacing and baseline distances are proportional to the computed values based on the content, the size of the fonts and inline objects.
Note??This value is only available on Windows?10 or later and it can be used withSpecifies the location of a resource.
The resource is remote, and information about it is unknown, including the file size and date. If you attempt to create a font or file stream, the creation will fail until locality becomes at least partial.
The resource is partially local, which means you can query the size and date of the file stream. With this type, you also might be able to create a font face and retrieve the particular glyphs for metrics and drawing, but not all the glyphs will be present.
The resource is completely local, and all font functions can be called without concern of missing data or errors related to network connectivity.
Specifies how to apply number substitution on digits and related punctuation.
Specifies that the substitution method should be determined based on the LOCALE_IDIGITSUBSTITUTION value of the specified text culture.
If the culture is Arabic or Persian, specifies that the number shapes depend on the context. Either traditional or nominal number shapes are used, depending on the nearest preceding strong character or (if there is none) the reading direction of the paragraph.
Specifies that code points 0x30-0x39 are always rendered as nominal numeral shapes (ones of the European number), that is, no substitution is performed.
Specifies that numbers are rendered using the national number shapes as specified by the LOCALE_SNATIVEDIGITS value of the specified text culture.
Specifies that numbers are rendered using the traditional shapes for the specified culture. For most cultures, this is the same as NativeNational. However, NativeNational results in Latin numbers for some Arabic cultures, whereasDWRITE_NUMBER_SUBSTITUTION_METHOD_TRADITIONAL results in arabic numbers for all Arabic cultures.
The optical margin alignment mode.
By default, glyphs are aligned to the margin by the default origin and side-bearings of the glyph. If you specify
Align to the default origin and side-bearings of the glyph.
Align to the ink of the glyphs, such that the black box abuts the margins.
The
Glyphs are rendered in outline mode by default at large sizes for performance reasons, but how large (that is, the outline threshold) depends on the quality of outline rendering. If the graphics system renders anti-aliased outlines, a relatively low threshold is used. But if the graphics system renders aliased outlines, a much higher threshold is used.
The
Any arm style.
No fit arm style.
The arm style is straight horizontal.
The arm style is straight wedge.
The arm style is straight vertical.
The arm style is straight single serif.
The arm style is straight double serif.
The arm style is non-straight horizontal.
The arm style is non-straight wedge.
The arm style is non-straight vertical.
The arm style is non-straight single serif.
The arm style is non-straight double serif.
The arm style is straight horizontal.
The arm style is straight vertical.
The arm style is non-straight horizontal.
The arm style is non-straight wedge.
The arm style is non-straight vertical.
The arm style is non-straight single serif.
The arm style is non-straight double serif.
The
Any aspect.
No fit for aspect.
Super condensed aspect.
Very condensed aspect.
Condensed aspect.
Normal aspect.
Extended aspect.
Very extended aspect.
Super extended aspect.
Monospace aspect.
The
Any aspect ratio.
No fit for aspect ratio.
Very condensed aspect ratio.
Condensed aspect ratio.
Normal aspect ratio.
Expanded aspect ratio.
Very expanded aspect ratio.
The
Any range.
No fit for range.
The range includes extended collection.
The range includes literals.
The range doesn't include lower case.
The range includes small capitals.
The
Any contrast.
No fit contrast.
No contrast.
Very low contrast.
Low contrast.
Medium low contrast.
Medium contrast.
Medium high contrast.
High contrast.
Very high contrast.
Horizontal low contrast.
Horizontal medium contrast.
Horizontal high contrast.
Broken contrast.
The
Any class of decorative typeface.
No fit for decorative typeface.
Derivative decorative typeface.
Nonstandard topology decorative typeface.
Nonstandard elements decorative typeface.
Nonstandard aspect decorative typeface.
Initials decorative typeface.
Cartoon decorative typeface.
Picture stems decorative typeface.
Ornamented decorative typeface.
Text and background decorative typeface.
Collage decorative typeface.
Montage decorative typeface.
The
Any decorative topology.
No fit for decorative topology.
Standard decorative topology.
Square decorative topology.
Multiple segment decorative topology.
Art deco decorative topology.
Uneven weighting decorative topology.
Diverse arms decorative topology.
Diverse forms decorative topology.
Lombardic forms decorative topology.
Upper case in lower case decorative topology.
The decorative topology is implied.
Horseshoe E and A decorative topology.
Cursive decorative topology.
Blackletter decorative topology.
Swash variance decorative topology.
The
Any typeface classification.
No fit typeface classification.
Text display typeface classification.
Script (or hand written) typeface classification.
Decorative typeface classification.
Symbol typeface classification.
Pictorial (or symbol) typeface classification.
The
Any fill.
No fit for fill.
The fill is the standard solid fill.
No fill.
The fill is patterned fill.
The fill is complex fill.
The fill is shaped fill.
The fill is drawn distressed.
The
Any finials.
No fit for finials.
No loops.
No closed loops.
No open loops.
Sharp with no loops.
Sharp with closed loops.
Sharp with open loops.
Tapered with no loops.
Tapered with closed loops.
Tapered with open loops.
Round with no loops.
Round with closed loops.
Round with open loops.
The
Any letterform.
No fit letterform.
Normal contact letterform.
Normal weighted letterform.
Normal boxed letterform.
Normal flattened letterform.
Normal rounded letterform.
Normal off-center letterform.
Normal square letterform.
Oblique contact letterform.
Oblique weighted letterform.
Oblique boxed letterform.
Oblique flattened letterform.
Oblique rounded letterform.
Oblique off-center letterform.
Oblique square letterform.
The
Any lining.
No fit for lining.
No lining.
The lining is inline.
The lining is outline.
The lining is engraved.
The lining is shadowed.
The lining is relief.
The lining is backdrop.
The
Any midline.
No fit midline.
Standard trimmed midline.
Standard pointed midline.
Standard serifed midline.
High trimmed midline.
High pointed midline.
High serifed midline.
Constant trimmed midline.
Constant pointed midline.
Constant serifed midline.
Low trimmed midline.
Low pointed midline.
Low serifed midline.
The
Any proportion for the text.
No fit proportion for the text.
Old style proportion for the text.
Modern proportion for the text.
Extra width proportion for the text.
Expanded proportion for the text.
Condensed proportion for the text.
Very expanded proportion for the text.
Very condensed proportion for the text.
Monospaced proportion for the text.
The
Any script form.
No fit for script form.
Script form is upright with no wrapping.
Script form is upright with some wrapping.
Script form is upright with more wrapping.
Script form is upright with extreme wrapping.
Script form is oblique with no wrapping.
Script form is oblique with some wrapping.
Script form is oblique with more wrapping.
Script form is oblique with extreme wrapping.
Script form is exaggerated with no wrapping.
Script form is exaggerated with some wrapping.
Script form is exaggerated with more wrapping.
Script form is exaggerated with extreme wrapping.
The
Any script topology.
No fit for script topology.
Script topology is roman disconnected.
Script topology is roman trailing.
Script topology is roman connected.
Script topology is cursive disconnected.
Script topology is cursive trailing.
Script topology is cursive connected.
Script topology is black-letter disconnected.
Script topology is black-letter trailing.
Script topology is black-letter connected.
The
Any appearance of the serif text.
No fit appearance of the serif text.
Cove appearance of the serif text.
Obtuse cove appearance of the serif text.
Square cove appearance of the serif text.
Obtuse square cove appearance of the serif text.
Square appearance of the serif text.
Thin appearance of the serif text.
Oval appearance of the serif text.
Exaggerated appearance of the serif text.
Triangle appearance of the serif text.
Normal sans appearance of the serif text.
Obtuse sans appearance of the serif text.
Perpendicular sans appearance of the serif text.
Flared appearance of the serif text.
Rounded appearance of the serif text.
Script appearance of the serif text.
Perpendicular sans appearance of the serif text.
Oval appearance of the serif text.
The
Any spacing.
No fit for spacing.
Spacing is proportional.
Spacing is monospace.
The
Any stroke variation for text characters.
No fit stroke variation for text characters.
No stroke variation for text characters.
The stroke variation for text characters is gradual diagonal.
The stroke variation for text characters is gradual transitional.
The stroke variation for text characters is gradual vertical.
The stroke variation for text characters is gradual horizontal.
The stroke variation for text characters is rapid vertical.
The stroke variation for text characters is rapid horizontal.
The stroke variation for text characters is instant vertical.
The stroke variation for text characters is instant horizontal.
The
Any aspect ratio of symbolic characters.
No fit for aspect ratio of symbolic characters.
No width aspect ratio of symbolic characters.
Exceptionally wide symbolic characters.
Super wide symbolic characters.
Very wide symbolic characters.
Wide symbolic characters.
Normal aspect ratio of symbolic characters.
Narrow symbolic characters.
Very narrow symbolic characters.
The
Any kind of symbol set.
No fit for the kind of symbol set.
The kind of symbol set is montages.
The kind of symbol set is pictures.
The kind of symbol set is shapes.
The kind of symbol set is scientific symbols.
The kind of symbol set is music symbols.
The kind of symbol set is expert symbols.
The kind of symbol set is patterns.
The kind of symbol set is boarders.
The kind of symbol set is icons.
The kind of symbol set is logos.
The kind of symbol set is industry specific.
The
Any kind of tool.
No fit for the kind of tool.
Flat NIB tool.
Pressure point tool.
Engraved tool.
Ball tool.
Brush tool.
Rough tool.
Felt-pen-brush-tip tool.
Wild-brush tool.
The
The
Any weight.
No fit weight.
Very light weight.
Light weight.
Thin weight.
Book weight.
Medium weight.
Demi weight.
Bold weight.
Heavy weight.
Black weight.
Extra black weight.
Extra black weight.
The
Any xascent.
No fit for xascent.
Very low xascent.
Low xascent.
Medium xascent.
High xascent.
Very high xascent.
The
Any xheight.
No fit xheight.
Constant small xheight.
Constant standard xheight.
Constant large xheight.
Ducking small xheight.
Ducking standard xheight.
Ducking large xheight.
Constant standard xheight.
Ducking standard xheight.
Specifies the alignment of paragraph text along the flow direction axis, relative to the top and bottom of the flow's layout box.
The top of the text flow is aligned to the top edge of the layout box.
The bottom of the text flow is aligned to the bottom edge of the layout box.
The center of the flow is aligned to the center of the layout box.
Represents the internal structure of a device pixel (that is, the physical arrangement of red, green, and blue color components) that is assumed for purposes of rendering text.
The red, green, and blue color components of each pixel are assumed to occupy the same point.
Each pixel is composed of three vertical stripes, with red on the left, green in the center, and blue on the right. This is the most common pixel geometry for LCD monitors.
Each pixel is composed of three vertical stripes, with blue on the left, green in the center, and red on the right.
Specifies the direction in which reading progresses.
Note??Indicates that reading progresses from left to right.
Indicates that reading progresses from right to left.
Indicates that reading progresses from top to bottom.
Indicates that reading progresses from bottom to top.
Represents a method of rendering glyphs.
Note?? This topic is aboutRepresents a method of rendering glyphs.
Note?? This topic is aboutIndicates additional shaping requirements for text.
Indicates that there is no additional shaping requirements for text. Text is shaped with the writing system default behavior.
Indicates that text should leave no visible control or format control characters.
Specifies the alignment of paragraph text along the reading direction axis, relative to the leading and trailing edge of the layout box.
The leading edge of the paragraph text is aligned to the leading edge of the layout box.
The trailing edge of the paragraph text is aligned to the trailing edge of the layout box.
The center of the paragraph text is aligned to the center of the layout box.
Align text to the leading side, and also justify text to fill the lines.
The
ClearType antialiasing computes coverage independently for the red, green, and blue color elements of each pixel. This allows for more detail than conventional antialiasing. However, because there is no one alpha value for each pixel, ClearType is not suitable for rendering text onto a transparent intermediate bitmap.
Grayscale antialiasing computes one coverage value for each pixel. Because the alpha value of each pixel is well-defined, text can be rendered onto a transparent bitmap, which can then be composited with other content.
Note??Grayscale rendering withIdentifies a type of alpha texture.
An alpha texture is a bitmap of alpha values, each representing opacity of a pixel or subpixel.
Specifies an alpha texture for aliased text rendering (that is, each pixel is either fully opaque or fully transparent), with one byte per pixel.
Specifies an alpha texture for ClearType text rendering, with three bytes per pixel in the horizontal dimension and one byte per pixel in the vertical dimension.
Specifies the text granularity used to trim text overflowing the layout box.
No trimming occurs. Text flows beyond the layout width.
Trimming occurs at a character cluster boundary.
Trimming occurs at a word boundary.
The
The client specifies a
The default glyph orientation. In vertical layout, naturally horizontal scripts (Latin, Thai, Arabic, Devanagari) rotate 90 degrees clockwise, while ideographic scripts (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) remain upright, 0 degrees.
Stacked glyph orientation. Ideographic scripts and scripts that permit stacking (Latin, Hebrew) are stacked in vertical reading layout. Connected scripts (Arabic, Syriac, 'Phags-pa, Ogham), which would otherwise look broken if glyphs were kept at 0 degrees, remain connected and rotate.
Specifies the word wrapping to be used in a particular multiline paragraph.
Note??Indicates that words are broken across lines to avoid text overflowing the layout box.
Indicates that words are kept within the same line even when it overflows the layout box. This option is often used with scrolling to reveal overflow text.
Words are broken across lines to avoid text overflowing the layout box. Emergency wrapping occurs if the word is larger than the maximum width.
When emergency wrapping, only wrap whole words, never breaking words when the layout width is too small for even a single word.
Wrap between any valid character clusters.
Creates a DirectWrite factory object that is used for subsequent creation of individual DirectWrite objects.
A value that specifies whether the factory object will be shared or isolated.
A
An address of a reference to the newly created DirectWrite factory object.
If this function succeeds, it returns
This function creates a DirectWrite factory object that is used for subsequent creation of individual DirectWrite objects. DirectWrite factory contains internal state data such as font loader registration and cached font data. In most cases it is recommended you use the shared factory object, because it allows multiple components that use DirectWrite to share internal DirectWrite state data, and thereby reduce memory usage. However, there are cases when it is desirable to reduce the impact of a component, such as a plug-in from an untrusted source, on the rest of the process, by sandboxing and isolating it from the rest of the process components. In such cases, it is recommended you use an isolated factory for the sandboxed component.
The following example shows how to create a shared DirectWrite factory.
if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr =( , __uuidof( ), reinterpret_cast< **>(&pDWriteFactory_) ); }
Represents an absolute reference to a font face which contains font face type, appropriate file references, face identification data and various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines.
Encapsulates a 32-bit device independent bitmap and device context, which you can use for rendering glyphs.
Gets or sets the current text antialiasing mode of the bitmap render target.
Gets the current text antialiasing mode of the bitmap render target.
Returns a
Sets the current text antialiasing mode of the bitmap render target.
A
Returns
The antialiasing mode of a newly-created bitmap render target defaults to
This interface allows the application to enumerate through the color glyph runs. The enumerator enumerates the layers in a back to front order for appropriate layering.
Returns the current glyph run of the enumerator.
Move to the next glyph run in the enumerator.
Returns TRUE if there is a next glyph run.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns the current glyph run of the enumerator.
A reference to the current glyph run.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Enumerator for an ordered collection of color glyph runs.
Gets the current color glyph run.
Gets the current color glyph run.
Receives a reference to the color glyph run. The reference remains valid until the next call to MoveNext or until the interface is released.
Standard
The root factory interface for all DirectWrite objects.
Creates a font fallback object from the system font fallback list.
Creates a font fallback object from the system font fallback list.
Contains an address of a reference to the newly created font fallback object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a font fallback builder object.
A font fall back builder allows you to create Unicode font fallback mappings and create a font fall back object from those mappings.
Contains an address of a reference to the newly created font fallback builder object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method is called on a glyph run to translate it in to multiple color glyph runs.
The horizontal baseline origin of the original glyph run.
The vertical baseline origin of the original glyph run.
Original glyph run containing monochrome glyph IDs.
Optional glyph run description.
Measuring mode used to compute glyph positions if the run contains color glyphs.
World transform multiplied by any DPI scaling. This is needed to compute glyph positions if the run contains color glyphs and the measuring mode is not
Zero-based index of the color palette to use. Valid indices are less than the number of palettes in the font, as returned by
If the original glyph run contains color glyphs, this parameter receives a reference to an
If this method succeeds, it returns
If the code calls this method with a glyph run that contains no color information, the method returns DWRITE_E_NOCOLOR to let the application know that it can just draw the original glyph run. If the glyph run contains color information, the function returns an object that can be enumerated through to expose runs and associated colors. The application then calls DrawGlyphRun with each of the returned glyph runs and foreground colors.
Creates a rendering parameters object with the specified properties.
The gamma value used for gamma correction, which must be greater than zero and cannot exceed 256.
The amount of contrast enhancement, zero or greater.
The amount of contrast enhancement, zero or greater.
The degree of ClearType level, from 0.0f (no ClearType) to 1.0f (full ClearType).
The geometry of a device pixel.
Method of rendering glyphs. In most cases, this should be
How to grid fit glyph outlines. In most cases, this should be DWRITE_GRID_FIT_DEFAULT to automatically choose an appropriate mode.
Holds the newly created rendering parameters object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a glyph run analysis object, which encapsulates information used to render a glyph run.
Structure specifying the properties of the glyph run.
Optional transform applied to the glyphs and their positions. This transform is applied after the scaling specified by the emSize and pixelsPerDip.
Specifies the rendering mode, which must be one of the raster rendering modes (i.e., not default and not outline).
Specifies the method to measure glyphs.
How to grid-fit glyph outlines. This must be non-default.
Specifies the antialias mode.
Horizontal position of the baseline origin, in DIPs.
Vertical position of the baseline origin, in DIPs.
Receives a reference to the newly created object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Used to create all subsequent DirectWrite objects. This interface is the root factory interface for all DirectWrite objects.
Create an
if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr =( , __uuidof( ), reinterpret_cast< **>(&pDWriteFactory_) ); }
An
Retrieves the list of system fonts.
Gets the font download queue associated with this factory object.
Creates a glyph-run-analysis object that encapsulates info that DirectWrite uses to render a glyph run.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a rendering parameters object with the specified properties.
The gamma value used for gamma correction, which must be greater than zero and cannot exceed 256.
The amount of contrast enhancement, zero or greater.
The amount of contrast enhancement to use for grayscale antialiasing, zero or greater.
The degree of ClearType level, from 0.0f (no ClearType) to 1.0f (full ClearType).
A
A
A
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a reference to a font given a full path.
Absolute file path. Subsequent operations on the constructed object may fail if the user provided filePath doesn't correspond to a valid file on the disk.
The zero based index of a font face in cases when the font files contain a collection of font faces. If the font files contain a single face, this value should be zero.
Font face simulation flags for algorithmic emboldening and italicization.
Contains newly created font face reference object, or nullptr in case of failure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a reference to a font given a full path.
Absolute file path. Subsequent operations on the constructed object may fail if the user provided filePath doesn't correspond to a valid file on the disk.
Last modified time of the input file path. If the parameter is omitted, the function will access the font file to obtain its last write time, so the clients are encouraged to specify this value to avoid extra disk access. Subsequent operations on the constructed object may fail if the user provided lastWriteTime doesn't match the file on the disk.
The zero based index of a font face in cases when the font files contain a collection of font faces. If the font files contain a single face, this value should be zero.
Font face simulation flags for algorithmic emboldening and italicization.
Contains newly created font face reference object, or nullptr in case of failure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the list of system fonts.
Holds the newly created font set object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an empty font set builder to add font face references and create a custom font set.
Holds the newly created font set builder object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Create a weight/width/slope tree from a set of fonts.
A set of fonts to use to build the collection.
Holds the newly created font collection object, or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a weight/width/slope tree of system fonts.
If this parameter is TRUE, the function performs an immediate check for changes to the set of system fonts. If this parameter is
Holds the newly created font collection object, or
If this parameter is TRUE, the function performs an immediate check for changes to the set of system fonts. If this parameter is
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the font download queue associated with this factory object.
Receives a reference to the font download queue interface.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The root factory interface for all DirectWrite objects.
Translates a glyph run to a sequence of color glyph runs, which can be rendered to produce a color representation of the original "base" run.
Horizontal and vertical origin of the base glyph run in pre-transform coordinates.
Pointer to the original "base" glyph run.
Optional glyph run description.
Which data formats the runs should be split into.
Measuring mode, needed to compute the origins of each glyph.
Matrix converting from the client's coordinate space to device coordinates (pixels), i.e., the world transform multiplied by any DPI scaling.
Zero-based index of the color palette to use. Valid indices are less than the number of palettes in the font, as returned by
If the function succeeds, receives a reference to an enumerator object that can be used to obtain the color glyph runs. If the base run has no color glyphs, then the output reference is
Returns DWRITE_E_NOCOLOR if the font has no color information, the glyph run does not contain any color glyphs, or the specified color palette index is out of range. In this case, the client should render the original glyph run. Otherwise, returns a standard
Calling
Converts glyph run placements to glyph origins.
Structure containing the properties of the glyph run.
The position of the baseline origin, in DIPs, relative to the upper-left corner of the DIB.
On return contains the glyph origins for the glyphrun.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The transform and DPI have no effect on the origin scaling. They are solely used to compute glyph advances when not supplied and align glyphs in pixel aligned measuring modes.
Converts glyph run placements to glyph origins.
Structure containing the properties of the glyph run.
The measuring method for glyphs in the run, used with the other properties to determine the rendering mode.
The position of the baseline origin, in DIPs, relative to the upper-left corner of the DIB.
World transform multiplied by any DPI scaling. This is needed to compute glyph positions if the run contains color glyphs and the measuring mode is not
On return contains the glyph origins for the glyphrun.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The transform and DPI have no effect on the origin scaling. They are solely used to compute glyph advances when not supplied and align glyphs in pixel aligned measuring modes.
Used to create all subsequent DirectWrite objects. This interface is the root factory interface for all DirectWrite objects.
Create an
if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr =( , __uuidof( ), reinterpret_cast< **>(&pDWriteFactory_) ); }
An
This topic describes various ways in which you can use custom fonts in your app.
This topic describes various ways in which you can use custom fonts in your app.
Represents a physical font in a font collection. This interface is used to create font faces from physical fonts, or to retrieve information such as font face metrics or face names from existing font faces.
Gets the font family to which the specified font belongs.
Gets the weight, or stroke thickness, of the specified font.
Gets the stretch, or width, of the specified font.
Gets the style, or slope, of the specified font.
Determines whether the font is a symbol font.
Gets a localized strings collection containing the face names for the font (such as Regular or Bold), indexed by locale name.
Gets a value that indicates what simulations are applied to the specified font.
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a font face and are used by applications for layout calculations.
Gets the font family to which the specified font belongs.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the font family object to which the specified font belongs.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the weight, or stroke thickness, of the specified font.
A value that indicates the weight for the specified font.
Gets the stretch, or width, of the specified font.
A value that indicates the type of stretch, or width, applied to the specified font.
Gets the style, or slope, of the specified font.
A value that indicates the type of style, or slope, of the specified font.
Determines whether the font is a symbol font.
TRUE if the font is a symbol font; otherwise,
Gets a localized strings collection containing the face names for the font (such as Regular or Bold), indexed by locale name.
When this method returns, contains an address to a reference to the newly created localized strings object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets a localized strings collection containing the specified informational strings, indexed by locale name.
A value that identifies the informational string to get. For example,
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created localized strings object.
When this method returns, TRUE if the font contains the specified string ID; otherwise,
If the font does not contain the string specified by informationalStringID, the return value is
Gets a value that indicates what simulations are applied to the specified font.
A value that indicates one or more of the types of simulations (none, bold, or oblique) applied to the specified font.
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a font face and are used by applications for layout calculations.
When this method returns, contains a structure that has font metrics for the current font face. The metrics returned by this function are in font design units.
Determines whether the font supports a specified character.
A Unicode (UCS-4) character value for the method to inspect.
When this method returns, TRUE if the font supports the specified character; otherwise,
Creates a font face object for the font.
When this method returns, contains an address of a reference to the newly created font face object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a physical font in a font collection.
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a font face and are used by applications for layout calculations.
Gets the PANOSE values from the font and is used for font selection and matching.
If the font has no PANOSE values, they are set to 'any' (0) and DirectWrite doesn't simulate those values.
Determines if the font is monospaced, that is, the characters are the same fixed-pitch width (non-proportional).
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a font face and are used by applications for layout calculations.
A filled
Gets the PANOSE values from the font and is used for font selection and matching.
A reference to the
If the font has no PANOSE values, they are set to 'any' (0) and DirectWrite doesn't simulate those values.
Retrieves the list of character ranges supported by a font.
The maximum number of character ranges passed in from the client.
An array of
A reference to the actual number of character ranges, regardless of the maximum count.
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The method executed successfully. |
| The buffer is too small. The actualRangeCount was more than the maxRangeCount. |
?
The list of character ranges supported by a font, is useful for scenarios like character picking, glyph display, and efficient font selection lookup. GetUnicodeRanges is similar to GDI's GetFontUnicodeRanges, except that it returns the full Unicode range, not just 16-bit UCS-2.
These ranges are from the cmap, not the OS/2::ulCodePageRange1.
If this method is unavailable, you can use the
The
Determines if the font is monospaced, that is, the characters are the same fixed-pitch width (non-proportional).
Returns true if the font is monospaced, else it returns false.
Represents a physical font in a font collection.
This interface adds the ability to check if a color rendering path is potentially necessary.
Enables determining if a color rendering path is potentially necessary.
Enables determining if a color rendering path is potentially necessary.
Returns TRUE if the font has color information (COLR and CPAL tables); otherwise
Represents a font in a font collection.
Gets a font face reference that identifies this font.
Gets the current locality of the font.
For fully local files, the result will always be
Creates a font face object for the font.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method returns DWRITE_E_REMOTEFONT if it could not construct a remote font.
Compares two instances of font references for equality.
A reference to a
Returns whether the two instances of font references are equal. Returns TRUE if the two instances are equal; otherwise,
Gets a font face reference that identifies this font.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the current locality of the font.
Returns the current locality of the font.
For fully local files, the result will always be
An object that encapsulates a set of fonts, such as the set of fonts installed on the system, or the set of fonts in a particular directory. The font collection API can be used to discover what font families and fonts are available, and to obtain some metadata about the fonts.
Gets the underlying font set used by this collection.
Gets the underlying font set used by this collection.
Returns the font set used by the collection.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Application-defined callback interface that receives notifications from the font download queue (
The DownloadCompleted method is called back on an arbitrary thread when a download operation ends.
Pointer to the download queue interface on which the BeginDownload method was called.
Optional context object that was passed to BeginDownload. AddRef is called on the context object by BeginDownload and Release is called after the DownloadCompleted method returns.
Result of the download operation.
Determines whether the download queue is empty. Note that the queue does not include requests that are already being downloaded. Calling BeginDownload clears the queue.
Gets the current generation number of the download queue, which is incremented every time after a download completes, whether failed or successful. This cookie value can be compared against cached data to determine if it is stale.
Registers a client-defined listener object that receives download notifications. All registered listener's DownloadCompleted will be called after BeginDownload completes.
If this method succeeds, it returns
An
Unregisters a notification handler that was previously registered using AddListener.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Determines whether the download queue is empty. Note that the queue does not include requests that are already being downloaded. Calling BeginDownload clears the queue.
TRUE if the queue is empty,
Begins an asynchronous download operation. The download operation executes in the background until it completes or is cancelled by a CancelDownload call.
Returns
BeginDownload removes all download requests from the queue, transferring them to a background download operation. If any previous downloads are still ongoing when BeginDownload is called again, the new download does not complete until the previous downloads have finished. If the queue is empty and no active downloads are pending, the DownloadCompleted callback is called immediately with DWRITE_DOWNLOAD_RESULT_NONE.
Removes all download requests from the queue and cancels any active download operations.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the current generation number of the download queue, which is incremented every time after a download completes, whether failed or successful. This cookie value can be compared against cached data to determine if it is stale.
The current generation number of the download queue.
Represents an absolute reference to a font face.
This interface contains the font face type, appropriate file references, and face identification data.
You obtain various font data like metrics, names, and glyph outlines from the
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a font face and are used by applications for layout calculations.
Gets caret metrics for the font in design units.
Caret metrics are used by text editors for drawing the correct caret placement and slant.
Determines whether the font of a text range is monospaced, that is, the font characters are the same fixed-pitch width.
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a font face and are used by applications for layout calculations.
A filled
Obtains design units and common metrics for the font face. These metrics are applicable to all the glyphs within a fontface and are used by applications for layout calculations.
The logical size of the font in DIP units.
The number of physical pixels per DIP.
An optional transform applied to the glyphs and their positions. This transform is applied after the scaling specified by the font size and pixelsPerDip.
A reference to a
Standard
Gets caret metrics for the font in design units.
A reference to the
Caret metrics are used by text editors for drawing the correct caret placement and slant.
Retrieves a list of character ranges supported by a font.
Maximum number of character ranges passed in from the client.
An array of
A reference to the actual number of character ranges, regardless of the maximum count.
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The method executed successfully. |
| The buffer is too small. The actualRangeCount was more than the maxRangeCount. |
?
A list of character ranges supported by the font is useful for scenarios like character picking, glyph display, and efficient font selection lookup. This is similar to GDI's GetFontUnicodeRanges, except that it returns the full Unicode range, not just 16-bit UCS-2.
These ranges are from the cmap, not the OS/2::ulCodePageRange1.
If this method is unavailable, you can use the
The
Determines whether the font of a text range is monospaced, that is, the font characters are the same fixed-pitch width.
Returns TRUE if the font is monospaced, otherwise it returns
Retrieves the advances in design units for a sequences of glyphs.
The number of glyphs to retrieve advances for.
An array of glyph id's to retrieve advances for.
The returned advances in font design units for each glyph.
Retrieve the glyph's vertical advance height rather than horizontal advance widths.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This is equivalent to calling GetGlyphMetrics and using only the advance width and height.
Returns the pixel-aligned advances for a sequences of glyphs.
Logical size of the font in DIP units. A DIP ("device-independent pixel") equals 1/96 inch.
Number of physical pixels per DIP. For example, if the DPI of the rendering surface is 96 this value is 1.0f. If the DPI is 120, this value is 120.0f/96.
Optional transform applied to the glyphs and their positions. This transform is applied after the scaling specified by the font size and pixelsPerDip.
When
Retrieve the glyph's vertical advances rather than horizontal advances.
Total glyphs to retrieve adjustments for.
An array of glyph id's to retrieve advances.
The returned advances in font design units for each glyph.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This is equivalent to calling GetGdiCompatibleGlyphMetrics and using only the advance width and height.
Like GetGdiCompatibleGlyphMetrics, these are in design units, meaning they must be scaled down by DWRITE_FONT_METRICS::designUnitsPerEm.
Retrieves the kerning pair adjustments from the font's kern table.
Number of glyphs to retrieve adjustments for.
An array of glyph id's to retrieve adjustments for.
The advances, returned in font design units, for each glyph. The last glyph adjustment is zero.
If this method succeeds, it returns
GetKerningPairAdjustments isn't a direct replacement for GDI's character based GetKerningPairs, but it serves the same role, without the client needing to cache them locally. GetKerningPairAdjustments also uses glyph id's directly rather than UCS-2 characters (how the kern table actually stores them), which avoids glyph collapse and ambiguity, such as the dash and hyphen, or space and non-breaking space.
Newer fonts may have only GPOS kerning instead of the legacy pair-table kerning. Such fonts, like Gabriola, will only return 0's for adjustments. GetKerningPairAdjustments doesn't virtualize and flatten these GPOS entries into kerning pairs.
You can realize a performance benefit by calling
Determines whether the font supports pair-kerning.
Returns TRUE if the font supports kerning pairs, otherwise
If the font doesn't support pair table kerning, you don't need to call
Determines the recommended rendering mode for the font, using the specified size and rendering parameters.
The logical size of the font in DIP units. A DIP ("device-independent pixel") equals 1/96 inch.
The number of physical pixels per DIP in a horizontal position. For example, if the DPI of the rendering surface is 96, this value is 1.0f. If the DPI is 120, this value is 120.0f/96.
The number of physical pixels per DIP in a vertical position. For example, if the DPI of the rendering surface is 96, this value is 1.0f. If the DPI is 120, this value is 120.0f/96.
Specifies the world transform.
Whether the glyphs in the run are sideways or not.
A
The measuring method that will be used for glyphs in the font. Renderer implementations may choose different rendering modes for different measuring methods, for example:
When this method returns, contains a value that indicates the recommended rendering mode to use.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method should be used to determine the actual rendering mode in cases where the rendering mode of the rendering params object is
Retrieves the vertical forms of the nominal glyphs retrieved from GetGlyphIndices.
The number of glyphs to retrieve.
Original glyph indices from cmap.
The vertical form of glyph indices.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The retrieval uses the font's 'vert' table. This is used in CJK vertical layout so the correct characters are shown.
Call GetGlyphIndices to get the nominal glyph indices, followed by calling this to remap the to the substituted forms, when the run is sideways, and the font has vertical glyph variants. See HasVerticalGlyphVariants for more info.
Determines whether the font has any vertical glyph variants.
Returns TRUE if the font contains vertical glyph variants, otherwise
For OpenType fonts, HasVerticalGlyphVariants returns TRUE if the font contains a "vert" feature.
Represents an absolute reference to a font face.
This interface contains the font face type, appropriate file references, and face identification data.
You obtain various font data like metrics, names, and glyph outlines from the
This interface adds the ability to check if a color rendering path is potentially necessary.
Allows you to determine if a color rendering path is potentially necessary.
Gets the number of color palettes defined by the font.
Get the number of entries in each color palette.
Allows you to determine if a color rendering path is potentially necessary.
Returns TRUE if a color rendering path is potentially necessary.
Gets the number of color palettes defined by the font.
The return value is zero if the font has no color information. Color fonts are required to define at least one palette, with palette index zero reserved as the default palette.
Get the number of entries in each color palette.
The number of entries in each color palette. All color palettes in a font have the same number of palette entries. The return value is zero if the font has no color information.
Gets color values from the font's color palette.
Zero-based index of the color palette. If the font does not have a palette with the specified index, the method returns DWRITE_E_NOCOLOR.
Zero-based index of the first palette entry to read.
Number of palette entries to read.
Array that receives the color values.
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The sum of firstEntryIndex and entryCount is greater than the actual number of palette entries that's returned by the GetPaletteEntryCount method. |
| The font doesn't have a palette with the specified palette index. |
?
Determines the recommended text rendering and grid-fit mode to be used based on the font, size, world transform, and measuring mode.
Logical font size in DIPs.
Number of pixels per logical inch in the horizontal direction.
Number of pixels per logical inch in the vertical direction.
A
Specifies whether the font is sideways. TRUE if the font is sideways; otherwise,
A
A
A reference to a
A reference to a variable that receives a
A reference to a variable that receives a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents an absolute reference to a font face.
Gets a font face reference that identifies this font.
Gets the PANOSE values from the font, used for font selection and matching.
This method doesn't simulate these values, such as substituting a weight or proportion inferred on other values. If the font doesn't specify them, they are all set to 'any' (0).
Gets the weight of this font.
Gets the stretch (also known as width) of this font.
Gets the style (also known as slope) of this font.
Creates a localized strings object that contains the family names for the font family, indexed by locale name.
Creates a localized strings object that contains the face names for the font (for example, Regular or Bold), indexed by locale name.
Gets a font face reference that identifies this font.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the PANOSE values from the font, used for font selection and matching.
A reference to a
This method doesn't simulate these values, such as substituting a weight or proportion inferred on other values. If the font doesn't specify them, they are all set to 'any' (0).
Gets the weight of this font.
Returns a
Gets the stretch (also known as width) of this font.
Returns a
Gets the style (also known as slope) of this font.
Returns a
Creates a localized strings object that contains the family names for the font family, indexed by locale name.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a localized strings object that contains the face names for the font (for example, Regular or Bold), indexed by locale name.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets a localized strings collection that contains the specified informational strings, indexed by locale name.
A
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
A reference to a variable that receives whether the font contains the specified string ID. TRUE if the font contains the specified string ID; otherwise,
If the font doesn't contain the specified string, the return value is
Determines whether the font supports the specified character.
A Unicode (UCS-4) character value.
Returns whether the font supports the specified character. Returns TRUE if the font has the specified character; otherwise,
Determines the recommended text rendering and grid-fit mode to be used based on the font, size, world transform, and measuring mode.
Logical font size in DIPs.
Number of pixels per logical inch in the horizontal direction.
Number of pixels per logical inch in the vertical direction.
A
Specifies whether the font is sideways. TRUE if the font is sideways; otherwise,
A
A
A reference to a
A reference to a variable that receives a
A reference to a variable that receives a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Determines whether the character is locally downloaded from the font.
A Unicode (UCS-4) character value.
Returns TRUE if the font has the specified character locally available,
Determines whether the glyph is locally downloaded from the font.
Glyph identifier.
Returns TRUE if the font has the specified glyph locally available.
Determines whether the specified characters are local.
Array of characters.
The number of elements in the character array.
Specifies whether to enqueue a download request if any of the specified characters are not local.
Receives TRUE if all of the specified characters are local,
If this method succeeds, it returns
Determines whether the specified glyphs are local.
Array of glyph indices.
The number of elements in the glyph index array.
Specifies whether to enqueue a download request if any of the specified glyphs are not local.
Receives TRUE if all of the specified glyphs are local,
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents an absolute reference to a font face. It contains font face type, appropriate file references and face identification data. Various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines are obtained from
Gets the available image formats of a specific glyph and ppem.
Glyphs often have at least TrueType or CFF outlines, but they may also have SVG outlines, or they may have only bitmaps with no TrueType/CFF outlines. Some image formats, notably the PNG/JPEG ones, are size specific and will return no match when there isn't an entry in that size range.
Glyph ids beyond the glyph count return
Gets the available image formats of a specific glyph and ppem.
The ID of the glyph.
Specifies which formats are supported in the font.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Glyphs often have at least TrueType or CFF outlines, but they may also have SVG outlines, or they may have only bitmaps with no TrueType/CFF outlines. Some image formats, notably the PNG/JPEG ones, are size specific and will return no match when there isn't an entry in that size range.
Glyph ids beyond the glyph count return
Gets the available image formats of a specific glyph and ppem.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Glyphs often have at least TrueType or CFF outlines, but they may also have SVG outlines, or they may have only bitmaps with no TrueType/CFF outlines. Some image formats, notably the PNG/JPEG ones, are size specific and will return no match when there isn't an entry in that size range.
Glyph ids beyond the glyph count return
Gets a reference to the glyph data based on the desired image format.
The ID of the glyph to retrieve image data for.
Requested pixels per em.
Specifies which formats are supported in the font.
On return contains data for a glyph.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The glyphDataContext must be released via ReleaseGlyphImageData when done if the data is not empty, similar to
The DWRITE_GLYPH_IMAGE_DATA::uniqueDataId is valuable for caching purposes so that if the same resource is returned more than once, an existing resource can be quickly retrieved rather than needing to reparse or decompress the data.
The function only returns SVG or raster data - requesting TrueType/CFF/COLR data returns DWRITE_E_INVALIDARG. Those must be drawn via DrawGlyphRun or queried using GetGlyphOutline instead. Exactly one format may be requested or else the function returns DWRITE_E_INVALIDARG. If the glyph does not have that format, the call is not an error, but the function returns empty data.
Releases the table data obtained from ReadGlyphData.
Opaque context from ReadGlyphData.
Represents a reference to a font face. A uniquely identifying reference to a font, from which you can create a font face to query font metrics and use for rendering. A font face reference consists of a font file, font face index, and font face simulation. The file data may or may not be physically present on the local machine yet.
Obtains the zero-based index of the font face in its font file or files. If the font files contain a single face, the return value is zero.
Obtains the algorithmic style simulation flags of a font face.
Obtains the font file representing a font face.
Get the local size of the font face in bytes, which will always be less than or equal to GetFullSize. If the locality is remote, this value is zero. If full, this value will equal GetFileSize.
Get the total size of the font face in bytes.
Get the last modified date.
Get the locality of this font face reference.
You can always successfully create a font face from a fully local font. Attempting to create a font face on a remote or partially local font may fail with DWRITE_E_REMOTEFONT. This function may change between calls depending on background downloads and whether cached data expires.
Creates a font face from the reference for use with layout, shaping, or rendering.
Newly created font face object, or nullptr in the case of failure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This function can fail with DWRITE_E_REMOTEFONT if the font is not local.
Creates a font face with alternate font simulations, for example, to explicitly simulate a bold font face out of a regular variant.
Font face simulation flags for algorithmic emboldening and italicization.
Newly created font face object, or nullptr in the case of failure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This function can fail with DWRITE_E_REMOTEFONT if the font is not local.
Obtains the zero-based index of the font face in its font file or files. If the font files contain a single face, the return value is zero.
the zero-based index of the font face in its font file or files. If the font files contain a single face, the return value is zero.
Obtains the algorithmic style simulation flags of a font face.
Returns the algorithmic style simulation flags of a font face.
Obtains the font file representing a font face.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Get the local size of the font face in bytes, which will always be less than or equal to GetFullSize. If the locality is remote, this value is zero. If full, this value will equal GetFileSize.
the local size of the font face in bytes, which will always be less than or equal to GetFullSize. If the locality is remote, this value is zero. If full, this value will equal GetFileSize.
Get the total size of the font face in bytes.
Returns the total size of the font face in bytes. If the locality is remote, this value is unknown and will be zero.
Get the last modified date.
Returns the last modified date. The time may be zero if the font file loader does not expose file time.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Get the locality of this font face reference.
Returns the locality of this font face reference.
You can always successfully create a font face from a fully local font. Attempting to create a font face on a remote or partially local font may fail with DWRITE_E_REMOTEFONT. This function may change between calls depending on background downloads and whether cached data expires.
Adds a request to the font download queue (
If this method succeeds, it returns
Adds a request to the font download queue (
If this method succeeds, it returns
Downloading a character involves downloading every glyph it depends on directly or indirectly, via font tables (cmap, GSUB, COLR, glyf).
Adds a request to the font download queue (
If this method succeeds, it returns
Downloading a glyph involves downloading any other glyphs it depends on from the font tables (GSUB, COLR, glyf).
Adds a request to the font download queue (
If this method succeeds, it returns
Allows you to create Unicode font fallback mappings and create a font fall back object from those mappings.
Appends a single mapping to the list. Call this once for each additional mapping.
Unicode ranges that apply to this mapping.
Number of Unicode ranges.
List of target family name strings.
Number of target family names.
Optional explicit font collection for this mapping.
Locale of the context.
Base family name to match against, if applicable.
Scale factor to multiply the result target font by.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Add all the mappings from an existing font fallback object.
An existing font fallback object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates the finalized fallback object from the mappings added.
Contains an address of a reference to the created fallback list.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a family of related fonts.
A font family is a set of fonts that share the same family name, such as "Times New Roman", but that differ in features. These feature differences include style, such as italic, and weight, such as bold. The following illustration shows examples of fonts that are members of the "Times New Roman" font family.
An
* pFontFamily = null ; // Get the font family. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFontCollection->GetFontFamily(i, &pFontFamily); }
The font family name is used to specify the font family for text layout and text format objects. You can get a list of localized font family names from an
* pFamilyNames = null ; // Get a list of localized strings for the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFontFamily->GetFamilyNames(&pFamilyNames); }
Creates a localized strings object that contains the family names for the font family, indexed by locale name.
The following code example shows how to get the font family name from a
* pFamilyNames = null ; // Get a list of localized strings for the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFontFamily->GetFamilyNames(&pFamilyNames); } UINT32 index = 0;exists = false; wchar_t localeName[LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { // Get the default locale for this user. int defaultLocaleSuccess = GetUserDefaultLocaleName(localeName, LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH); // If the default locale is returned, find that locale name, otherwise use "en-us". if (defaultLocaleSuccess) { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(localeName, &index, &exists); } if (SUCCEEDED(hr) && !exists) // if the above find did not find a match, retry with US English { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(L"en-us", &index, &exists); } } // If the specified locale doesn't exist, select the first on the list. if (!exists) index = 0; UINT32 length = 0; // Get the string length. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetStringLength(index, &length); } // Allocate a string big enough to hold the name. wchar_t* name = new (std::nothrow) wchar_t[length+1]; if (name == null ) { hr = E_OUTOFMEMORY; } // Get the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetString(index, name, length+1); }
Creates a localized strings object that contains the family names for the font family, indexed by locale name.
The address of a reference to the newly created
If this method succeeds, it returns
The following code example shows how to get the font family name from a
* pFamilyNames = null ; // Get a list of localized strings for the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFontFamily->GetFamilyNames(&pFamilyNames); } UINT32 index = 0;exists = false; wchar_t localeName[LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH]; if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { // Get the default locale for this user. int defaultLocaleSuccess = GetUserDefaultLocaleName(localeName, LOCALE_NAME_MAX_LENGTH); // If the default locale is returned, find that locale name, otherwise use "en-us". if (defaultLocaleSuccess) { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(localeName, &index, &exists); } if (SUCCEEDED(hr) && !exists) // if the above find did not find a match, retry with US English { hr = pFamilyNames->FindLocaleName(L"en-us", &index, &exists); } } // If the specified locale doesn't exist, select the first on the list. if (!exists) index = 0; UINT32 length = 0; // Get the string length. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetStringLength(index, &length); } // Allocate a string big enough to hold the name. wchar_t* name = new (std::nothrow) wchar_t[length+1]; if (name == null ) { hr = E_OUTOFMEMORY; } // Get the family name. if (SUCCEEDED(hr)) { hr = pFamilyNames->GetString(index, name, length+1); }
Gets the font that best matches the specified properties.
A value that is used to match a requested font weight.
A value that is used to match a requested font stretch.
A value that is used to match a requested font style.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the newly created
Gets a list of fonts in the font family ranked in order of how well they match the specified properties.
A value that is used to match a requested font weight.
A value that is used to match a requested font stretch.
A value that is used to match a requested font style.
An address of a reference to the newly created
Represents a family of related fonts.
Gets the current location of a font given its zero-based index.
Zero-based index of the font in the font list.
Returns a
For fully local files, the result will always be
Gets a font given its zero-based index.
Zero-based index of the font in the font list.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets a font face reference given its zero-based index.
Zero-based index of the font in the font list.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the number of fonts in the font list.
Gets the font collection that contains the fonts in the font list.
Gets the number of fonts in the font list.
Gets the font collection that contains the fonts in the font list.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the current
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the number of fonts in the font list.
The number of fonts in the font list.
Gets a font given its zero-based index.
Zero-based index of the font in the font list.
When this method returns, contains the address of a reference to the newly created
Represents a list of fonts.
Gets the current location of a font given its zero-based index.
Zero-based index of the font in the font list.
Returns a
For fully local files, the result will always be
Gets a font given its zero-based index.
Zero-based index of the font in the font list.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method returns DWRITE_E_REMOTEFONT if it could not construct a remote font.
Gets a font face reference given its zero-based index.
Zero-based index of the font in the font list.
A reference to a memory block that receives a reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Get the number of total fonts in the set.
Get the number of total fonts in the set.
Returns the number of total fonts in the set.
Gets a reference to the font at the specified index, which may be local or remote.
Zero-based index of the font.
Receives a reference the font face reference object, or nullptr on failure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the index of the matching font face reference in the font set, with the same file, face index, and simulations.
Font face object that specifies the physical font.
Receives the zero-based index of the matching font if the font was found, or UINT_MAX otherwise.
Receives TRUE if the font exists or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the index of the matching font face reference in the font set, with the same file, face index, and simulations.
Font face object that specifies the physical font.
Receives the zero-based index of the matching font if the font was found, or UINT_MAX otherwise.
Receives TRUE if the font exists or
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns all unique property values in the set, which can be used for purposes such as displaying a family list or tag cloud. Values are returned in priority order according to the language list, such that if a font contains more than one localized name, the preferred one will be returned.
Font property of interest.
Receives a reference to the newly created strings list.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns all unique property values in the set, which can be used for purposes such as displaying a family list or tag cloud. Values are returned in priority order according to the language list, such that if a font contains more than one localized name, the preferred one will be returned.
Font property of interest.
List of semicolon delimited language names in preferred order. When a particular string like font family has more than one localized name, the first match is returned. For example, suppose the font set includes the Meiryo family, which has both Japanese and English family names. The returned list of distinct family names would include either the Japanese name (if "ja-jp" was specified as a preferred locale) or the English name (in all other cases).
Receives a reference to the newly created strings list.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns all unique property values in the set, which can be used for purposes such as displaying a family list or tag cloud. Values are returned in priority order according to the language list, such that if a font contains more than one localized name, the preferred one will be returned.
Font property of interest.
List of semicolon delimited language names in preferred order. When a particular string like font family has more than one localized name, the first match is returned. For example, suppose the font set includes the Meiryo family, which has both Japanese and English family names. The returned list of distinct family names would include either the Japanese name (if "ja-jp" was specified as a preferred locale) or the English name (in all other cases).
Receives a reference to the newly created strings list.
Receives a reference to the newly created strings list.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns how many times a given property value occurs in the set.
Font property of interest.
Receives how many times the property occurs.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns a subset of fonts filtered by the given properties.
List of properties to filter using.
The number of properties to filter.
The subset of fonts that match the properties, or nullptr on failure.
The subset of fonts that match the properties, or nullptr on failure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If no fonts matched the filter, the subset will be empty (GetFontCount returns 0), but the function does not return an error. The subset will always be equal to or less than the original set. If you only want to filter out remote fonts, you may pass null in properties and zero in propertyCount.
Returns a subset of fonts filtered by the given properties.
List of properties to filter using.
The number of properties to filter.
The subset of fonts that match the properties, or nullptr on failure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If no fonts matched the filter, the subset will be empty (GetFontCount returns 0), but the function does not return an error. The subset will always be equal to or less than the original set. If you only want to filter out remote fonts, you may pass null in properties and zero in propertyCount.
Contains methods for building a font set.
Adds a reference to a font to the set being built. The caller supplies enough information to search on, avoiding the need to open the potentially non-local font. Any properties not supplied by the caller will be missing, and those properties will not be available as filters in GetMatchingFonts. GetPropertyValues for missing properties will return an empty string list. The properties passed should generally be consistent with the actual font contents, but they need not be. You could, for example, alias a font using a different name or unique identifier, or you could set custom tags not present in the actual font.
Reference to the font.
List of properties to associate with the reference.
The number of properties defined.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Adds a reference to a font to the set being built. The caller supplies enough information to search on, avoiding the need to open the potentially non-local font. Any properties not supplied by the caller will be missing, and those properties will not be available as filters in GetMatchingFonts. GetPropertyValues for missing properties will return an empty string list. The properties passed should generally be consistent with the actual font contents, but they need not be. You could, for example, alias a font using a different name or unique identifier, or you could set custom tags not present in the actual font.
Reference to the font.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Appends an existing font set to the one being built, allowing one to aggregate two sets or to essentially extend an existing one.
Font set to append font face references from.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a font set from all the font face references added so far with AddFontFaceReference.
Contains the newly created font set object, or nullptr in case of failure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creating a font set takes less time if the references were added with metadata rather than needing to extract the metadata from the font file.
Represents an absolute reference to a font face which contains font face type, appropriate file references, face identification data and various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines.
Provides interoperability with GDI, such as methods to convert a font face to a
Creates a font object that matches the properties specified by the
Structure containing a GDI-compatible font description.
The font collection to search. If
Receives a newly created font object if successful, or
Reads the font signature from the given font face.
Font face to read font signature from.
Font signature from the OS/2 table, ulUnicodeRange and ulCodePageRange.
Reads the font signature from the given font face.
Font face to read font signature from.
Font signature from the OS/2 table, ulUnicodeRange and ulCodePageRange.
Gets a list of matching fonts based on the specified
Structure containing a GDI-compatible font description.
The font set to search.
>Receives the filtered font set if successful.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents an absolute reference to a font face which contains font face type, appropriate file references, face identification data and various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines.
Represents an absolute reference to a font face which contains font face type, appropriate file references, face identification data and various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines.
Represents an absolute reference to a font face which contains font face type, appropriate file references, face identification data and various font data such as metrics, names and glyph outlines.
Represents text rendering settings for glyph rasterization and filtering.
Gets the amount of contrast enhancement to use for grayscale antialiasing.
Gets the amount of contrast enhancement to use for grayscale antialiasing.
The contrast enhancement value. Valid values are greater than or equal to zero.
Represents text rendering settings for glyph rasterization and filtering.
Gets the grid fitting mode.
Gets the grid fitting mode.
Returns a
Represents text rendering settings for glyph rasterization and filtering.
Gets the rendering mode.
Gets the rendering mode.
Returns a
Represents a collection of strings indexed by number. An
Gets the number of strings in the string list.
Gets the number of strings in the string list.
Returns the number of strings in the string list.
Gets the length in characters (not including the null terminator) of the locale name with the specified index.
Zero-based index of the locale name.
Receives the length in characters, not including the null terminator.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Copies the locale name with the specified index to the specified array.
Zero-based index of the locale name.
Character array that receives the locale name.
Size of the array in characters. The size must include space for the terminating null character.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the length in characters (not including the null terminator) of the string with the specified index.
Zero-based index of the string.
Receives the length in characters of the string, not including the null terminator.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Copies the string with the specified index to the specified array.
Zero-based index of the string.
Character array that receives the string.
Size of the array in characters. The size must include space for the terminating null character.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Analyzes various text properties for complex script processing.
Returns 2x3 transform matrix for the respective angle to draw the glyph run.
Extends
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns a complete list of OpenType features available for a script or font. If a feature is partially supported, then this method indicates that it is supported.
The font face to get features from.
The script analysis for the script or font to check.
The locale name to check.
The maximum number of tags to return.
The actual number of tags returned.
An array of OpenType font feature tags.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Checks if a typographic feature is available for a glyph or a set of glyphs.
The font face to read glyph information from.
The script analysis for the script or font to check.
The locale name to check.
The font feature tag to check.
The number of glyphs to check.
An array of glyph indices to check.
An array of integers that indicate whether or not the font feature applies to each glyph specified.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Describes the font and paragraph properties used to format text, and it describes locale information. This interface has all the same methods as
Get or sets the preferred orientation of glyphs when using a vertical reading direction.
Gets or sets the wrapping mode of the last line.
Gets or sets the optical margin alignment for the text format.
Gets or sets the current fallback. If none was ever set since creating the layout, it will be nullptr.
Sets the orientation of a text format.
The orientation to apply to the text format.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Get the preferred orientation of glyphs when using a vertical reading direction.
The preferred orientation of glyphs when using a vertical reading direction.
Sets the wrapping mode of the last line.
If set to
The last line is wrapped by default.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the wrapping mode of the last line.
Returns
Sets the optical margin alignment for the text format.
By default, glyphs are aligned to the margin by the default origin and side-bearings of the glyph. If you specify DWRITE_OPTICAL_ALIGNMENT_USING_SIDE_BEARINGS, then the alignment Suses the side bearings to offset the glyph from the aligned edge to ensure the ink of the glyphs are aligned.
The optical alignment to set.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the optical margin alignment for the text format.
The optical alignment.
Applies the custom font fallback onto the layout. If none is set, it uses the default system fallback list.
The font fallback to apply to the layout.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the current fallback. If none was ever set since creating the layout, it will be nullptr.
Contains an address of a reference to the the current font fallback object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Describes the font and paragraph properties used to format text, and it describes locale information.
Gets or sets the line spacing adjustment set for a multiline text paragraph.
Set line spacing.
How to manage space between lines.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the line spacing adjustment set for a multiline text paragraph.
A structure describing how the space between lines is managed for the paragraph.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a block of text after it has been fully analyzed and formatted.
Enables or disables pair-kerning on a given text range.
The flag that indicates whether text is pair-kerned.
The text range to which the change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets whether or not pair-kerning is enabled at given position.
The current text position.
The flag that indicates whether text is pair-kerned.
The position range of the current format.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the spacing between characters.
The spacing before each character, in reading order.
The spacing after each character, in reading order.
The minimum advance of each character, to prevent characters from becoming too thin or zero-width. This must be zero or greater.
Text range to which this change applies.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the spacing between characters.
The current text position.
The spacing before each character, in reading order.
The spacing after each character, in reading order.
The minimum advance of each character, to prevent characters from becoming too thin or zero-width. This must be zero or greater.
The position range of the current format.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a block of text after it has been fully analyzed and formatted.
Retrieves overall metrics for the formatted string.
Get or sets the preferred orientation of glyphs when using a vertical reading direction.
Get or sets whether or not the last word on the last line is wrapped.
Get or sets how the glyphs align to the edges the margin.
Get or sets the current font fallback object.
Retrieves overall metrics for the formatted string.
When this method returns, contains the measured distances of text and associated content after being formatted.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Set the preferred orientation of glyphs when using a vertical reading direction.
Preferred glyph orientation.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Get the preferred orientation of glyphs when using a vertical reading direction.
Set whether or not the last word on the last line is wrapped.
Line wrapping option.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Get whether or not the last word on the last line is wrapped.
Set how the glyphs align to the edges the margin. Default behavior is to align glyphs using their default glyphs metrics, which include side bearings.
Optical alignment option.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Get how the glyphs align to the edges the margin.
Apply a custom font fallback onto layout. If none is specified, the layout uses the system fallback list.
Custom font fallback created from
If this method succeeds, it returns
Get the current font fallback object.
The current font fallback object.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets or sets line spacing information.
Invalidates the layout, forcing layout to remeasure before calling the metrics or drawing functions. This is useful if the locality of a font changes, and layout should be redrawn, or if the size of a client implemented
If this method succeeds, it returns
Set line spacing.
How to manage space between lines.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets line spacing information.
How to manage space between lines.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves properties of each line.
The array to fill with line information.
The maximum size of the lineMetrics array.
The actual size of the lineMetrics array that is needed.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If maxLineCount is not large enough E_NOT_SUFFICIENT_BUFFER, which is equivalent to HRESULT_FROM_WIN32(
Represents a set of application-defined callbacks that perform rendering of text, inline objects, and decorations such as underlines.
The
Vertical rise of the caret in font design units. Rise / Run yields the caret angle. Rise = 1 for perfectly upright fonts (non-italic).
Horizontal run of the caret in font design units. Rise / Run yields the caret angle. Run = 0 for perfectly upright fonts (non-italic).
Horizontal offset of the caret, in font design units, along the baseline for good appearance. Offset = 0 for perfectly upright fonts (non-italic).
Contains information about a glyph cluster.
The total advance width of all glyphs in the cluster.
The number of text positions in the cluster.
Indicates whether a line can be broken right after the cluster.
Indicates whether the cluster corresponds to a whitespace character.
Indicates whether the cluster corresponds to a newline character.
Indicates whether the cluster corresponds to a soft hyphen character.
Indicates whether the cluster is read from right to left.
Reserved for future use.
Contains the information needed by renderers to draw glyph runs with glyph color information. All coordinates are in device independent pixels (DIPs).
Glyph run to draw for this layer.
Pointer to the glyph run description for this layer. This may be
X coordinate of the baseline origin for the layer.
Y coordinate of the baseline origin for the layer.
Color value of the run; if all members are zero, the run should be drawn using the current brush.
Zero-based index into the font?s color palette; if this is 0xFFFF, the run should be drawn using the current brush.
Represents a color glyph run. The
Glyph run to draw for this layer.
Pointer to the glyph run description for this layer. This may be
X coordinate of the baseline origin for the layer.
Y coordinate of the baseline origin for the layer.
Color value of the run; if all members are zero, the run should be drawn using the current brush.
Zero-based index into the font?s color palette; if this is 0xFFFF, the run should be drawn using the current brush.
Type of glyph image format for this color run. Exactly one type will be set since TranslateColorGlyphRun has already broken down the run into separate parts.
Measuring mode to use for this glyph run.
The
The number of font design units per em unit. Font files use their own coordinate system of font design units. A font design unit is the smallest measurable unit in the em square, an imaginary square that is used to size and align glyphs. The concept of em square is used as a reference scale factor when defining font size and device transformation semantics. The size of one em square is also commonly used to compute the paragraph identation value.
The ascent value of the font face in font design units. Ascent is the distance from the top of font character alignment box to the English baseline.
The descent value of the font face in font design units. Descent is the distance from the bottom of font character alignment box to the English baseline.
The line gap in font design units. Recommended additional white space to add between lines to improve legibility. The recommended line spacing (baseline-to-baseline distance) is the sum of ascent, descent, and lineGap. The line gap is usually positive or zero but can be negative, in which case the recommended line spacing is less than the height of the character alignment box.
The cap height value of the font face in font design units. Cap height is the distance from the English baseline to the top of a typical English capital. Capital "H" is often used as a reference character for the purpose of calculating the cap height value.
The x-height value of the font face in font design units. x-height is the distance from the English baseline to the top of lowercase letter "x", or a similar lowercase character.
The underline position value of the font face in font design units. Underline position is the position of underline relative to the English baseline. The value is usually made negative in order to place the underline below the baseline.
The suggested underline thickness value of the font face in font design units.
The strikethrough position value of the font face in font design units. Strikethrough position is the position of strikethrough relative to the English baseline. The value is usually made positive in order to place the strikethrough above the baseline.
The suggested strikethrough thickness value of the font face in font design units.
The
struct : public
{
...
};
The number of font design units per em unit. Font files use their own coordinate system of font design units. A font design unit is the smallest measurable unit in the em square, an imaginary square that is used to size and align glyphs. The concept of em square is used as a reference scale factor when defining font size and device transformation semantics. The size of one em square is also commonly used to compute the paragraph identation value.
The ascent value of the font face in font design units. Ascent is the distance from the top of font character alignment box to the English baseline.
The descent value of the font face in font design units. Descent is the distance from the bottom of font character alignment box to the English baseline.
The line gap in font design units. Recommended additional white space to add between lines to improve legibility. The recommended line spacing (baseline-to-baseline distance) is the sum of ascent, descent, and lineGap. The line gap is usually positive or zero but can be negative, in which case the recommended line spacing is less than the height of the character alignment box.
The cap height value of the font face in font design units. Cap height is the distance from the English baseline to the top of a typical English capital. Capital "H" is often used as a reference character for the purpose of calculating the cap height value.
The x-height value of the font face in font design units. x-height is the distance from the English baseline to the top of lowercase letter "x", or a similar lowercase character.
The underline position value of the font face in font design units. Underline position is the position of underline relative to the English baseline. The value is usually made negative in order to place the underline below the baseline.
The suggested underline thickness value of the font face in font design units.
The strikethrough position value of the font face in font design units. Strikethrough position is the position of strikethrough relative to the English baseline. The value is usually made positive in order to place the strikethrough above the baseline.
The suggested strikethrough thickness value of the font face in font design units.
Left edge of accumulated bounding blackbox of all glyphs in the font.
Top edge of accumulated bounding blackbox of all glyphs in the font.
Right edge of accumulated bounding blackbox of all glyphs in the font.
Bottom edge of accumulated bounding blackbox of all glyphs in the font.
Horizontal position of the subscript relative to the baseline origin. This is typically negative (to the left) in italic and oblique fonts, and zero in regular fonts.
Vertical position of the subscript relative to the baseline. This is typically negative.
Horizontal size of the subscript em box in design units, used to scale the simulated subscript relative to the full em box size. This is the numerator of the scaling ratio where denominator is the design units per em. If this member is zero, the font does not specify a scale factor, and the client uses its own policy.
Vertical size of the subscript em box in design units, used to scale the simulated subscript relative to the full em box size. This is the numerator of the scaling ratio where denominator is the design units per em. If this member is zero, the font does not specify a scale factor, and the client uses its own policy.
Horizontal position of the superscript relative to the baseline origin. This is typically positive (to the right) in italic and oblique fonts, and zero in regular fonts.
Vertical position of the superscript relative to the baseline. This is typically positive.
Horizontal size of the superscript em box in design units, used to scale the simulated superscript relative to the full em box size. This is the numerator of the scaling ratio where denominator is the design units per em. If this member is zero, the font does not specify a scale factor, and the client should use its own policy.
Vertical size of the superscript em box in design units, used to scale the simulated superscript relative to the full em box size. This is the numerator of the scaling ratio where denominator is the design units per em. If this member is zero, the font does not specify a scale factor, and the client should use its own policy.
A Boolean value that indicates that the ascent, descent, and lineGap are based on newer 'typographic' values in the font, rather than legacy values.
Font property used for filtering font sets and building a font set with explicit properties.
Specifies the requested font property, such as
Specifies the value, such as "Segoe UI".
Specifies the locale to use, such as "en-US". Simply leave this empty when used with the font set filtering functions, as they will find a match regardless of language. For passing to AddFontFaceReference, the localeName specifies the language of the property value.
Data for a single glyph from GetGlyphImageData.
Pointer to the glyph data.
Size of glyph data in bytes.
Unique identifier for the glyph data. Clients may use this to cache a parsed/decompressed version and tell whether a repeated call to the same font returns the same data.
Pixels per em of the returned data. For non-scalable raster data (PNG/TIFF/JPG), this can be larger or smaller than requested from GetGlyphImageData when there isn't an exact match. For scaling intermediate sizes, use: desired pixels per em * font em size / actual pixels per em.
Size of image when the format is pixel data.
Left origin along the horizontal Roman baseline.
Right origin along the horizontal Roman baseline.
Top origin along the vertical central baseline.
Bottom origin along vertical central baseline.
Specifies the metrics of an individual glyph. The units depend on how the metrics are obtained.
Specifies the X offset from the glyph origin to the left edge of the black box. The glyph origin is the current horizontal writing position. A negative value means the black box extends to the left of the origin (often true for lowercase italic 'f').
Specifies the X offset from the origin of the current glyph to the origin of the next glyph when writing horizontally.
Specifies the X offset from the right edge of the black box to the origin of the next glyph when writing horizontally. The value is negative when the right edge of the black box overhangs the layout box.
Specifies the vertical offset from the vertical origin to the top of the black box. Thus, a positive value adds whitespace whereas a negative value means the glyph overhangs the top of the layout box.
Specifies the Y offset from the vertical origin of the current glyph to the vertical origin of the next glyph when writing vertically. Note that the term "origin" by itself denotes the horizontal origin. The vertical origin is different. Its Y coordinate is specified by verticalOriginY value, and its X coordinate is half the advanceWidth to the right of the horizontal origin.
Specifies the vertical distance from the bottom edge of the black box to the advance height. This is positive when the bottom edge of the black box is within the layout box, or negative when the bottom edge of black box overhangs the layout box.
Specifies the Y coordinate of a glyph's vertical origin, in the font's design coordinate system. The y coordinate of a glyph's vertical origin is the sum of the glyph's top side bearing and the top (that is, yMax) of the glyph's bounding box.
The optional adjustment to a glyph's position.
An glyph offset changes the position of a glyph without affecting the pen position. Offsets are in logical, pre-transform units.
The offset in the advance direction of the run. A positive advance offset moves the glyph to the right (in pre-transform coordinates) if the run is left-to-right or to the left if the run is right-to-left.
The offset in the ascent direction, that is, the direction ascenders point. A positive ascender offset moves the glyph up (in pre-transform coordinates). A negative ascender offset moves the glyph down.
Describes the region obtained by a hit test.
The first text position within the hit region.
The number of text positions within the hit region.
The x-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the hit region.
The y-coordinate of the upper-left corner of the hit region.
The width of the hit region.
The height of the hit region.
The BIDI level of the text positions within the hit region.
true if the hit region contains text; otherwise, false.
true if the text range is trimmed; otherwise, false.
Contains properties describing the geometric measurement of an application-defined inline object.
The width of the inline object.
The height of the inline object.
The distance from the top of the object to the point where it is lined up with the adjacent text. If the baseline is at the bottom, then baseline simply equals height.
A Boolean flag that indicates whether the object is to be placed upright or alongside the text baseline for vertical text.
The
Minimum amount of expansion to apply to the side of the glyph. This might vary from zero to infinity, typically being zero except for kashida.
Maximum amount of expansion to apply to the side of the glyph. This might vary from zero to infinity, being zero for fixed-size characters and connected scripts, and non-zero for discrete scripts, and non-zero for cursive scripts at expansion points.
Maximum amount of compression to apply to the side of the glyph. This might vary from zero up to the glyph cluster size.
Priority of this expansion point. Larger priorities are applied later, while priority zero does nothing.
Priority of this compression point. Larger priorities are applied later, while priority zero does nothing.
Allow this expansion point to use up any remaining slack space even after all expansion priorities have been used up.
Allow this compression point to use up any remaining space even after all compression priorities have been used up.
Apply expansion and compression to the leading edge of the glyph. This bit is
Apply expansion and compression to the trailing edge of the glyph. This bit is
Reserved
Contains information about a formatted line of text.
The number of text positions in the text line. This includes any trailing whitespace and newline characters.
The number of whitespace positions at the end of the text line. Newline sequences are considered whitespace.
The number of characters in the newline sequence at the end of the text line. If the count is zero, then the text line was either wrapped or it is the end of the text.
The height of the text line.
The distance from the top of the text line to its baseline.
The line is trimmed.
Contains information about a formatted line of text.
The number of text positions in the text line. This includes any trailing whitespace and newline characters.
The number of whitespace positions at the end of the text line. Newline sequences are considered whitespace.
The number of characters in the newline sequence at the end of the text line. If the count is zero, then the text line was either wrapped or it is the end of the text.
The height of the text line.
The distance from the top of the text line to its baseline.
The line is trimmed.
White space before the content of the line. This is included in the line height and baseline distances. If the line is formatted horizontally either with a uniform line spacing or with proportional line spacing, this value represents the extra space above the content.
White space after the content of the line. This is included in the height of the line. If the line is formatted horizontally either with a uniform line spacing or with proportional line spacing, this value represents the extra space below the content.
Method used to determine line spacing.
Spacing between lines. The interpretation of this parameter depends upon the line spacing method, as follows:
Distance from top of line to baseline. The interpretation of this parameter depends upon the line spacing method, as follows:
Proportion of the entire leading distributed before the line. The allowed value is between 0 and 1.0. The remaining leading is distributed after the line. It is ignored for the default and uniform line spacing methods. The leading that is available to distribute before or after the line depends on the values of the height and baseline parameters.
Specify whether
Indicates how much any visible DIPs (device independent pixels) overshoot each side of the layout or inline objects.
Positive overhangs indicate that the visible area extends outside the layout box or inline object, while negative values mean there is whitespace inside. The returned values are unaffected by rendering transforms or pixel snapping. Additionally, they may not exactly match the final target's pixel bounds after applying grid fitting and hinting.
The distance from the left-most visible DIP to its left-alignment edge.
The distance from the top-most visible DIP to its top alignment edge.
The distance from the right-most visible DIP to its right-alignment edge.
The distance from the bottom-most visible DIP to its lower-alignment edge.
The
Stores the association of text and its writing system script, as well as some display attributes.
The zero-based index representation of writing system script.
A value that indicates additional shaping requirement of text.
The
The standardized four character code for the given script.
Note??These only include the general Unicode scripts, not any additional ISO 15924 scripts for bibliographic distinction. ?The standardized numeric code, ranging 0-999.
Number of characters to estimate look-ahead for complex scripts. Latin and all Kana are generally 1. Indic scripts are up to 15, and most others are 8.
Note??Combining marks and variation selectors can produce clusters that are longer than these look-aheads, so this estimate is considered typical language use. Diacritics must be tested explicitly separately. ?Appropriate character to elongate the given script for justification. For example:
Restrict the caret to whole clusters, like Thai and Devanagari. Scripts such as Arabic by default allow navigation between clusters. Others like Thai always navigate across whole clusters.
The language uses dividers between words, such as spaces between Latin or the Ethiopic wordspace. Examples include Latin, Greek, Devanagari, and Ethiopic. Chinese, Korean, and Thai are excluded.
The characters are discrete units from each other. This includes both block scripts and clustered scripts. Examples include Latin, Greek, Cyrillic, Hebrew, Chinese, and Thai.
The language is a block script, expanding between characters. Examples include Chinese, Japanese, Korean, and Bopomofo.
The language is justified within glyph clusters, not just between glyph clusters, such as the character sequence of Thai Lu and Sara Am (U+E026, U+E033), which form a single cluster but still expand between them. Examples include Thai, Lao, and Khmer.
The script's clusters are connected to each other (such as the baseline-linked Devanagari), and no separation is added between characters.
Note??Cursively linked scripts like Arabic are also connected (but not all connected scripts are cursive). ?Examples include Devanagari, Arabic, Syriac, Bengala, Gurmukhi, and Ogham. Latin, Chinese, and Thaana are excluded.
The script is naturally cursive (Arabic and Syriac), meaning it uses other justification methods like kashida extension rather than inter-character spacing.
Note?? Although other scripts like Latin and Japanese might actually support handwritten cursive forms, they are not considered cursive scripts. ?Examples include Arabic, Syriac, and Mongolian. Thaana, Devanagari, Latin, and Chinese are excluded.
Reserved
Shaping output properties for an output glyph.
Indicates that the glyph is shaped alone.
Reserved for future use.
Contains information regarding the size and placement of strikethroughs. All coordinates are in device independent pixels (DIPs).
A value that indicates the width of the strikethrough, measured parallel to the baseline.
A value that indicates the thickness of the strikethrough, measured perpendicular to the baseline.
A value that indicates the offset of the strikethrough from the baseline. A positive offset represents a position below the baseline and a negative offset is above. Typically, the offset will be negative.
Reading direction of the text associated with the strikethrough. This value is used to interpret whether the width value runs horizontally or vertically.
Flow direction of the text associated with the strikethrough. This value is used to interpret whether the thickness value advances top to bottom, left to right, or right to left.
An array of characters containing the locale of the text that is the strikethrough is being drawn over.
The measuring mode can be useful to the renderer to determine how underlines are rendered, such as rounding the thickness to a whole pixel in GDI-compatible modes.
Contains the metrics associated with text after layout. All coordinates are in device independent pixels (DIPs).
A value that indicates the left-most point of formatted text relative to the layout box, while excluding any glyph overhang.
A value that indicates the top-most point of formatted text relative to the layout box, while excluding any glyph overhang.
A value that indicates the width of the formatted text, while ignoring trailing whitespace at the end of each line.
The width of the formatted text, taking into account the trailing whitespace at the end of each line.
The height of the formatted text. The height of an empty string is set to the same value as that of the default font.
The initial width given to the layout. It can be either larger or smaller than the text content width, depending on whether the text was wrapped.
Initial height given to the layout. Depending on the length of the text, it may be larger or smaller than the text content height.
The maximum reordering count of any line of text, used to calculate the most number of hit-testing boxes needed. If the layout has no bidirectional text, or no text at all, the minimum level is 1.
Total number of lines.
Contains the metrics associated with text after layout. All coordinates are in device independent pixels (DIPs).
A value that indicates the left-most point of formatted text relative to the layout box, while excluding any glyph overhang.
A value that indicates the top-most point of formatted text relative to the layout box, while excluding any glyph overhang.
A value that indicates the width of the formatted text, while ignoring trailing whitespace at the end of each line.
The width of the formatted text, taking into account the trailing whitespace at the end of each line.
The height of the formatted text. The height of an empty string is set to the same value as that of the default font.
The initial width given to the layout. It can be either larger or smaller than the text content width, depending on whether the text was wrapped.
Initial height given to the layout. Depending on the length of the text, it may be larger or smaller than the text content height.
The maximum reordering count of any line of text, used to calculate the most number of hit-testing boxes needed. If the layout has no bidirectional text, or no text at all, the minimum level is 1.
Total number of lines.
A value that indicates the left-most point of formatted text relative to the layout box, while excluding any glyph overhang.
Specifies the trimming option for text overflowing the layout box.
A value that specifies the text granularity used to trim text overflowing the layout box.
A character code used as the delimiter that signals the beginning of the portion of text to be preserved. Text starting from the Nth occurence of the delimiter (where N equals delimiterCount) counting backwards from the end of the text block will be preserved. For example, given the text is a path like c:\A\B\C\D\file.txt and delimiter equal to '\' and delimiterCount equal to 1, the file.txt portion of the text would be preserved. Specifying a delimiterCount of 2 would preserve D\file.txt.
The delimiter count, counting from the end of the text, to preserve text from.
Contains a set of typographic features to be applied during text shaping.
A reference to a structure that specifies properties used to identify and execute typographic features in the font.
A value that indicates the number of features being applied to a font face.
Contains information about the width, thickness, offset, run height, reading direction, and flow direction of an underline.
All coordinates are in device independent pixels (DIPs).
A value that indicates the width of the underline, measured parallel to the baseline.
A value that indicates the thickness of the underline, measured perpendicular to the baseline.
A value that indicates the offset of the underline from the baseline. A positive offset represents a position below the baseline (away from the text) and a negative offset is above (toward the text).
A value that indicates the height of the tallest run where the underline is applied.
A value that indicates the reading direction of the text associated with the underline. This value is used to interpret whether the width value runs horizontally or vertically.
A value that indicates the flow direction of the text associated with the underline. This value is used to interpret whether the thickness value advances top to bottom, left to right, or right to left.
An array of characters which contains the locale of the text that the underline is being drawn under. For example, in vertical text, the underline belongs on the left for Chinese but on the right for Japanese.
The measuring mode can be useful to the renderer to determine how underlines are rendered, such as rounding the thickness to a whole pixel in GDI-compatible modes.
The
The first code point in the Unicode range.
The last code point in the Unicode range.
Specifies the identifiers of the metadata items in an 8BIM IPTC digest metadata block.
[VT_LPSTR] A name that identifies the 8BIM block.
[VT_BLOB] The embedded IPTC digest value.
Specifies the identifiers of the metadata items in an 8BIM IPTC block.
[VT_LPSTR] A name that identifies the 8BIM block.
[VT_UNKNOWN] The IPTC block embedded in this 8BIM IPTC block.
Specifies the identifiers of the metadata items in an 8BIMResolutionInfo block.
[VT_LPSTR] A name that identifies the 8BIM block.
[VT_UI4] The horizontal resolution of the image.
[VT_UI2] The units that the horizontal resolution is specified in; a 1 indicates pixels per inch and a 2 indicates pixels per centimeter.
[VT_UI2] The units that the image width is specified in; a 1 indicates inches, a 2 indicates centimeters, a 3 indicates points, a 4 specifies picas, and a 5 specifies columns.
[VT_UI4] The vertical resolution of the image.
[VT_UI2] The units that the vertical resolution is specified in; a 1 indicates pixels per inch and a 2 indicates pixels per centimeter.
[VT_UI2] The units that the image height is specified in; a 1 indicates inches, a 2 indicates centimeters, a 3 indicates points, a 4 specifies picas, and a 5 specifies columns.
Specifies the desired alpha channel usage.
Use alpha channel.
Use a pre-multiplied alpha channel.
Ignore alpha channel.
Specifies the desired cache usage.
The CreateBitmap of the
Do not cache the bitmap.
Cache the bitmap when needed.
Cache the bitmap at initialization.
Specifies the capabilities of the decoder.
Decoder recognizes the image was encoded with an encoder produced by the same vendor.
Decoder can decode all the images within an image container.
Decoder can decode some of the images within an image container.
Decoder can enumerate the metadata blocks within a container format.
Decoder can find and decode a thumbnail.
Specifies the type of dither algorithm to apply when converting between image formats.
A solid color algorithm without dither.
A solid color algorithm without dither.
A 4x4 ordered dither algorithm.
An 8x8 ordered dither algorithm.
A 16x16 ordered dither algorithm.
A 4x4 spiral dither algorithm.
An 8x8 spiral dither algorithm.
A 4x4 dual spiral dither algorithm.
An 8x8 dual spiral dither algorithm.
An error diffusion algorithm.
Specifies the cache options available for an encoder.
The encoder is cached in memory. This option is not supported.
The encoder is cached to a temporary file. This option is not supported.
The encoder is not cached.
Specifies the sampling or filtering mode to use when scaling an image.
A nearest neighbor interpolation algorithm. Also known as nearest pixel or point interpolation.
The output pixel is assigned the value of the pixel that the point falls within. No other pixels are considered.
A bilinear interpolation algorithm.
The output pixel values are computed as a weighted average of the nearest four pixels in a 2x2 grid.
A bicubic interpolation algorithm.
Destination pixel values are computed as a weighted average of the nearest sixteen pixels in a 4x4 grid.
A Fant resampling algorithm.
Destination pixel values are computed as a weighted average of the all the pixels that map to the new pixel.
A high quality bicubic interpolation algorithm. Destination pixel values are computed using a much denser sampling kernel than regular cubic. The kernel is resized in response to the scale factor, making it suitable for downscaling by factors greater than 2.
Note??This value is supported beginning with Windows?10. ?Specifies access to an
Specifies the type of palette used for an indexed image format.
An arbitrary custom palette provided by caller.
An optimal palette generated using a median-cut algorithm. Derived from the colors in an image.
A black and white palette.
A palette that has its 8-color on-off primaries and the 16 system colors added. With duplicates removed, 16 colors are available.
A palette that has 3 intensity levels of each primary: 27-color on-off primaries and the 16 system colors added. With duplicates removed, 35 colors are available.
A palette that has 4 intensity levels of each primary: 64-color on-off primaries and the 16 system colors added. With duplicates removed, 72 colors are available.
A palette that has 5 intensity levels of each primary: 125-color on-off primaries and the 16 system colors added. With duplicates removed, 133 colors are available.
A palette that has 6 intensity levels of each primary: 216-color on-off primaries and the 16 system colors added. With duplicates removed, 224 colors are available. This is the same as WICBitmapPaletteFixedHalftoneWeb.
A palette that has 6 intensity levels of each primary: 216-color on-off primaries and the 16 system colors added. With duplicates removed, 224 colors are available. This is the same as
A palette that has its 252-color on-off primaries and the 16 system colors added. With duplicates removed, 256 colors are available.
A palette that has its 256-color on-off primaries and the 16 system colors added. With duplicates removed, 256 colors are available.
A palette that has 4 shades of gray.
A palette that has 16 shades of gray.
A palette that has 256 shades of gray.
Specifies the flip and rotation transforms.
A rotation of 0 degrees.
A clockwise rotation of 90 degrees.
A clockwise rotation of 180 degrees.
A clockwise rotation of 270 degrees.
A horizontal flip. Pixels are flipped around the vertical y-axis.
A vertical flip. Pixels are flipped around the horizontal x-axis.
Specifies the color context types.
An uninitialized color context.
A color context that is a full ICC color profile.
A color context that is one of a number of set color spaces (sRGB, AdobeRGB) that are defined in the EXIF specification.
Specifies component enumeration options.
Enumerate any components that are not disabled. Because this value is 0x0, it is always included with the other options.
Force a read of the registry before enumerating components.
Include disabled components in the enumeration. The set of disabled components is disjoint with the set of default enumerated components
Include unsigned components in the enumeration. This option has no effect.
At the end of component enumeration, filter out any components that are not Windows provided.
Specifies the component signing status.
A signed component.
An unsigned component
A component is safe.
Components that do not have a binary component to sign, such as a pixel format, should return this value.
A component has been disabled.
Specifies the type of Windows Imaging Component (WIC) component.
A WIC decoder.
A WIC encoder.
A WIC pixel converter.
A WIC metadata reader.
A WIC metadata writer.
A WIC pixel format.
All WIC components.
Specifies the the meaning of pixel color component values contained in the DDS image.
Alpha behavior is unspecified and must be determined by the reader.
The alpha data is straight.
The alpha data is premultiplied.
The alpha data is opaque (UNORM value of 1). This can be used by a compliant reader as a performance optimization. For example, blending operations can be converted to copies.
The alpha channel contains custom data that is not alpha.
Specifies the dimension type of the data contained in DDS image.
Both WICDdsTexture2d and
DDS image contains a 1-dimensional texture .
DDS image contains a 2-dimensional texture .
DDS image contains a 3-dimensional texture .
The DDS image contains a cube texture represented as an array of 6 faces.
Specifies decode options.
Cache metadata when needed.
Cache metadata when decoder is loaded.
Specifies the application extension metadata properties for a Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) image.
[VT_UI1 | VT_VECTOR] Indicates a string that identifies the application.
[VT_UI1 | VT_VECTOR] Indicates data that is exposed by the application.
Specifies the comment extension metadata properties for a Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) image.
[VT_LPSTR] Indicates the comment text.
Specifies the graphic control extension metadata properties that define the transitions between each frame animation for Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) images.
[VT_UI1] Indicates the disposal requirements. 0 - no disposal, 1 - do not dispose, 2 - restore to background color, 3 - restore to previous.
[VT_BOOL] Indicates the user input flag. TRUE if user input should advance to the next frame; otherwise,
[VT_BOOL] Indicates the transparency flag. TRUE if a transparent color in is in the color table for this frame; otherwise,
[VT_UI2] Indicates how long to display the next frame before advancing to the next frame, in units of 1/100th of a second.
[VT_UI1] Indicates which color in the palette should be treated as transparent.
Specifies the image descriptor metadata properties for Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) frames.
[VT_UI2] Indicates the X offset at which to locate this frame within the logical screen.
[VT_UI2] Indicates the Y offset at which to locate this frame within the logical screen.
[VT_UI2] Indicates width of this frame, in pixels.
[VT_UI2] Indicates height of this frame, in pixels.
[VT_BOOL] Indicates the local color table flag. TRUE if global color table is present; otherwise,
[VT_BOOL] Indicates the interlace flag. TRUE if image is interlaced; otherwise,
[VT_BOOL] Indicates the sorted color table flag. TRUE if the color table is sorted from most frequently to least frequently used color; otherwise,
[VT_UI1] Indicates the value used to calculate the number of bytes contained in the global color table.
To calculate the actual size of the color table, raise 2 to the value of the field + 1.
Specifies the logical screen descriptor properties for Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) metadata.
[VT_UI1 | VT_VECTOR] Indicates the signature property.
[VT_UI2] Indicates the width in pixels.
[VT_UI2] Indicates the height in pixels.
[VT_BOOL] Indicates the global color table flag. TRUE if a global color table is present; otherwise,
[VT_UI1] Indicates the color resolution in bits per pixel.
[VT_BOOL] Indicates the sorted color table flag. TRUE if the table is sorted; otherwise,
[VT_UI1] Indicates the value used to calculate the number of bytes contained in the global color table.
To calculate the actual size of the color table, raise 2 to the value of the field + 1.
[VT_UI1] Indicates the index within the color table to use for the background (pixels not defined in the image).
[VT_UI1] Indicates the factor used to compute an approximation of the aspect ratio.
Specifies the JPEG chrominance table property.
[VT_UI2|VT_VECTOR] Indicates the metadata property is a chrominance table.
Specifies the JPEG comment properties.
Indicates the metadata property is comment text.
Specifies the options for indexing a JPEG image.
Index generation is deferred until
Index generation is performed when the when the image is initially loaded.
Specifies the JPEG luminance table property.
[VT_UI2|VT_VECTOR] Indicates the metadata property is a luminance table.
Specifies the memory layout of pixel data in a JPEG image scan.
The pixel data is stored in an interleaved memory layout.
The pixel data is stored in a planar memory layout.
The pixel data is stored in a progressive layout.
Specifies conversion matrix from Y'Cb'Cr' to R'G'B'.
Specifies the identity transfer matrix.
Specifies the BT601 transfer matrix.
Specifies the JPEG YCrCB subsampling options.
The native JPEG encoder uses
The default subsampling option.
Subsampling option that uses both horizontal and vertical decimation.
Subsampling option that uses horizontal decimation .
Subsampling option that uses no decimation.
Subsampling option that uses 2x vertical downsampling only. This option is only available in Windows?8.1 and later.
Specifies named white balances for raw images.
The default white balance.
A daylight white balance.
A cloudy white balance.
A shade white balance.
A tungsten white balance.
A fluorescent white balance.
Daylight white balance.
A flash white balance.
A custom white balance. This is typically used when using a picture (grey-card) as white balance.
An automatic balance.
An "as shot" white balance.
Specifies additional options to an
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) background (bKGD) chunk metadata properties.
Indicates the background color. There are three possible types, depending on the image's pixel format.
Specifies the index of the background color in an image with an indexed pixel format.
Specifies the background color in a grayscale image.
Specifies the background color in an RGB image as three USHORT values: {0xRRRR, 0xGGGG, 0xBBBB}.
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) cHRM chunk metadata properties for CIE XYZ chromaticity.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the whitepoint x value ratio.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the whitepoint y value ratio.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the red x value ratio.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the red y value ratio.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the green x value ratio.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the green y value ratio.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the blue x value ratio.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the blue y value ratio.
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) filters available for compression optimization.
Indicates an unspecified PNG filter. This enables WIC to algorithmically choose the best filtering option for the image.
Indicates no PNG filter.
Indicates a PNG sub filter.
Indicates a PNG up filter.
Indicates a PNG average filter.
Indicates a PNG paeth filter.
Indicates a PNG adaptive filter. This enables WIC to choose the best filtering mode on a per-scanline basis.
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) gAMA chunk metadata properties.
[VT_UI4] Indicates the gamma value.
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) hIST chunk metadata properties.
[VT_VECTOR | VT_UI2] Indicates the approximate usage frequency of each color in the color palette.
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) iCCP chunk metadata properties.
[VT_LPSTR] Indicates the International Color Consortium (ICC) profile name.
[VT_VECTOR | VT_UI1] Indicates the embedded ICC profile.
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) iTXT chunk metadata properties.
[VT_LPSTR] Indicates the keywords in the iTXT metadata chunk.
[VT_UI1] Indicates whether the text in the iTXT chunk is compressed. 1 if the text is compressed; otherwise, 0.
[VT_LPSTR] Indicates the human language used by the translated keyword and the text.
[VT_LPWSTR] Indicates a translation of the keyword into the language indicated by the language tag.
[VT_LPWSTR] Indicates additional text in the iTXT metadata chunk.
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) sRGB chunk metadata properties.
[VT_UI1] Indicates the rendering intent for an sRGB color space image. The rendering intents have the following meaning.
Value | Meaning |
---|---|
0 | Perceptual |
1 | Relative colorimetric |
2 | Saturation |
3 | Absolute colorimetric |
?
Specifies the Portable Network Graphics (PNG) tIME chunk metadata properties.
[VT_UI2] Indicates the year of the last modification.
[VT_UI1] Indicates the month of the last modification.
[VT_UI1] Indicates day of the last modification.
[VT_UI1] Indicates the hour of the last modification.
[VT_UI1] Indicates the minute of the last modification.
[VT_UI1] Indicates the second of the last modification.
Specifies when the progress notification callback should be called.
The callback should be called when codec operations begin.
The callback should be called when codec operations end.
The callback should be called frequently to report status.
The callback should be called on all available progress notifications.
Specifies the progress operations to receive notifications for.
Receive copy pixel operation.
Receive write pixel operation.
Receive all progress operations available.
Specifies the capability support of a raw image.
The capability is not supported.
The capability supports only get operations.
The capability supports get and set operations.
Specifies the parameter set used by a raw codec.
An as shot parameter set.
A user adjusted parameter set.
A codec adjusted parameter set.
Specifies the render intent of the next CopyPixels call.
Specifies the rotation capabilities of the codec.
Rotation is not supported.
Set operations for rotation is not supported.
90 degree rotations are supported.
All rotation angles are supported.
Specifies the access level of a Windows Graphics Device Interface (GDI) section.
Indicates a read only access level.
Indicates a read/write access level.
Specifies the Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) compression options.
Indicates a suitable compression algorithm based on the image and pixel format.
Indicates no compression.
Indicates a CCITT3 compression algorithm. This algorithm is only valid for 1bpp pixel formats.
Indicates a CCITT4 compression algorithm. This algorithm is only valid for 1bpp pixel formats.
Indicates a LZW compression algorithm.
Indicates a RLE compression algorithm. This algorithm is only valid for 1bpp pixel formats.
Indicates a ZIP compression algorithm.
Indicates an LZWH differencing algorithm.
Defines methods that add the concept of writeability and static in-memory representations of bitmaps to
Because of to the internal memory representation implied by the
Provides access for palette modifications.
Provides access to a rectangular area of the bitmap.
The rectangle to be accessed.
The access mode you wish to obtain for the lock. This is a bitwise combination of
Value | Meaning |
---|---|
The read access lock. | |
The write access lock. |
?
A reference that receives the locked memory location.
Locks are exclusive for writing but can be shared for reading. You cannot call CopyPixels while the
Provides access for palette modifications.
The palette to use for conversion.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Changes the physical resolution of the image.
The horizontal resolution.
The vertical resolution.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method has no effect on the actual pixels or samples stored in the bitmap. Instead the interpretation of the sampling rate is modified. This means that a 96 DPI image which is 96 pixels wide is one inch. If the physical resolution is modified to 48 DPI, then the bitmap is considered to be 2 inches wide but has the same number of pixels. If the resolution is less than REAL_EPSILON (1.192092896e-07F) the error code
Provides access to a rectangular area of the bitmap.
The access mode you wish to obtain for the lock. This is a bitwise combination of
Value | Meaning |
---|---|
The read access lock. | |
The write access lock. |
?
A reference that receives the locked memory location.
Locks are exclusive for writing but can be shared for reading. You cannot call CopyPixels while the
Provides access to a rectangular area of the bitmap.
The rectangle to be accessed.
The access mode you wish to obtain for the lock. This is a bitwise combination of
Value | Meaning |
---|---|
The read access lock. | |
The write access lock. |
?
A reference that receives the locked memory location.
Locks are exclusive for writing but can be shared for reading. You cannot call CopyPixels while the
Exposes methods that produce a clipped version of the input bitmap for a specified rectangular region of interest.
Initializes the bitmap clipper with the provided parameters.
he input bitmap source.
The rectangle of the bitmap source to clip.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Initializes the bitmap clipper with the provided parameters.
he input bitmap source.
The rectangle of the bitmap source to clip.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods that provide information about a particular codec.
Proxy function for the GetContainerFormat method.
Proxy function for the DoesSupportAnimation method.
Retrieves a value indicating whether the codec supports chromakeys.
Retrieves a value indicating whether the codec supports lossless formats.
Retrieves a value indicating whether the codec supports multi frame images.
Proxy function for the GetContainerFormat method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the pixel formats the codec supports.
The size of the pguidPixelFormats array. Use 0
on first call to determine the needed array size.
Receives the supported pixel formats. Use
on first call to determine needed array size.
The array size needed to retrieve all supported pixel formats.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The usage pattern for this method is a two call process. The first call retrieves the array size needed to retrieve all the supported pixel formats by calling it with cFormats set to 0
and pguidPixelFormats set to
. This call sets pcActual to the array size needed. Once the needed array size is determined, a second GetPixelFormats call with pguidPixelFormats set to an array of the appropriate size will retrieve the pixel formats.
Retrieves the color manangement version number the codec supports.
The size of the version buffer. Use 0
on first call to determine needed buffer size.
Receives the color management version number. Use
on first call to determine needed buffer size.
The actual buffer size needed to retrieve the full color management version number.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The usage pattern for this method is a two call process. The first call retrieves the buffer size needed to retrieve the full color management version number by calling it with cchColorManagementVersion set to 0
and wzColorManagementVersion set to
. This call sets pcchActual to the buffer size needed. Once the needed buffer size is determined, a second GetColorManagementVersion call with cchColorManagementVersion set to the buffer size and wzColorManagementVersion set to a buffer of the appropriate size will retrieve the pixel formats.
Retrieves the name of the device manufacture associated with the codec.
The size of the device manufacture's name. Use 0
on first call to determine needed buffer size.
Receives the device manufacture's name. Use
on first call to determine needed buffer size.
The actual buffer size needed to retrieve the device manufacture's name.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The usage pattern for this method is a two call process. The first call retrieves the buffer size needed to retrieve the full color management version number by calling it with cchDeviceManufacturer set to 0
and wzDeviceManufacturer set to
. This call sets pcchActual to the buffer size needed. Once the needed buffer size is determined, a second GetDeviceManufacturer call with cchDeviceManufacturer set to the buffer size and wzDeviceManufacturer set to a buffer of the appropriate size will retrieve the pixel formats.
Retrieves a comma delimited list of device models associated with the codec.
The size of the device models buffer. Use 0
on first call to determine needed buffer size.
Receives a comma delimited list of device model names associated with the codec. Use
on first call to determine needed buffer size.
The actual buffer size needed to retrieve all of the device model names.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The usage pattern for this method is a two call process. The first call retrieves the buffer size needed to retrieve the full color management version number by calling it with cchDeviceModels set to 0
and wzDeviceModels set to
. This call sets pcchActual to the buffer size needed. Once the needed buffer size is determined, a second GetDeviceModels call with cchDeviceModels set to the buffer size and wzDeviceModels set to a buffer of the appropriate size will retrieve the pixel formats.
Proxy function for the GetMimeTypes method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a comma delimited list of the file name extensions associated with the codec.
The size of the file name extension buffer. Use 0
on first call to determine needed buffer size.
Receives a comma delimited list of file name extensions associated with the codec. Use
on first call to determine needed buffer size.
The actual buffer size needed to retrieve all file name extensions associated with the codec.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The default extension for an image encoder is the first item in the list of returned extensions.
The usage pattern for this method is a two call process. The first call retrieves the buffer size needed to retrieve the full color management version number by calling it with cchFileExtensions set to 0
and wzFileExtensions set to
. This call sets pcchActual to the buffer size needed. Once the needed buffer size is determined, a second GetFileExtensions call with cchFileExtensions set to the buffer size and wzFileExtensions set to a buffer of the appropriate size will retrieve the pixel formats.
Proxy function for the DoesSupportAnimation method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a value indicating whether the codec supports chromakeys.
Receives TRUE if the codec supports chromakeys; otherwise,
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a value indicating whether the codec supports lossless formats.
Receives TRUE if the codec supports lossless formats; otherwise,
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a value indicating whether the codec supports multi frame images.
Receives TRUE if the codec supports multi frame images; otherwise,
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a value indicating whether the given mime type matches the mime type of the codec.
The mime type to compare.
Receives TRUE if the mime types match; otherwise,
Registers a progress notification callback function.
A function reference to the application defined progress notification callback function. See ProgressNotificationCallback for the callback signature.
A reference to component data for the callback method.
The
If this method succeeds, it returns
Applications can only register a single callback. Subsequent registration calls will replace the previously registered callback. To unregister a callback, pass in
Progress is reported in an increasing order between 0.0 and 1.0. If dwProgressFlags includes
Exposes methods that represent a decoder.
The interface provides access to the decoder's properties such as global thumbnails (if supported), frames, and palette.
There are a number of concrete implemenations of this interface representing each of the standard decoders provided by the platform including bitmap (BMP), Portable Network Graphics (PNG), icon (ICO), Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG), Graphics Interchange Format (GIF), Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), and Microsoft?Windows Digital Photo (WDP). The following table includes the class identifier (CLSID) for each native decoder.
CLSID Name | CLSID |
---|---|
0x6b462062, 0x7cbf, 0x400d, 0x9f, 0xdb, 0x81, 0x3d, 0xd1, 0xf, 0x27, 0x78 | |
0x389ea17b, 0x5078, 0x4cde, 0xb6, 0xef, 0x25, 0xc1, 0x51, 0x75, 0xc7, 0x51 | |
0xc61bfcdf, 0x2e0f, 0x4aad, 0xa8, 0xd7, 0xe0, 0x6b, 0xaf, 0xeb, 0xcd, 0xfe | |
0x9456a480, 0xe88b, 0x43ea, 0x9e, 0x73, 0xb, 0x2d, 0x9b, 0x71, 0xb1, 0xca | |
0x381dda3c, 0x9ce9, 0x4834, 0xa2, 0x3e, 0x1f, 0x98, 0xf8, 0xfc, 0x52, 0xbe | |
0xb54e85d9, 0xfe23, 0x499f, 0x8b, 0x88, 0x6a, 0xce, 0xa7, 0x13, 0x75, 0x2b | |
0xa26cec36, 0x234c, 0x4950, 0xae, 0x16, 0xe3, 0x4a, 0xac, 0xe7, 0x1d, 0x0d |
?
This interface may be sub-classed to provide support for third party codecs as part of the extensibility model. See the AITCodec Sample CODEC.
Codecs written as TIFF container formats that are not register will decode as a TIFF image. Client applications should check for a zero frame count to determine if the codec is valid.
Retrieves the image's container format.
Retrieves an
Proxy function for the GetMetadataQueryReader method.
Retrieves a preview image, if supported.
Not all formats support previews. Only the native Microsoft?Windows Digital Photo (WDP) codec support previews.
Proxy function for the GetThumbnail method.
Retrieves the total number of frames in the image.
Retrieves the capabilities of the decoder based on the specified stream.
The stream to retrieve the decoder capabilities from.
The
Custom decoder implementations should save the current position of the specified
Initializes the decoder with the provided stream.
The stream to use for initialization.
The stream contains the encoded pixels which are decoded each time the CopyPixels method on the
The
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the image's container format.
A reference that receives the image's container format
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the CopyPalette method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the GetMetadataQueryReader method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a preview image, if supported.
Receives a reference to the preview bitmap if supported.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Not all formats support previews. Only the native Microsoft?Windows Digital Photo (WDP) codec support previews.
Proxy function for the GetColorContexts method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the GetColorContexts method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the GetColorContexts method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the GetThumbnail method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the total number of frames in the image.
A reference that receives the total number of frames in the image.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the specified frame of the image.
The particular frame to retrieve.
A reference that receives a reference to the
Exposes methods that provide information about a decoder.
Retrieves the file pattern signatures supported by the decoder.
The array size of the pPatterns array.
Receives a list of
Receives the number of patterns the decoder supports.
Receives the actual buffer size needed to retrieve all pattern signatures supported by the decoder.
If this method succeeds, it returns
To retrieve all pattern signatures, this method should first be called with pPatterns set to
to retrieve the actual buffer size needed through pcbPatternsActual. Once the needed buffer size is known, allocate a buffer of the needed size and call GetPatterns again with the allocated buffer.
Retrieves a value that indicates whether the codec recognizes the pattern within a specified stream.
The stream to pattern match within.
A reference that receives TRUE if the patterns match; otherwise,
Creates a new
If this method succeeds, it returns
Defines methods for setting an encoder's properties such as thumbnails, frames, and palettes.
There are a number of concrete implemenations of this interface representing each of the standard encoders provided by the platform including bitmap (BMP), Portable Network Graphics (PNG), Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG), Graphics Interchange Format (GIF), Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), and Microsoft?Windows Digital Photo (WDP). The following table includes the class identifier (CLSID) for each native encoder.
CLSID Name | CLSID |
---|---|
0x69be8bb4, 0xd66d, 0x47c8, 0x86, 0x5a, 0xed, 0x15, 0x89, 0x43, 0x37, 0x82 | |
0x27949969, 0x876a, 0x41d7, 0x94, 0x47, 0x56, 0x8f, 0x6a, 0x35, 0xa4, 0xdc | |
0x1a34f5c1, 0x4a5a, 0x46dc, 0xb6, 0x44, 0x1f, 0x45, 0x67, 0xe7, 0xa6, 0x76 | |
0x114f5598, 0xb22, 0x40a0, 0x86, 0xa1, 0xc8, 0x3e, 0xa4, 0x95, 0xad, 0xbd | |
0x0131be10, 0x2001, 0x4c5f, 0xa9, 0xb0, 0xcc, 0x88, 0xfa, 0xb6, 0x4c, 0xe8 | |
0xac4ce3cb, 0xe1c1, 0x44cd, 0x82, 0x15, 0x5a, 0x16, 0x65, 0x50, 0x9e, 0xc2 |
?
Additionally this interface may be sub-classed to provide support for third party codecs as part of the extensibility model. See the AITCodec Sample CODEC.
Retrieves the encoder's container format.
Retrieves an
Proxy function for the SetPalette method.
Sets the global thumbnail for the image.
Sets the global preview for the image.
Proxy function for the GetMetadataQueryWriter method.
Initializes the encoder with an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the encoder's container format.
A reference that receives the encoder's container format
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the SetPalette method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Sets the global thumbnail for the image.
The
Returns
Returns
Sets the global preview for the image.
The
Returns
Returns
Creates a new
If this method succeeds, it returns
The parameter ppIEncoderOptions can be used to receive an
Otherwise, you can pass
See Encoding Overview for an example of how to set encoder options.
For formats that support encoding multiple frames (for example, TIFF, JPEG-XR), you can work on only one frame at a time. This means that you must call
Commits all changes for the image and closes the stream.
If this method succeeds, it returns
To finalize an image, both the frame Commit and the encoder Commit must be called. However, only call the encoder Commit method after all frames have been committed.
After the encoder has been committed, it can't be re-initialized or reused with another stream. A new encoder interface must be created, for example, with
For the encoder Commit to succeed, you must at a minimum call
Proxy function for the GetMetadataQueryWriter method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods that provide information about an encoder.
Creates a new
If this method succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods that produce a flipped (horizontal or vertical) and/or rotated (by 90 degree increments) bitmap source. Rotations are done before the flip.
IWICBitmapFipRotator requests data on a per-pixel basis, while WIC codecs provide data on a per-scanline basis. This causes the fliprotator object to exhibit n? behavior if there is no buffering. This occures because each pixel in the transformed image requires an entire scanline to be decoded in the file. It is recommended that you buffer the image using
Initializes the bitmap flip rotator with the provided parameters.
The input bitmap source.
The
If this method succeeds, it returns
Defines methods for decoding individual image frames of an encoded file.
Retrieves a metadata query reader for the frame.
For image formats with one frame (JPG, PNG, JPEG-XR), the frame-level query reader of the first frame is used to access all image metadata, and the decoder-level query reader isn?t used. For formats with more than one frame (GIF, TIFF), the frame-level query reader for a given frame is used to access metadata specific to that frame, and in the case of GIF a decoder-level metadata reader will be present. If the decoder doesn?t support metadata (BMP, ICO), this will return
Retrieves a small preview of the frame, if supported by the codec.
Not all formats support thumbnails. Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG), Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), and Microsoft?Windows Digital Photo (WDP) support thumbnails.
Retrieves a metadata query reader for the frame.
When this method returns, contains a reference to the frame's metadata query reader.
If this method succeeds, it returns
For image formats with one frame (JPG, PNG, JPEG-XR), the frame-level query reader of the first frame is used to access all image metadata, and the decoder-level query reader isn?t used. For formats with more than one frame (GIF, TIFF), the frame-level query reader for a given frame is used to access metadata specific to that frame, and in the case of GIF a decoder-level metadata reader will be present. If the decoder doesn?t support metadata (BMP, ICO), this will return
Retrieves the
If this method succeeds, it returns
If
The ppIColorContexts array must be filled with valid data: each
Retrieves the
If this method succeeds, it returns
If
The ppIColorContexts array must be filled with valid data: each
Retrieves the
If this method succeeds, it returns
If
The ppIColorContexts array must be filled with valid data: each
Retrieves a small preview of the frame, if supported by the codec.
A reference that receives a reference to the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Not all formats support thumbnails. Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG), Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), and Microsoft?Windows Digital Photo (WDP) support thumbnails.
Represents an encoder's individual image frames.
Sets the
This method doesn't fail if called on a frame whose pixel format is set to a non-indexed pixel format. If the target pixel format is a non-indexed format, the palette will be ignored.
If you already called
The palette must be specified before your first call to WritePixels/WriteSource. Doing so will cause WriteSource to use the specified palette when converting the source image to the encoder pixel format. If no palette is specified, a palette will be generated on the first call to WriteSource.
Proxy function for the SetThumbnail method.
Gets the metadata query writer for the encoder frame.
If you are setting metadata on the frame, you must do this before you use
Initializes the frame encoder using the given properties.
The set of properties to use for
If this method succeeds, it returns
If you don't want any encoding options, pass
For a complete list of encoding options supported by the Windows-provided codecs, see Native WIC Codecs.
Sets the output image dimensions for the frame.
The width of the output image.
The height of the output image.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the physical resolution of the output image.
The horizontal resolution value.
The vertical resolution value.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Windows Imaging Component (WIC) doesn't perform any special processing as a result of DPI resolution values. For example, data returned from
Requests that the encoder use the specified pixel format.
On input, the requested pixel format
Possible return values include the following.
Return code | Description |
---|---|
| Success. |
| The |
?
The encoder might not support the requested pixel format. If not, SetPixelFormat returns the closest match in the memory block that pPixelFormat points to. If the returned pixel format doesn't match the requested format, you must use an
Proxy function for the SetColorContexts method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the SetColorContexts method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the SetColorContexts method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Sets the
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method doesn't fail if called on a frame whose pixel format is set to a non-indexed pixel format. If the target pixel format is a non-indexed format, the palette will be ignored.
If you already called
The palette must be specified before your first call to WritePixels/WriteSource. Doing so will cause WriteSource to use the specified palette when converting the source image to the encoder pixel format. If no palette is specified, a palette will be generated on the first call to WriteSource.
Proxy function for the SetThumbnail method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Copies scan-line data from a caller-supplied buffer to the
Possible return values include the following.
Return code | Description |
---|---|
| Success. |
| The value of lineCount is larger than the number of scan lines in the image. |
?
Successive WritePixels calls are assumed to be sequential scan-line access in the output image.
Encodes a bitmap source.
The bitmap source to encode.
The size rectangle of the bitmap source.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If SetSize is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the size given in prc is used if not
If SetPixelFormat is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the pixel format of the
If SetResolution is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the pixel format of pIBitmapSource is used.
If SetPalette is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the target pixel format is indexed, and the pixel format of pIBitmapSource matches the encoder frame's pixel format, then the pIBitmapSource pixel format is used.
When encoding a GIF image, if the global palette is set and the frame level palette is not set directly by the user or by a custom independent software vendor (ISV) GIF codec, WriteSource will use the global palette to encode the frame even when pIBitmapSource has a frame level palette.
Starting with Windows?Vista, repeated WriteSource calls can be made as long as the total accumulated source rect height is the same as set through SetSize.
Starting with Windows?8.1, the source rect must be at least the dimensions set through SetSize. If the source rect width exceeds the SetSize width, extra pixels on the right side are ignored. If the source rect height exceeds the remaining unfilled height, extra scan lines on the bottom are ignored.
Commits the frame to the image.
If this method succeeds, it returns
After the frame Commit has been called, you can't use or reinitialize the
To finalize the image, both the frame Commit and the encoder Commit must be called. However, only call the encoder Commit method after all frames have been committed.
Gets the metadata query writer for the encoder frame.
When this method returns, contains a reference to metadata query writer for the encoder frame.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If you are setting metadata on the frame, you must do this before you use
Encodes the frame scanlines.
The number of lines to encode.
Successive WritePixels calls are assumed to be sequential scanline access in the output image.
Encodes the frame scanlines.
The number of lines to encode.
Successive WritePixels calls are assumed to be sequential scanline access in the output image.
Encodes the frame scanlines.
The number of lines to encode.
The stride of the image pixels.
A reference to the pixel buffer.
Successive WritePixels calls are assumed to be sequential scanline access in the output image.
Encodes a bitmap source.
The bitmap source to encode.
If SetSize is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the size given in prc is used if not
If SetPixelFormat is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the pixel format of the
If SetResolution is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the pixel format of pIBitmapSource is used.
If SetPalette is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the target pixel format is indexed, and the pixel format of pIBitmapSource matches the encoder frame's pixel format, then the pIBitmapSource pixel format is used.
When encoding a GIF image, if the global palette is set and the frame level palette is not set directly by the user or by a custom independent software vendor (ISV) GIF codec, WriteSource will use the global palette to encode the frame even when pIBitmapSource has a frame level palette.
Windows Vista:The source rect width must match the width set through SetSize. Repeated WriteSource calls can be made as long as the total accumulated source rect height is the same as set through SetSize.
Encodes a bitmap source.
The bitmap source to encode.
The size rectangle of the bitmap source.
If SetSize is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the size given in prc is used if not
If SetPixelFormat is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the pixel format of the
If SetResolution is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the pixel format of pIBitmapSource is used.
If SetPalette is not called prior to calling WriteSource, the target pixel format is indexed, and the pixel format of pIBitmapSource matches the encoder frame's pixel format, then the pIBitmapSource pixel format is used.
When encoding a GIF image, if the global palette is set and the frame level palette is not set directly by the user or by a custom independent software vendor (ISV) GIF codec, WriteSource will use the global palette to encode the frame even when pIBitmapSource has a frame level palette.
Windows Vista:The source rect width must match the width set through SetSize. Repeated WriteSource calls can be made as long as the total accumulated source rect height is the same as set through SetSize.
Exposes methods that support the Lock method.
The bitmap lock is simply an abstraction for a rectangular memory window into the bitmap. For the simplest case, a system memory bitmap, this is simply a reference to the top left corner of the rectangle and a stride value.
To release the exclusive lock set by Lock method and the associated
Provides access to the stride value for the memory.
Note the stride value is specific to the
Gets the pixel format of for the locked area of pixels. This can be used to compute the number of bytes-per-pixel in the locked area.
Retrieves the width and height, in pixels, of the locked rectangle.
A reference that receives the width of the locked rectangle.
A reference that receives the height of the locked rectangle.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Provides access to the stride value for the memory.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Note the stride value is specific to the
Gets the reference to the top left pixel in the locked rectangle.
A reference that receives the size of the buffer.
A reference that receives a reference to the top left pixel in the locked rectangle.
The reference provided by this method should not be used outside of the lifetime of the lock itself.
GetDataPointer is not available in multi-threaded apartment applications.
Gets the pixel format of for the locked area of pixels. This can be used to compute the number of bytes-per-pixel in the locked area.
A reference that receives the pixel format
If this method succeeds, it returns
Represents a resized version of the input bitmap using a resampling or filtering algorithm.
Images can be scaled to larger sizes; however, even with sophisticated scaling algorithms, there is only so much information in the image and artifacts tend to worsen the more you scale up.
The scaler will reapply the resampling algorithm every time CopyPixels is called. If the scaled image is to be animated, the scaled image should be created once and cached in a new bitmap, after which the
The scaler is optimized to use the minimum amount of memory required to scale the image correctly. The scaler may be used to produce parts of the image incrementally (banding) by calling CopyPixels with different rectangles representing the output bands of the image. Resampling typically requires overlapping rectangles from the source image and thus may need to request the same pixels from the source bitmap multiple times. Requesting scanlines out-of-order from some image decoders can have a significant performance penalty. Because of this reason, the scaler is optimized to handle consecutive horizontal bands of scanlines (rectangle width equal to the bitmap width). In this case the accumulator from the previous vertically adjacent rectangle is re-used to avoid duplicate scanline requests from the source. This implies that banded output from the scaler may have better performance if the bands are requested sequentially. Of course if the scaler is simply used to produce a single rectangle output, this concern is eliminated because the scaler will internally request scanlines in the correct order.
Initializes the bitmap scaler with the provided parameters.
The input bitmap source.
The destination width.
The desination height.
The
If this method succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods that refers to a source from which pixels are retrieved, but cannot be written back to.
This interface provides a common way of accessing and linking together bitmaps, decoders, format converters, and scalers. Components that implement this interface can be connected together in a graph to pull imaging data through.
This interface defines only the notion of readability or being able to produce pixels. Modifying or writing to a bitmap is considered to be a specialization specific to bitmaps which have storage and is defined in the descendant interface
Retrieves the pixel format of the bitmap source..
The pixel format returned by this method is not necessarily the pixel format the image is stored as. The codec may perform a format conversion from the storage pixel format to an output pixel format.
Retrieves the pixel width and height of the bitmap.
A reference that receives the pixel width of the bitmap.
A reference that receives the pixel height of the bitmap
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the pixel format of the bitmap source..
Receives the pixel format
If this method succeeds, it returns
The pixel format returned by this method is not necessarily the pixel format the image is stored as. The codec may perform a format conversion from the storage pixel format to an output pixel format.
Retrieves the sampling rate between pixels and physical world measurements.
A reference that receives the x-axis dpi resolution.
A reference that receives the y-axis dpi resolution.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Some formats, such as GIF and ICO, do not have full DPI support. For GIF, this method calculates the DPI values from the aspect ratio, using a base DPI of (96.0, 96.0). The ICO format does not support DPI at all, and the method always returns (96.0,96.0) for ICO images.
Additionally, WIC itself does not transform images based on the DPI values in an image. It is up to the caller to transform an image based on the resolution returned.
Retrieves the color table for indexed pixel formats.
An
Returns one of the following values.
Return code | Description |
---|---|
| The palette was unavailable. |
| The palette was successfully copied. |
?
If the
Instructs the object to produce pixels.
The rectangle to copy. A
The stride of the bitmap
The size of the buffer.
A reference to the buffer.
If this method succeeds, it returns
CopyPixels is one of the two main image processing routines (the other being Lock) triggering the actual processing. It instructs the object to produce pixels according to its algorithm - this may involve decoding a portion of a JPEG stored on disk, copying a block of memory, or even analytically computing a complex gradient. The algorithm is completely dependent on the object implementing the interface.
The caller can restrict the operation to a rectangle of interest (ROI) using the prc parameter. The ROI sub-rectangle must be fully contained in the bounds of the bitmap. Specifying a
The caller controls the memory management and must provide an output buffer (pbBuffer) for the results of the copy along with the buffer's bounds (cbBufferSize). The cbStride parameter defines the count of bytes between two vertically adjacent pixels in the output buffer. The caller must ensure that there is sufficient buffer to complete the call based on the width, height and pixel format of the bitmap and the sub-rectangle provided to the copy method.
If the caller needs to perform numerous copies of an expensive
Retrieves the pixel width and height of the bitmap.
Instructs the object to produce pixels.
The rectangle to copy. A
The stride of the bitmap
A reference to the buffer.
CopyPixels is one of the two main image processing routines (the other being Lock) triggering the actual processing. It instructs the object to produce pixels according to its algorithm - this may involve decoding a portion of a JPEG stored on disk, copying a block of memory, or even analytically computing a complex gradient. The algorithm is completely dependent on the object implementing the interface.
The caller can restrict the operation to a rectangle of interest (ROI) using the prc parameter. The ROI sub-rectangle must be fully contained in the bounds of the bitmap. Specifying a
The caller controls the memory management and must provide an output buffer (pbBuffer) for the results of the copy along with the buffer's bounds (cbBufferSize). The cbStride parameter defines the count of bytes between two vertically adjacent pixels in the output buffer. The caller must ensure that there is sufficient buffer to complete the call based on the width, height and pixel format of the bitmap and the sub-rectangle provided to the copy method.
If the caller needs to perform numerous copies of an expensive
The callee must only write to the first (prc->Width*bitsperpixel+7)/8 bytes of each line of the output buffer (in this case, a line is a consecutive string of cbStride bytes).
Instructs the object to produce pixels.
The stride of the bitmap
A reference to the buffer.
CopyPixels is one of the two main image processing routines (the other being Lock) triggering the actual processing. It instructs the object to produce pixels according to its algorithm - this may involve decoding a portion of a JPEG stored on disk, copying a block of memory, or even analytically computing a complex gradient. The algorithm is completely dependent on the object implementing the interface.
The caller can restrict the operation to a rectangle of interest (ROI) using the prc parameter. The ROI sub-rectangle must be fully contained in the bounds of the bitmap. Specifying a
The caller controls the memory management and must provide an output buffer (pbBuffer) for the results of the copy along with the buffer's bounds (cbBufferSize). The cbStride parameter defines the count of bytes between two vertically adjacent pixels in the output buffer. The caller must ensure that there is sufficient buffer to complete the call based on the width, height and pixel format of the bitmap and the sub-rectangle provided to the copy method.
If the caller needs to perform numerous copies of an expensive
The callee must only write to the first (prc->Width*bitsperpixel+7)/8 bytes of each line of the output buffer (in this case, a line is a consecutive string of cbStride bytes).
Instructs the object to produce pixels.
The stride of the bitmap
A reference to the buffer.
CopyPixels is one of the two main image processing routines (the other being Lock) triggering the actual processing. It instructs the object to produce pixels according to its algorithm - this may involve decoding a portion of a JPEG stored on disk, copying a block of memory, or even analytically computing a complex gradient. The algorithm is completely dependent on the object implementing the interface.
The caller can restrict the operation to a rectangle of interest (ROI) using the prc parameter. The ROI sub-rectangle must be fully contained in the bounds of the bitmap. Specifying a
The caller controls the memory management and must provide an output buffer (pbBuffer) for the results of the copy along with the buffer's bounds (cbBufferSize). The cbStride parameter defines the count of bytes between two vertically adjacent pixels in the output buffer. The caller must ensure that there is sufficient buffer to complete the call based on the width, height and pixel format of the bitmap and the sub-rectangle provided to the copy method.
If the caller needs to perform numerous copies of an expensive
The callee must only write to the first (prc->Width*bitsperpixel+7)/8 bytes of each line of the output buffer (in this case, a line is a consecutive string of cbStride bytes).
Instructs the object to produce pixels.
The rectangle to copy. A
If this method succeeds, it returns
CopyPixels is one of the two main image processing routines (the other being Lock) triggering the actual processing. It instructs the object to produce pixels according to its algorithm - this may involve decoding a portion of a JPEG stored on disk, copying a block of memory, or even analytically computing a complex gradient. The algorithm is completely dependent on the object implementing the interface.
The caller can restrict the operation to a rectangle of interest (ROI) using the prc parameter. The ROI sub-rectangle must be fully contained in the bounds of the bitmap. Specifying a
The caller controls the memory management and must provide an output buffer (pbBuffer) for the results of the copy along with the buffer's bounds (cbBufferSize). The cbStride parameter defines the count of bytes between two vertically adjacent pixels in the output buffer. The caller must ensure that there is sufficient buffer to complete the call based on the width, height and pixel format of the bitmap and the sub-rectangle provided to the copy method.
If the caller needs to perform numerous copies of an expensive
The callee must only write to the first (prc->Width*bitsperpixel+7)/8 bytes of each line of the output buffer (in this case, a line is a consecutive string of cbStride bytes).
Instructs the object to produce pixels.
If this method succeeds, it returns
CopyPixels is one of the two main image processing routines (the other being Lock) triggering the actual processing. It instructs the object to produce pixels according to its algorithm - this may involve decoding a portion of a JPEG stored on disk, copying a block of memory, or even analytically computing a complex gradient. The algorithm is completely dependent on the object implementing the interface.
The caller can restrict the operation to a rectangle of interest (ROI) using the prc parameter. The ROI sub-rectangle must be fully contained in the bounds of the bitmap. Specifying a
The caller controls the memory management and must provide an output buffer (pbBuffer) for the results of the copy along with the buffer's bounds (cbBufferSize). The cbStride parameter defines the count of bytes between two vertically adjacent pixels in the output buffer. The caller must ensure that there is sufficient buffer to complete the call based on the width, height and pixel format of the bitmap and the sub-rectangle provided to the copy method.
If the caller needs to perform numerous copies of an expensive
The callee must only write to the first (prc->Width*bitsperpixel+7)/8 bytes of each line of the output buffer (in this case, a line is a consecutive string of cbStride bytes).
Instructs the object to produce pixels.
If this method succeeds, it returns
CopyPixels is one of the two main image processing routines (the other being Lock) triggering the actual processing. It instructs the object to produce pixels according to its algorithm - this may involve decoding a portion of a JPEG stored on disk, copying a block of memory, or even analytically computing a complex gradient. The algorithm is completely dependent on the object implementing the interface.
The caller can restrict the operation to a rectangle of interest (ROI) using the prc parameter. The ROI sub-rectangle must be fully contained in the bounds of the bitmap. Specifying a
The caller controls the memory management and must provide an output buffer (pbBuffer) for the results of the copy along with the buffer's bounds (cbBufferSize). The cbStride parameter defines the count of bytes between two vertically adjacent pixels in the output buffer. The caller must ensure that there is sufficient buffer to complete the call based on the width, height and pixel format of the bitmap and the sub-rectangle provided to the copy method.
If the caller needs to perform numerous copies of an expensive
The callee must only write to the first (prc->Width*bitsperpixel+7)/8 bytes of each line of the output buffer (in this case, a line is a consecutive string of cbStride bytes).
Instructs the object to produce pixels.
If this method succeeds, it returns
CopyPixels is one of the two main image processing routines (the other being Lock) triggering the actual processing. It instructs the object to produce pixels according to its algorithm - this may involve decoding a portion of a JPEG stored on disk, copying a block of memory, or even analytically computing a complex gradient. The algorithm is completely dependent on the object implementing the interface.
The caller can restrict the operation to a rectangle of interest (ROI) using the prc parameter. The ROI sub-rectangle must be fully contained in the bounds of the bitmap. Specifying a
The caller controls the memory management and must provide an output buffer (pbBuffer) for the results of the copy along with the buffer's bounds (cbBufferSize). The cbStride parameter defines the count of bytes between two vertically adjacent pixels in the output buffer. The caller must ensure that there is sufficient buffer to complete the call based on the width, height and pixel format of the bitmap and the sub-rectangle provided to the copy method.
If the caller needs to perform numerous copies of an expensive
The callee must only write to the first (prc->Width*bitsperpixel+7)/8 bytes of each line of the output buffer (in this case, a line is a consecutive string of cbStride bytes).
Copies pixel data using the supplied input parameters.
The rectangle of pixels to copy.
The width to scale the source bitmap. This parameter must equal the value obtainable through
The height to scale the source bitmap. This parameter must equal the value obtainable through
The
This
The desired rotation or flip to perform prior to the pixel copy.
The transform must be an operation supported by an DoesSupportTransform call.
If a dstTransform is specified, nStride is the transformed stride and is based on the pguidDstFormat pixel format, not the original source's pixel format.
The stride of the destination buffer.
The size of the destination buffer.
The output buffer.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Returns the closest dimensions the implementation can natively scale to given the desired dimensions.
The desired width. A reference that receives the closest supported width.
The desired height. A reference that receives the closest supported height.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The Windows provided codecs provide the following support for native scaling:
Retrieves the closest pixel format to which the implementation of
If this method succeeds, it returns
The Windows provided codecs provide the following support:
Determines whether a specific transform option is supported natively by the implementation of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
The Windows provided codecs provide the following level of support:
Exposes methods for color management.
A Color Context is an abstraction for a color profile. The profile can either be loaded from a file (like "sRGB Color Space Profile.icm"), read from a memory buffer, or can be defined by an EXIF color space. The system color profile directory can be obtained by calling GetColorDirectory.
Once a color context has been initialized, it cannot be re-initialized.
Retrieves the color context type.
Retrieves the Exchangeable Image File (EXIF) color space color context.
This method should only be used when
Initializes the color context from the given file.
The name of the file.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Once a color context has been initialized, it can't be re-initialized.
Initializes the color context from a memory block.
The buffer used to initialize the
The size of the pbBuffer buffer.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Once a color context has been initialized, it can't be re-initialized.
Initializes the color context using an Exchangeable Image File (EXIF) color space.
The value of the EXIF color space.
Value | Meaning |
---|---|
| A sRGB color space. |
| An Adobe RGB color space. |
?
If this method succeeds, it returns
Once a color context has been initialized, it can't be re-initialized.
Retrieves the color context type.
A reference that receives the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the color context profile.
The size of the pbBuffer buffer.
A reference that receives the color context profile.
A reference that receives the actual buffer size needed to retrieve the entire color context profile.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Only use this method if the context type is
Calling this method with pbBuffer set to
Retrieves the Exchangeable Image File (EXIF) color space color context.
A reference that receives the EXIF color space color context.
Value | Meaning |
---|---|
| A sRGB color space. |
| An Adobe RGB color space. |
| Unused. |
?
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method should only be used when
Exposes methods that transforms an
A
Once initialized, a color transform cannot be reinitialized. Because of this, a color transform cannot be used with multiple sources or varying parameters.
Initializes an
If this method succeeds, it returns
The currently supported formats for the pIContextSource and pixelFmtDest parameters are:
In order to get correct behavior from a color transform, the input and output pixel formats must be compatible with the source and destination color profiles. For example, an sRGB destination color profile will produce incorrect results when used with a CMYK destination pixel format.
Exposes methods that provide component information.
Retrieves the component's
Proxy function for the GetCLSID method.
Retrieves the signing status of the component.
Signing is unused by WIC. Therefore, all components
This function can be used to determine whether a component has no binary component or has been added to the disabled components list in the registry.
Retrieves the vendor
Retrieves the component's
If this method succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the GetCLSID method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the signing status of the component.
A reference that receives the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Signing is unused by WIC. Therefore, all components
This function can be used to determine whether a component has no binary component or has been added to the disabled components list in the registry.
Retrieves the name of component's author.
The size of the wzAuthor buffer.
A reference that receives the name of the component's author. The locale of the string depends on the value that the codec wrote to the registry at install time. For built-in components, these strings are always in English.
A reference that receives the actual length of the component's authors name. The author name is optional; if an author name is not specified by the component, the length returned is 0.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If cchAuthor is 0 and wzAuthor is
Retrieves the vendor
A reference that receives the component's vendor
If this method succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the GetVersion method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the component's specification version.
The size of the wzSpecVersion buffer.
When this method returns, contain a culture invarient string of the component's specification version. The version form is NN.NN.NN.NN.
A reference that receives the actual length of the component's specification version. The specification version is optional; if a value is not specified by the component, the length returned is 0.
If this method succeeds, it returns
All built-in components return "1.0.0.0", except for pixel formats, which do not have a spec version.
If cchAuthor is 0 and wzAuthor is
Retrieves the component's friendly name, which is a human-readable display name for the component.
The size of the wzFriendlyName buffer.
A reference that receives the friendly name of the component. The locale of the string depends on the value that the codec wrote to the registry at install time. For built-in components, these strings are always in English.
A reference that receives the actual length of the component's friendly name.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If cchFriendlyName is 0 and wzFriendlyName is
Provides information and functionality specific to the DDS image format.
This interface is implemented by the WIC DDS codec. To obtain this interface, create an
Gets DDS-specific data.
Gets DDS-specific data.
A reference to the structure where the information is returned.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the specified frame of the DDS image.
The requested index within the texture array.
The requested mip level.
The requested slice within the 3D texture.
A reference to a
If this method succeeds, it returns
A DDS file can contain multiple images that are organized into a three level hierarchy. First, DDS file may contain multiple textures in a texture array. Second, each texture can have multiple mip levels. Finally, the texture may be a 3D (volume) texture and have multiple slices, each of which is a 2D texture. See the DDS documentation for more information.
WIC maps this three level hierarchy into a linear array of
Enables writing DDS format specific information to an encoder.
This interface is implemented by the WIC DDS codec. To obtain this interface, create an
Gets or sets DDS-specific data.
An application can call GetParameters to obtain the default DDS parameters, modify some or all of them, and then call SetParameters.
Sets DDS-specific data.
Points to the structure where the information is described.
If this method succeeds, it returns
You cannot call this method after you have started to write frame data, for example by calling
Setting DDS parameters using this method provides the DDS encoder with information about the expected number of frames and the dimensions and other parameters of each frame. The DDS encoder will fail if you do not set frame data that matches these expectations. For example, if you set WICDdsParameters::Width and Height to 32, and MipLevels to 6, the DDS encoder will expect 6 frames with the following dimensions:
Gets DDS-specific data.
Points to the structure where the information is returned.
If this method succeeds, it returns
An application can call GetParameters to obtain the default DDS parameters, modify some or all of them, and then call SetParameters.
Creates a new frame to encode.
A reference to the newly created frame object.
Points to the location where the array index is returned.
Points to the location where the mip level index is returned.
Points to the location where the slice index is returned.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This is equivalent to
Provides access to a single frame of DDS image data in its native
This interface is implemented by the WIC DDS codec. To obtain this interface, create an
Gets information about the format in which the DDS image is stored.
This information can be used for allocating memory or constructing Direct3D or Direct2D resources, for example by using
Gets the width and height, in blocks, of the DDS image.
The width of the DDS image in blocks.
The height of the DDS image in blocks.
If this method succeeds, it returns
For block compressed textures, the returned width and height values do not completely define the texture size because the image is padded to fit the closest whole block size. For example, three BC1 textures with pixel dimensions of 1x1, 2x2 and 4x4 will all report pWidthInBlocks = 1 and pHeightInBlocks = 1.
If the texture does not use a block-compressed
Gets information about the format in which the DDS image is stored.
Information about the DDS format.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This information can be used for allocating memory or constructing Direct3D or Direct2D resources, for example by using
Requests pixel data as it is natively stored within the DDS file.
The rectangle to copy from the source. A
If the texture uses a block-compressed
The stride, in bytes, of the destination buffer. This represents the number of bytes from the buffer reference to the next row of data. If the texture uses a block-compressed
The size, in bytes, of the destination buffer.
A reference to the destination buffer.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If the texture does not use a block-compressed
If the texture uses a block-compressed
[This documentation is preliminary and is subject to change.]
Requests pixel data as it is natively stored within the DDS file.
The rectangle to copy from the source. A
If the texture uses a block-compressed
The stride, in bytes, of the destination buffer. This represents the number of bytes from the buffer reference to the next row of data. If the texture uses a block-compressed
A reference to the destination buffer.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If the texture does not use a block-compressed
If the texture uses a block-compressed
Gets the current set of parameters.
Gets or sets the exposure compensation stop value of the raw image.
Gets or sets the named white point of the raw image.
If the named white points are not supported by the raw image or the raw file contains named white points that are not supported by this API, the codec implementer should still mark this capability as supported.
If the named white points are not supported by the raw image, a best effort should be made to adjust the image to the named white point even when it isn't a pre-defined white point of the raw file.
If the raw file containes named white points not supported by this API, the codec implementer should support the named white points in
Gets or sets the white point Kelvin temperature of the raw image.
Gets or sets the contrast value of the raw image.
Gets or sets the current gamma setting of the raw image.
Gets or sets the sharpness value of the raw image.
Gets or sets the saturation value of the raw image.
Gets or sets the tint value of the raw image.
Gets or sets the noise reduction value of the raw image.
Sets the destination color context.
Gets or sets the current rotation angle.
Gets or sets the current
Sets the notification callback method.
Retrieves information about which capabilities are supported for a raw image.
A reference that receives
If this method succeeds, it returns
It is recommended that a codec report that a capability is supported even if the results at the outer range limits are not of perfect quality.
Sets the desired
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the current set of parameters.
A reference that receives a reference to the current set of parameters.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the exposure compensation stop value.
The exposure compensation value. The value range for exposure compensation is -5.0 through +5.0, which equates to 10 full stops.
If this method succeeds, it returns
It is recommended that a codec report that this method is supported even if the results at the outer range limits are not of perfect quality.
Gets the exposure compensation stop value of the raw image.
A reference that receives the exposure compensation stop value. The default is the "as-shot" setting.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the white point RGB values.
The red white point value.
The green white point value.
The blue white point value.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Due to other white point setting methods (e.g. SetWhitePointKelvin), care must be taken by codec implementers to ensure proper interoperability. For instance, if the caller sets via a named white point then the codec implementer may whis to disable reading back the correspoinding Kelvin temperature. In specific cases where the codec implementer wishes to deny a given action because of previous calls,
Gets the white point RGB values.
A reference that receives the red white point value.
A reference that receives the green white point value.
A reference that receives the blue white point value.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the named white point of the raw file.
A bitwise combination of the enumeration values.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If the named white points are not supported by the raw image or the raw file contains named white points that are not supported by this API, the codec implementer should still mark this capability as supported.
If the named white points are not supported by the raw image, a best effort should be made to adjust the image to the named white point even when it isn't a pre-defined white point of the raw file.
If the raw file containes named white points not supported by this API, the codec implementer should support the named white points in the API.
Due to other white point setting methods (e.g. SetWhitePointKelvin), care must be taken by codec implementers to ensure proper interoperability. For instance, if the caller sets via a named white point then the codec implementer may whis to disable reading back the correspoinding Kelvin temperature. In specific cases where the codec implementer wishes to deny a given action because of previous calls,
Gets the named white point of the raw image.
A reference that receives the bitwise combination of the enumeration values.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If the named white points are not supported by the raw image or the raw file contains named white points that are not supported by this API, the codec implementer should still mark this capability as supported.
If the named white points are not supported by the raw image, a best effort should be made to adjust the image to the named white point even when it isn't a pre-defined white point of the raw file.
If the raw file containes named white points not supported by this API, the codec implementer should support the named white points in
Sets the white point Kelvin value.
The white point Kelvin value. Acceptable Kelvin values are 1,500 through 30,000.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Codec implementers should faithfully adjust the color temperature within the range supported natively by the raw image. For values outside the native support range, the codec implementer should provide a best effort representation of the image at that color temperature.
Codec implementers should return
Codec implementers must ensure proper interoperability with other white point setting methods such as SetWhitePointRGB. For example, if the caller sets the white point via SetNamedWhitePoint then the codec implementer may want to disable reading back the correspoinding Kelvin temperature. In specific cases where the codec implementer wants to deny a given action because of previous calls,
Gets the white point Kelvin temperature of the raw image.
A reference that receives the white point Kelvin temperature of the raw image. The default is the "as-shot" setting value.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the information about the current Kelvin range of the raw image.
A reference that receives the minimum Kelvin temperature.
A reference that receives the maximum Kelvin temperature.
A reference that receives the Kelvin step value.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the contrast value of the raw image.
The contrast value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting. The value range for contrast is 0.0 through 1.0. The 0.0 lower limit represents no contrast applied to the image, while the 1.0 upper limit represents the highest amount of contrast that can be applied.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The codec implementer must determine what the upper range value represents and must determine how to map the value to their image processing routines.
Gets the contrast value of the raw image.
A reference that receives the contrast value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting. The value range for contrast is 0.0 through 1.0. The 0.0 lower limit represents no contrast applied to the image, while the 1.0 upper limit represents the highest amount of contrast that can be applied.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the desired gamma value.
The desired gamma value.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the current gamma setting of the raw image.
A reference that receives the current gamma setting.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the sharpness value of the raw image.
The sharpness value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting. The value range for sharpness is 0.0 through 1.0. The 0.0 lower limit represents no sharpening applied to the image, while the 1.0 upper limit represents the highest amount of sharpness that can be applied.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The codec implementer must determine what the upper range value represents and must determine how to map the value to their image processing routines.
Gets the sharpness value of the raw image.
A reference that receives the sharpness value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting. The value range for sharpness is 0.0 through 1.0. The 0.0 lower limit represents no sharpening applied to the image, while the 1.0 upper limit represents the highest amount of sharpness that can be applied.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the saturation value of the raw image.
The saturation value of the raw image. The value range for saturation is 0.0 through 1.0. A value of 0.0 represents an image with a fully de-saturated image, while a value of 1.0 represents the highest amount of saturation that can be applied.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The codec implementer must determine what the upper range value represents and must determine how to map the value to their image processing routines.
Gets the saturation value of the raw image.
A reference that receives the saturation value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting. The value range for saturation is 0.0 through 1.0. A value of 0.0 represents an image with a fully de-saturated image, while a value of 1.0 represents the highest amount of saturation that can be applied.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the tint value of the raw image.
The tint value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting if it exists or 0.0. The value range for sharpness is -1.0 through +1.0. The -1.0 lower limit represents a full green bias to the image, while the 1.0 upper limit represents a full magenta bias.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The codec implementer must determine what the outer range values represent and must determine how to map the values to their image processing routines.
Gets the tint value of the raw image.
A reference that receives the tint value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting if it exists or 0.0. The value range for sharpness is -1.0 through +1.0. The -1.0 lower limit represents a full green bias to the image, while the 1.0 upper limit represents a full magenta bias.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the noise reduction value of the raw image.
The noise reduction value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting if it exists or 0.0. The value range for noise reduction is 0.0 through 1.0. The 0.0 lower limit represents no noise reduction applied to the image, while the 1.0 upper limit represents highest noise reduction amount that can be applied.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The codec implementer must determine what the upper range value represents and must determine how to map the value to their image processing routines.
Gets the noise reduction value of the raw image.
A reference that receives the noise reduction value of the raw image. The default value is the "as-shot" setting if it exists or 0.0. The value range for noise reduction is 0.0 through 1.0. The 0.0 lower limit represents no noise reduction applied to the image, while the 1.0 upper limit represents full highest noise reduction amount that can be applied.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the destination color context.
The destination color context.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the tone curve for the raw image.
The size of the pToneCurve structure.
The desired tone curve.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the tone curve of the raw image.
The size of the pToneCurve buffer.
A reference that receives the
A reference that receives the size needed to obtain the tone curve structure.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the desired rotation angle.
The desired rotation angle.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the current rotation angle.
A reference that receives the current rotation angle.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the current
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the current
If this method succeeds, it returns
Sets the notification callback method.
Pointer to the notification callback method.
If this method succeeds, it returns
An application-defined callback method used for raw image parameter change notifications.
An application-defined callback method used for raw image parameter change notifications.
A set of
If this method succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods that provide enumeration services for individual metadata items.
Skips to given number of objects.
The number of objects to skip.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Resets the current position to the beginning of the enumeration.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a copy of the current
If this method succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods used for in-place metadata editing. A fast metadata encoder enables you to add and remove metadata to an image without having to fully re-encode the image.
A decoder must be created using the
Not all metadata formats support fast metadata encoding. The native metadata handlers that support metadata are IFD, Exif, XMP, and GPS.
If a fast metadata encoder fails, the image will need to be fully re-encoded to add the metadata.
Proxy function for the GetMetadataQueryWriter method.
Finalizes metadata changes to the image stream.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If the commit fails and returns
If the commit fails for any reason, you will need to re-encode the image to ensure the new metadata is added to the image.
Proxy function for the GetMetadataQueryWriter method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Initializes the format converter.
If you do not have a predefined palette, you must first create one. Use InitializeFromBitmap to create the palette object, then pass it in along with your other parameters.
dither, pIPalette, alphaThresholdPercent, and paletteTranslate are used to mitigate color loss when converting to a reduced bit-depth format. For conversions that do not need these settings, the following parameters values should be used: dither set to
The basic algorithm involved when using an ordered dither requires a fixed palette, found in the
If colors in pIPalette do not closely match those in paletteTranslate, the mapping may produce undesireable results.
When converting a bitmap which has an alpha channel, such as a Portable Network Graphics (PNG), to 8bpp, the alpha channel is normally ignored. Any pixels which were transparent in the original bitmap show up as black in the final output because both transparent and black have pixel values of zero in the respective formats.
Some 8bpp content can contains an alpha color; for instance, the Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) format allows for a single palette entry to be used as a transparent color. For this type of content, alphaThresholdPercent specifies what percentage of transparency should map to the transparent color. Because the alpha value is directly proportional to the opacity (not transparency) of a pixel, the alphaThresholdPercent indicates what level of opacity is mapped to the fully transparent color. For instance, 9.8% implies that any pixel with an alpha value of less than 25 will be mapped to the transparent color. A value of 100% maps all pixels which are not fully opaque to the transparent color. Note that the palette should provide a transparent color. If it does not, the 'transparent' color will be the one closest to zero - often black.
Initializes the format converter.
The input bitmap to convert
The destination pixel format
The
The palette to use for conversion.
The alpha threshold to use for conversion.
The palette translation type to use for conversion.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If you do not have a predefined palette, you must first create one. Use InitializeFromBitmap to create the palette object, then pass it in along with your other parameters.
dither, pIPalette, alphaThresholdPercent, and paletteTranslate are used to mitigate color loss when converting to a reduced bit-depth format. For conversions that do not need these settings, the following parameters values should be used: dither set to
The basic algorithm involved when using an ordered dither requires a fixed palette, found in the
If colors in pIPalette do not closely match those in paletteTranslate, the mapping may produce undesireable results.
When converting a bitmap which has an alpha channel, such as a Portable Network Graphics (PNG), to 8bpp, the alpha channel is normally ignored. Any pixels which were transparent in the original bitmap show up as black in the final output because both transparent and black have pixel values of zero in the respective formats.
Some 8bpp content can contains an alpha color; for instance, the Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) format allows for a single palette entry to be used as a transparent color. For this type of content, alphaThresholdPercent specifies what percentage of transparency should map to the transparent color. Because the alpha value is directly proportional to the opacity (not transparency) of a pixel, the alphaThresholdPercent indicates what level of opacity is mapped to the fully transparent color. For instance, 9.8% implies that any pixel with an alpha value of less than 25 will be mapped to the transparent color. A value of 100% maps all pixels which are not fully opaque to the transparent color. Note that the palette should provide a transparent color. If it does not, the 'transparent' color will be the one closest to zero - often black.
Determines if the source pixel format can be converted to the destination pixel format.
The source pixel format.
The destionation pixel format.
A reference that receives a value indicating whether the source pixel format can be converted to the destination pixel format.
Exposes methods that provide information about a pixel format converter.
Retrieves a list of GUIDs that signify which pixel formats the converter supports.
The size of the pPixelFormatGUIDs array.
Pointer to a
The actual array size needed to retrieve all pixel formats supported by the converter.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The format converter does not necessarily guarantee symmetricality with respect to conversion; that is, a converter may be able to convert FROM a particular format without actually being able to convert TO a particular format. In order to test symmetricality, use CanConvert.
To determine the number of pixel formats a coverter can handle, set cFormats to 0
and pPixelFormatGUIDs to
. The converter will fill pcActual with the number of formats supported by that converter.
Creates a new
If this method succeeds, it returns
Encodes
Encodes the image to the frame given by the
If this method succeeds, it returns
The image passed in must be created on the same device as in
You must correctly and independently have set up the
Encodes the image as a thumbnail to the frame given by the
If this method succeeds, it returns
The image passed in must be created on the same device as in
You must correctly and independently have set up the
Encodes the given image as the thumbnail to the given WIC bitmap encoder.
The Direct2D image that will be encoded.
The encoder on which the thumbnail is set.
Additional parameters to control encoding.
If this method succeeds, it returns
You must create the image that you pass in on the same device as in
Before you call WriteThumbnail, you must set up the
If WriteThumbnail fails, it might return E_OUTOFMEMORY,
Exposes methods used to create components for the Windows Imaging Component (WIC) such as decoders, encoders and pixel format converters.
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
When a decoder is created using this method, the file handle must remain alive during the lifetime of the decoder.
Proxy function for the CreateComponentInfo method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Creates a new instance of
If this method succeeds, it returns
Other values may be available for both guidContainerFormat and pguidVendor depending on the installed WIC-enabled encoders. The values listed are those that are natively supported by the operating system.
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Other values may be available for both guidContainerFormat and pguidVendor depending on the installed WIC-enabled encoders. The values listed are those that are natively supported by the operating system.
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a new instance of an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the CreateBitmapClipper method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the CreateBitmapFlipRotator method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a new instance of the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates a
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Providing a rectangle that is larger than the source will produce undefined results.
This method always creates a separate copy of the source image, similar to the cache option
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
The size of the
The stride of the destination bitmap will equal the stride of the source data, regardless of the width and height specified.
The pixelFormat parameter defines the pixel format for both the input data and the output bitmap.
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
For a non-palletized bitmap, set
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Creates an
If this method succeeds, it returns
Component types must be enumerated seperately. Combinations of component types and
Creates a new instance of the fast metadata encoder based on the given
If this method succeeds, it returns
The Windows provided codecs do not support fast metadata encoding at the decoder level, and only support fast metadata encoding at the frame level. To create a fast metadata encoder from a frame, see CreateFastMetadataEncoderFromFrameDecode.
Creates a new instance of the fast metadata encoder based on the given image frame.
The
When this method returns, contains a reference to a new fast metadata encoder.
If this method succeeds, it returns
For a list of support metadata formats for fast metadata encoding, see WIC Metadata Overview.
Proxy function for the CreateQueryWriter method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the CreateQueryWriterFromReader method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
An extension of the WIC factory interface that includes the ability to create an
Creates a new image encoder object.
The
A reference to a variable that receives a reference to the
If this method succeeds, it returns
You must create images to pass to the image encoder on the same Direct2D device that you pass to this method.
You are responsible for setting up the bitmap encoder itself through the existing
Exposes methods for decoding JPEG images. Provides access to the Start Of Frame (SOF) header, Start of Scan (SOS) header, the Huffman and Quantization tables, and the compressed JPEG JPEG data. Also enables indexing for efficient random access.
Obtain this interface by calling IUnknown::QueryInterface on the Windows-provided IWICBitmapFrameDecoder interface for the JPEG decoder.
Retrieves header data from the entire frame. The result includes parameters from the Start Of Frame (SOF) marker for the scan as well as parameters derived from other metadata such as the color model of the compressed data.
Retrieves a value indicating whether this decoder supports indexing for efficient random access.
True if indexing is supported; otherwise, false.
Returns
Indexing is only supported for some JPEG types. Call this method
Enables indexing of the JPEG for efficient random access.
A value specifying whether indexes should be generated immediately or deferred until a future call to
The granularity of the indexing, in pixels.
Returns
This method enables efficient random-access to the image pixels at the expense of memory usage. The amount of memory required for indexing depends on the requested index granularity. Unless SetIndexing is called, it is much more efficient to access a JPEG by progressing through its pixels top-down during calls to
This method will fail if indexing is unsupported on the file.
The provided interval size controls horizontal spacing of index entries. This value is internally rounded up according to the JPEG?s MCU (minimum coded unit) size, which is typically either 8 or 16 unscaled pixels. The vertical size of the index interval is always equal to one MCU size.
Indexes can be generated immediately, or during future calls to
Removes the indexing from a JPEG that has been indexed using
Returns
Retrieves a copy of the AC Huffman table for the specified scan and table.
The zero-based index of the scan for which data is retrieved.
The index of the AC Huffman table to retrieve. Valid indices for a given scan can be determined by retrieving the scan header with
A reference that receives the table data. This parameter must not be
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The operation was successful. |
| The specified scan index is invalid. |
| Can occur if pAcHuffmanTable is |
?
Retrieves a copy of the DC Huffman table for the specified scan and table.
The zero-based index of the scan for which data is retrieved.
The index of the DC Huffman table to retrieve. Valid indices for a given scan can be determined by retrieving the scan header with
A reference that receives the table data. This parameter must not be
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The operation was successful. |
| The specified scan index is invalid. |
| Can occur if pTable is |
?
Retrieves a copy of the quantization table.
The zero-based index of the scan for which data is retrieved.
The index of the quantization table to retrieve. Valid indices for a given scan can be determined by retrieving the scan header with
A reference that receives the table data. This parameter must not be
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The operation was successful. |
| The specified scan index is invalid. |
| Can occur if pTable is |
?
Retrieves header data from the entire frame. The result includes parameters from the Start Of Frame (SOF) marker for the scan as well as parameters derived from other metadata such as the color model of the compressed data.
A reference that receives the frame header data.
Returns
Retrieves parameters from the Start Of Scan (SOS) marker for the scan with the specified index.
The index of the scan for which header data is retrieved.
A reference that receives the frame header data.
Returns
Retrieves a copy of the compressed JPEG scan directly from the WIC decoder frame's output stream.
The zero-based index of the scan for which data is retrieved.
The byte position in the scan data to begin copying. Use 0 on the first call. If the output buffer size is insufficient to store the entire scan, this offset allows you to resume copying from the end of the previous copy operation.
The size, in bytes, of the pbScanData array.
A reference that receives the table data. This parameter must not be
A reference that receives the size of the scan data actually copied into pbScanData. The size returned may be smaller that the size of cbScanData. This parameter may be
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The operation was successful. |
| The specified scan index is invalid. |
?
Exposes methods for writing compressed JPEG scan data directly to the WIC encoder's output stream. Also provides access to the Huffman and quantization tables.
Obtain this interface by calling IUnknown::QueryInterface on the Windows-provided IWICBitmapFrameEncoder interface for the JPEG encoder.
The WIC JPEG encoder supports a smaller subset of JPEG features than the decoder does.
Retrieves a copy of the AC Huffman table for the specified scan and table.
The zero-based index of the scan for which data is retrieved.
The index of the AC Huffman table to retrieve.
A reference that receives the table data. This parameter must not be
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The operation was successful. |
| The specified scan index is invalid. |
| Can occur if pAcHuffmanTable is |
?
Retrieves a copy of the DC Huffman table for the specified scan and table.
The zero-based index of the scan for which data is retrieved.
The index of the DC Huffman table to retrieve.
A reference that receives the table data. This parameter must not be
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The operation was successful. |
| The specified scan index is invalid. |
| Can occur if pTable is |
?
Retrieves a copy of the quantization table.
The zero-based index of the scan for which data is retrieved.
The index of the quantization table to retrieve.
A reference that receives the table data. This parameter must not be
This method can return one of these values.
Return value | Description |
---|---|
| The operation was successful. |
| The specified scan index is invalid. |
| Can occur if pTable is |
?
Writes scan data to a JPEG frame.
The size of the data in the pbScanData parameter.
The scan data to write.
Returns
WriteScan may be called multiple times. Each call appends the scan data specified to any previous scan data. Complete the scan by calling
Any calls to set encoder parameters or image metadata that will appear before the scan data in the resulting JPEG file must be completed before the first call to this method. This includes calls to
Exposes methods for retrieving metadata blocks and items from a decoder or its image frames using a metadata query expression.
A metadata query reader uses metadata query expressions to access embedded metadata. For more information on the metadata query language, see the Metadata Query Language Overview.
The benefit of the query reader is the ability to access a metadata item in a single step.
The query reader also provides the way to traverse the whole set of metadata hierarchy with the help of the GetEnumerator method. However, it is not recommended to use this method since IWICMetadataBlockReader and IWICMetadataReader provide a more convenient and cheaper way.
Gets the metadata query readers container format.
Gets the metadata query readers container format.
Pointer that receives the cointainer format
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the current path relative to the root metadata block.
The length of the wzNamespace buffer.
Pointer that receives the current namespace location.
The actual buffer length that was needed to retrieve the current namespace location.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If you pass
If the query reader is relative to the top of the metadata hierarchy, it will return a single-char string.
If the query reader is relative to a nested metadata block, this method will return the path to the current query reader.
Retrieves the metadata block or item identified by a metadata query expression.
The query expression to the requested metadata block or item.
When this method returns, contains the metadata block or item requested.
If this method succeeds, it returns
GetMetadataByName uses metadata query expressions to access embedded metadata. For more information on the metadata query language, see the Metadata Query Language Overview.
If multiple blocks or items exist that are expressed by the same query expression, the first metadata block or item found will be returned.
Gets an enumerator of all metadata items at the current relative location within the metadata hierarchy.
A reference to a variable that receives a reference to the
The retrieved enumerator only contains query strings for the metadata blocks and items in the current level of the hierarchy.
Exposes methods for setting or removing metadata blocks and items to an encoder or its image frames using a metadata query expression.
A metadata query writer uses metadata query expressions to set or remove metadata. For more information on the metadata query language, see the Metadata Query Language Overview.
Sets a metadata item to a specific location.
The name of the metadata item.
The metadata to set.
If this method succeeds, it returns
SetMetadataByName uses metadata query expressions to remove metadata. For more information on the metadata query language, see the Metadata Query Language Overview.
If the value set is a nested metadata block then use variant type VT_UNKNOWN
and pvarValue pointing to the
Proxy function for the RemoveMetadataByName method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods for accessing and building a color table, primarily for indexed pixel formats.
If the
InitializeFromBitmap's fAddTransparentColor parameter will add a transparent color to the end of the color collection if its size if less than 256, otherwise index 255 will be replaced with the transparent color. If a pre-defined palette type is used, it will change to BitmapPaletteTypeCustom since it no longer matches the predefined palette.
The palette interface is an auxiliary imaging interface in that it does not directly concern bitmaps and pixels; rather it provides indexed color translation for indexed bitmaps. For an indexed pixel format with M bits per pixels: (The number of colors in the palette) greater than 2^M.
Traditionally the basic operation of the palette is to provide a translation from a byte (or smaller) index into a 32bpp color value. This is often accomplished by a 256 entry table of color values.
Retrieves the
WICBitmapPaletteCustom is used for palettes initialized from both InitializeCustom and InitializeFromBitmap. There is no distinction is made between optimized and custom palettes.
Proxy function for the GetColorCount method.
Retrieves a value that describes whether the palette is black and white.
A palette is considered to be black and white only if it contains exactly two entries, one full black (0xFF000000) and one full white (0xFFFFFFF).
Retrieves a value that describes whether a palette is grayscale.
A palette is considered grayscale only if, for every entry, the alpha value is 0xFF and the red, green and blue values match.
Initializes the palette to one of the pre-defined palettes specified by
If this method succeeds, it returns
If a transparent color is added to a palette, the palette is no longer predefined and is returned as
Proxy function for the InitializeCustom method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Initializes a palette using a computed optimized values based on the reference bitmap.
Pointer to the source bitmap.
The number of colors to initialize the palette with.
A value to indicate whether to add a transparent color.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The resulting palette contains the specified number of colors which best represent the colors present in the bitmap. The algorithm operates on the opaque RGB color value of each pixel in the reference bitmap and hence ignores any alpha values. If a transparent color is required, set the fAddTransparentColor parameter to TRUE and one fewer optimized color will be computed, reducing the colorCount, and a fully transparent color entry will be added.
Initialize the palette based on a given palette.
Pointer to the source palette.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves the
If this method succeeds, it returns
WICBitmapPaletteCustom is used for palettes initialized from both InitializeCustom and InitializeFromBitmap. There is no distinction is made between optimized and custom palettes.
Proxy function for the GetColorCount method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Fills out the supplied color array with the colors from the internal color table. The color array should be sized according to the return results from GetColorCount.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Retrieves a value that describes whether the palette is black and white.
A reference to a variable that receives a boolean value that indicates whether the palette is black and white. TRUE indicates that the palette is black and white; otherwise,
If this method succeeds, it returns
A palette is considered to be black and white only if it contains exactly two entries, one full black (0xFF000000) and one full white (0xFFFFFFF).
Retrieves a value that describes whether a palette is grayscale.
A reference to a variable that receives a boolean value that indicates whether the palette is grayscale. TRUE indicates that the palette is grayscale; otherwise
If this method succeeds, it returns
A palette is considered grayscale only if, for every entry, the alpha value is 0xFF and the red, green and blue values match.
Proxy function for the HasAlpha method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods that provide information about a pixel format.
Gets the pixel format
Gets the pixel format's
The returned color context is the default color space for the pixel format. However, if an
Proxy function for the GetBitsPerPixel method.
Proxy function for the GetChannelCount method.
Gets the pixel format
Pointer that receives the pixel format
If this method succeeds, it returns
Gets the pixel format's
If this method succeeds, it returns
The returned color context is the default color space for the pixel format. However, if an
Proxy function for the GetBitsPerPixel method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Proxy function for the GetChannelCount method.
If this function succeeds, it returns
Gets the pixel format's channel mask.
The index to the channel mask to retrieve.
The size of the pbMaskBuffer buffer.
Pointer to the mask buffer.
The actual buffer size needed to obtain the channel mask.
If this method succeeds, it returns
If 0 and
Extends
Returns whether the format supports transparent pixels.
An indexed pixel format will not return TRUE even though it may have some transparency support.
Returns whether the format supports transparent pixels.
Returns TRUE if the pixel format supports transparency; otherwise,
If this method succeeds, it returns
An indexed pixel format will not return TRUE even though it may have some transparency support.
Returns the
If this method succeeds, it returns
Allows planar component image pixels to be written to an encoder. When supported by the encoder, this allows an application to encode planar component image data without first converting to an interleaved pixel format.
You can use QueryInterface to obtain this interface from the Windows provided implementation of
Encoding YCbCr data using
Writes lines from the source planes to the encoded format.
The number of lines to encode. See the Remarks section for WIC Jpeg specific line count restrictions.
Specifies the source buffers for each component plane encoded.
The number of component planes specified by the pPlanes parameter.
If the planes and source rectangle do not meet the requirements, this method fails with
Successive WritePixels calls are assumed sequentially add scanlines to the output image.
The interleaved pixel format set via
WIC JPEG Encoder:
QueryInterface can be used to obtain this interface from the WIC JPEG
Depending upon the configured chroma subsampling, the lineCount parameter has the following restrictions:
Chroma Subsampling | Line Count Restriction | Chroma Plane Width | Chroma Plane Height |
---|---|---|---|
4:2:0 | Multiple of 2, unless the call covers the last scanline of the image | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | lumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
4:2:2 | Any | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | Any |
4:4:4 | Any | Any | Any |
4:4:0 | Multiple of 2, unless the call covers the last scanline of the image | Any | llumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
?
The full scanline width must be encoded, and the width of the bitmap sources must match their planar configuration.
Additionally, if a pixel format is set via
The supported pixel formats of the bitmap sources passed into this method are as follows:
Plane Count | Plane 1 | Plane 2 | Plane 3 |
---|---|---|---|
3 | |||
2 | N/A |
?
Writes lines from the source planes to the encoded format.
Specifies an array of
The number of component planes specified by the planes parameter.
The source rectangle of pixels to encode from the
If the planes and source rectangle do not meet the requirements, this method fails with
If the
Successive WriteSource calls are assumed sequentially add scanlines to the output image.
The interleaved pixel format set via
WIC JPEG Encoder:
QueryInterface can be used to obtain this interface from the WIC JPEG
Depending upon the configured chroma subsampling, the lineCount parameter has the following restrictions:
Chroma Subsampling | X Coordinate | Y Coordinate | Chroma Width | Chroma Height |
---|---|---|---|---|
4:2:0 | Multiple of 2 | Multiple of 2 | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | lumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
4:2:2 | Multiple of 2 | Any | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | Any |
4:4:4 | Any | Any | Any | Any |
4:4:0 | Any | Multiple of 2 | lumaWidth | llumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
?
The full scanline width must be encoded, and the width of the bitmap sources must match their planar configuration.
Additionally, if a pixel format is set via
The supported pixel formats of the bitmap sources passed into this method are as follows:
Plane Count | Plane 1 | Plane 2 | Plane 3 |
---|---|---|---|
3 | |||
2 | N/A |
?
Writes lines from the source planes to the encoded format.
Specifies an array of
The number of component planes specified by the planes parameter.
The source rectangle of pixels to encode from the
If the planes and source rectangle do not meet the requirements, this method fails with
If the
Successive WriteSource calls are assumed sequentially add scanlines to the output image.
The interleaved pixel format set via
WIC JPEG Encoder:
QueryInterface can be used to obtain this interface from the WIC JPEG
Depending upon the configured chroma subsampling, the lineCount parameter has the following restrictions:
Chroma Subsampling | X Coordinate | Y Coordinate | Chroma Width | Chroma Height |
---|---|---|---|---|
4:2:0 | Multiple of 2 | Multiple of 2 | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | lumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
4:2:2 | Multiple of 2 | Any | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | Any |
4:4:4 | Any | Any | Any | Any |
4:4:0 | Any | Multiple of 2 | lumaWidth | llumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
?
The full scanline width must be encoded, and the width of the bitmap sources must match their planar configuration.
Additionally, if a pixel format is set via
The supported pixel formats of the bitmap sources passed into this method are as follows:
Plane Count | Plane 1 | Plane 2 | Plane 3 |
---|---|---|---|
3 | |||
2 | N/A |
?
Writes lines from the source planes to the encoded format.
Specifies an array of
The number of component planes specified by the planes parameter.
The source rectangle of pixels to encode from the
If the planes and source rectangle do not meet the requirements, this method fails with
If the
Successive WriteSource calls are assumed sequentially add scanlines to the output image.
The interleaved pixel format set via
WIC JPEG Encoder:
QueryInterface can be used to obtain this interface from the WIC JPEG
Depending upon the configured chroma subsampling, the lineCount parameter has the following restrictions:
Chroma Subsampling | X Coordinate | Y Coordinate | Chroma Width | Chroma Height |
---|---|---|---|---|
4:2:0 | Multiple of 2 | Multiple of 2 | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | lumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
4:2:2 | Multiple of 2 | Any | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | Any |
4:4:4 | Any | Any | Any | Any |
4:4:0 | Any | Multiple of 2 | lumaWidth | llumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
?
The full scanline width must be encoded, and the width of the bitmap sources must match their planar configuration.
Additionally, if a pixel format is set via
The supported pixel formats of the bitmap sources passed into this method are as follows:
Plane Count | Plane 1 | Plane 2 | Plane 3 |
---|---|---|---|
3 | |||
2 | N/A |
?
Provides access to planar Y?CbCr pixel formats where pixel components are stored in separate component planes. This interface also allows access to other codec optimizations for flip/rotate, scale, and format conversion to other Y?CbCr planar formats; this is similar to the pre-existing
QueryInterface can be used to obtain this interface from the Windows provided implementations of
Use this method to determine if a desired planar output is supported and allow the caller to choose an optimized code path if it is. Otherwise, callers should fall back to
The following transforms can be checked:
When a transform is supported, this method returns the description of the resulting planes in the pPlaneDescriptions parameter.
Check the value of pfIsSupported to determine if the transform is supported via
Copies pixels into the destination planes. Configured by the supplied input parameters.
If a dstTransform, scale, or format conversion is specified, cbStride is the transformed stride and is based on the destination pixel format of the pDstPlanes parameter, not the original source's pixel format.
The source rectangle of pixels to copy.
The width to scale the source bitmap. This parameter must be equal to a value obtainable through IWICPlanarBitmapSourceTransform:: DoesSupportTransform.
The height to scale the source bitmap. This parameter must be equal to a value obtainable through IWICPlanarBitmapSourceTransform:: DoesSupportTransform.
The desired rotation or flip to perform prior to the pixel copy. A rotate can be combined with a flip horizontal or a flip vertical, see
Used to specify additional configuration options for the transform. See
WIC JPEG Decoder:
Specifies the pixel format and output buffer for each component plane. The number of planes and pixel format of each plane must match values obtainable through
The number of component planes specified by the pDstPlanes parameter.
If the specified scale, flip/rotate, and planar format configuration is not supported this method fails with
WIC JPEG Decoder: Depending on the configured chroma subsampling of the image, the source rectangle has the following restrictions:
Chroma Subsampling | X Coordinate | Y Coordinate | Chroma Width | Chroma Height |
---|---|---|---|---|
4:2:0 | Multiple of 2 | Multiple of 2 | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | lumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
4:2:2 | Multiple of 2 | Any | lumaWidth / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. | lumaHeight |
4:4:4 | Any | Any | llumaWidth | llumaHeight |
4:4:0 | Any | Multiple of 2 | lumaWidth | llumaHeight / 2 Rounded up to the nearest integer. |
?
The pDstPlanes parameter supports the following pixel formats.
Plane Count | Plane 1 | Plane 2 | Plane 3 |
---|---|---|---|
3 | |||
2 | N/A |
?
Allows a format converter to be initialized with a planar source. You can use QueryInterface to obtain this interface from the Windows provided implementation of
Initializes a format converter with a planar source, and specifies the interleaved output pixel format.
An array of
The number of component planes specified by the planes parameter.
The destination interleaved pixel format.
The
The palette to use for conversion.
The alpha threshold to use for conversion.
The palette translation type to use for conversion.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Initializes a format converter with a planar source, and specifies the interleaved output pixel format.
An array of
The number of component planes specified by the planes parameter.
The destination interleaved pixel format.
The
The palette to use for conversion.
The alpha threshold to use for conversion.
The palette translation type to use for conversion.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Initializes a format converter with a planar source, and specifies the interleaved output pixel format.
An array of
The number of component planes specified by the planes parameter.
The destination interleaved pixel format.
The
The palette to use for conversion.
The alpha threshold to use for conversion.
The palette translation type to use for conversion.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Query if the format converter can convert from one format to another.
An array of WIC pixel formats that represents source image planes.
The number of source pixel formats specified by the pSrcFormats parameter.
The destination interleaved pixel format.
True if the conversion is supported.
If the conversion is not supported, this method returns
If this method fails, the out parameter pfCanConvert is invalid.
To specify an interleaved input pixel format, provide a length 1 array to pSrcPixelFormats.
Notify method is documented only for compliance; its use is not recommended and may be altered or unavailable in the future. Instead, and use RegisterProgressNotification.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Exposes methods for obtaining information about and controlling progressive decoding.
Images can only be progressively decoded if they were progressively encoded. Progressive images automatically start at the highest (best quality) progressive level. The caller must manually set the decoder to a lower progressive level.
E_NOTIMPL is returned if the codec does not support progressive level decoding.
Gets the number of levels of progressive decoding supported by the CODEC.
Users should not use this function to iterate through the progressive levels of a progressive JPEG image. JPEG progressive levels are determined by the image and do not have a fixed level count. Using this method will force the application to wait for all progressive levels to be downloaded before it can return. Instead, applications should use the following code to iterate through the progressive levels of a progressive JPEG image.
Gets or sets the decoder's current progressive level.
The level always defaults to the highest progressive level. In order to decode a lower progressive level, SetCurrentLevel must first be called.
Gets the number of levels of progressive decoding supported by the CODEC.
Indicates the number of levels supported by the CODEC.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Users should not use this function to iterate through the progressive levels of a progressive JPEG image. JPEG progressive levels are determined by the image and do not have a fixed level count. Using this method will force the application to wait for all progressive levels to be downloaded before it can return. Instead, applications should use the following code to iterate through the progressive levels of a progressive JPEG image.
Gets the decoder's current progressive level.
Indicates the current level specified.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The level always defaults to the highest progressive level. In order to decode a lower progressive level, SetCurrentLevel must first be called.
Specifies the level to retrieve on the next call to CopyPixels.
If this method succeeds, it returns
A call does not have to request every level supported. If a caller requests level 1, without having previously requested level 0, the bits returned by the next call to CopyPixels will include both levels.
If the requested level is invalid, the error returned is
Represents a Windows Imaging Component (WIC) stream for referencing imaging and metadata content.
Decoders and metadata handlers are expected to create sub streams of whatever stream they hold when handing off control for embedded metadata to another metadata handler. If the stream is not restricted then use MAXLONGLONG as the max size and offset 0.
The
Initializes a stream from another stream. Access rights are inherited from the underlying stream.
The initialize stream.
If this method succeeds, it returns
Initializes a stream from a particular file.
The file used to initialize the stream.
The desired file access mode.
Value | Meaning |
---|---|
| Read access. |
| Write access. |
?
If this method succeeds, it returns
The
Initializes a stream to treat a block of memory as a stream. The stream cannot grow beyond the buffer size.
Pointer to the buffer used to initialize the stream.
The size of buffer.
If this method succeeds, it returns
This method should be avoided whenever possible. The caller is responsible for ensuring the memory block is valid for the lifetime of the stream when using InitializeFromMemory. A workaround for this behavior is to create an
If you require a growable memory stream, use CreateStreamOnHGlobal.
Initializes the stream as a substream of another stream.
Pointer to the input stream.
The stream offset used to create the new stream.
The maximum size of the stream.
If this method succeeds, it returns
The stream functions with its own stream position, independent of the underlying stream but restricted to a region. All seek positions are relative to the sub region. It is allowed, though not recommended, to have multiple writable sub streams overlapping the same range.
Contains members that identify a pattern within an image file which can be used to identify a particular format.
The offset the pattern is located in the file.
The pattern length.
The actual pattern.
The pattern mask.
The end of the stream.
Specifies the pixel format, buffer, stride and size of a component plane for a planar pixel format.
Describes the pixel format of the plane.
Pointer to the buffer that holds the plane?s pixel components.
The stride of the buffer ponted to by pbData. Stride indicates the total number of bytes to go from the beginning of one scanline to the beginning of the next scanline.
The total size of the buffer pointed to by pbBuffer.
Specifies the pixel format and size of a component plane.
Describes the pixel format of the plane.
Component width of the plane.
Component height of the plane.
Specifies the
Specifies the DDS image dimension,
This defines parameters that you can use to override the default parameters normally used when encoding an image.
If this parameter is not passed to the encoding API, the encoder uses these settings.
The pixel format to which the image is processed before it is written to the encoder.
The DPI in the x dimension.
The DPI in the y dimension.
The top corner in pixels of the image space to be encoded to the destination.
The left corner in pixels of the image space to be encoded to the destination.
The width in pixels of the part of the image to write.
The height in pixels of the part of the image to write.
Represents a JPEG frame header.
Get the frame header for an image by calling
The width of the JPEG frame.
The height of the JPEG frame.
The transfer matrix of the JPEG frame.
The scan type of the JPEG frame.
The number of components in the frame.
The component identifiers.
The sample factors. Use one of the following constants, described in
The format of the quantization table indices. Use one of the following constants, described in
Represents a JPEG frame header.
Get the scan header for an image by calling
The number of components in the scan.
The interval of reset markers within the scan.
The component identifiers.
The format of the quantization table indices. Use one of the following constants, described in
The start of the spectral selection.
The end of the spectral selection.
The successive approximation high.
The successive approximation low.
Defines raw codec capabilites.
Size of the
The codec's major version.
The codec's minor version.
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
Represents a raw image tone curve.
The number of tone curve points.
The array of tone curve points.
Represents a raw image tone curve point.
The tone curve input.
The tone curve output.